CITY OF TORONTO PARKS, FORESTRY AND RECREATION … · .3 Submittal Schedule for Shop Drawings and...

CITY OF TORONTO

PARKS, FORESTRY AND RECREATION DIVISION

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

FOR

PROJECT: State of Good Repair (SGR) Improvements to

Mary McCormick Recreation Centre.

FACILITY: Mary McCormick Recreation Centre . A

ADDRESS: 66 Sheridan Avenue, City of Toronto

Date of issue: May 10, 2019

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Mary McCormick Recreation Centre

66 Sheridan Avenue, Toronto Section 00000 - Page 1 of 4

Section Number Title No. PAGES

PART I

DIVISION 00 - BID DOCUMENTS City of Toronto Request for Tender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table of Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

PART II

DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Section 01110 - Summary of Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Section 01210 - Allowances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Section 01320 - Construction Progress Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Section 01360 - Special Procedures for Occupied Buildings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Section 01450 - Quality Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Section 01560 - Temporary Barriers and Enclosures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Section 01730 - Execution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

DIVISION 2 - SITE WORK Section 02315 - Excavating, Trenching and Backfilling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Section 02413 - Selective Demolition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Section 02901 - Tree and Shrub Preservation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

DIVISION 3 - CONCRETE Section 03200 - Concrete Reinforcement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Section 03300 - Cast-In-Place Concrete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Section 03484 - Specialty Repair Concrete Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

DIVISION 4 - MASONRY Section 04211 - Basic Unit Masonry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

DIVISION 5 - METALS Section 05121 - Structural Steel for Buildings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

DIVISION 6 – WOOD, PLASTICS AND COMPOSITES Nil

DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION Section 07900 - Sealants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

TABLE OF CONTENTS



DIVISION 8 - DOORS AND WINDOWS Section 08110 - Standard Steel Doors and Frames . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Section 08711 - Door Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

DIVISION 9 - FINISHES Section 09310 - Ceramic Tile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Section 09650 – Resilient Tile Flooring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Section 09900 – Painting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES Section 10170 - Phenolic Toilet Partitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Section 10800 - Toilet, Bath and Laundry Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

DIVISION 11 to DIVISION 14 INCLUSIVE Section 14241 - Refurbishment of Existing Elevator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL Section 15010 - Mechanical General Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Section 15250 - Thermal Insulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Section 15400 - Plumbing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Section 15700 - Air Distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . 5 Section 15800 - Heating Ventilation and Air Conditioning – Air Systems . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . 7 Section 15900 - Controls & Instrumentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . 29

DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL Section 16010 - General Electrical Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Section 16100 - General Electrical Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Section 16111 - Conduits, Fastenings & Fittings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Section 16131 - Splitters, Boxes, Cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Section 16132 - Outlet, & Conduit Boxes and Fittings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Section 16724 - Public Address System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

OPSS (ONTARIO PROVINCIAL STANDARD SPECIFICATION) OPSS 351 - Construction Specification for Concrete Sidewalk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 OPSS 1010 - Material Specification for Aggregates - Base, Subbase, Select Subgrade, and Backfill Material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

ADDITIONAL REPORTS City of Toronto Standard Building Automation System (BAS) Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

TABLE OF CONTENTS



LIST OF DRAWINGS

Consultant’s Project Number: 6490/Z48

Drawing

No.

Drawing Name

1 Key Plan General Notes List of Drawings

1B Phasing Plan Construction Access

2 Ground Floor Plan Existing Conditions & Demolition

3 Main Floor Plan Existing Conditions & Demolition

4 Second Floor Plan Existing Conditions & Demolition

5 Ground Floor Plan New Works

6 Main Floor Plan New Works

7 Second Floor Plan New Works

8 Main Floor Plan Pool Deck and Basin Repairs

9 Pool Office, Room 130 Details Emergency Exit Repair Details

10A Changeroom Upgrades Demolition Plan

10B Changeroom Upgrades New Work

11 Door Elevations Door Finish Schedule

12 Room Finish Schedule Pool Marking Plan

13 Lift Details

14 Lift Sections (Lift @ Main Lobby)

15 Lift Sections (Lift @ Pool Area)

S1 Structural Plan

M1 Mechanical Ground Floor Plan Existing Conditions & Demolition

M2 Mechanical Main Floor Plan Existing Conditions & Demolition

M3 Mechanical Second Floor Plan Existing Conditions & Demolition

M4 Mechanical Roof Plan Existing Conditions & Demolition

M5 Mechanical Ground Floor Plan New Works

TABLE OF CONTENTS



Drawing

No.

Drawing Name

M6 Mechanical Main Floor Plan New Works

M7 Mechanical Second Floor Plan New Works

M8 Mechanical Roof Plan New Works

M9 Specification (1)

M10 Specification (2)

P1 Plumbing Main Floor Plan Existing Conditions & Demolition

P2 Plumbing Main Floor Plan New Works

E1 Electrical Ground Floor Lighting Plan

E2 Electrical Main Floor Lighting Plan

E3 Electrical Second Floor Lighting Plan

E4 Electrical Ground Floor Layout

E5 Electrical Main Floor Layout

E6 Electrical Second Floor Layout Legend, Notes

Pool1 Pool System UV Disinfection System

End of Table of Contents

SUMMARY OF WORK Mary McCormick Recreation Centre 66 Sheridan Avenue, Toronto Section 01110 - Page 1 of 2

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 Section Includes

.1 Title and description of Work.

.2 Contract Method.

.3 Work sequence.

.4 Contractor use of premises.

1.2 Work Covered by Contract Documents

.1 Work of this Contract involves a variety of items, including but not limited to:

▪ Upgrade pool area to meet accessibility

guidelines (replacement lift for access into pool basin; replace existing elevator/lift); refinish ceiling; replace acoustic panels; refinish pool tank walls, floors with new tiles; refinish pool deck with new tiles; repair floor cracks in pool area; change the configuration of the existing staff room to improvise pool visibility; new water bottle filling station

▪ Upgrade changerooms to meet accessibility guidelines and up-to-date design standards including changing the existing layout; refinish walls, floors and ceilings; new lockers; new partitions; new plumbing fixtures

▪ Upgrade accessibility for emergency exits, replace emergency exit doors

▪ Repair concrete floor at the emergency exit vestibule

▪ Chlorine room: remove existing scale and old piping; replace heater; replace eyewash station; replace ventilation unit and fresh air intake

▪ Refinish wooden gym floor ▪ Paint the upper level weight room and

refinish floor ▪ Paint all walls and ceilings for the areas

affected by construction ▪ Replace existing “Dectron” pool

dehumidifier, with an improved capacity to handle relative high humidity & temperature in pool space (pool water temperature to be maintained to 90⁰F

▪ Add a new pool UV sanitizing system ▪ Replace existing light fixtures with new LED

fixtures ▪ Replace heat exchanger controls for the

pool with new digital controls ▪ Provide a new emergency shutdown for the

filtration system, complete with audible and visual alarm, to be located in pool area

▪ Replace the existing hydraulic passenger

SUMMARY OF WORK Mary McCormick Recreation Centre 66 Sheridan Avenue, Toronto Section 01110 - Page 2 of 2

elevator serving Lobby, first and second floor in the building with a new one, same size and capacity

▪ Replace three old electrical panels in the building

▪ Provide a new pubic announcement system throughout the whole building

▪ Replace 3 rooftop mechanical units ▪ Replace all pool deck drain pipes ▪ Provide a new BAS system as per City of

Toronto standard building Automation system specification, connect all existing and new equipment to the new BAS system

▪ Replace all exit signs and emergency lights with new

▪ Mechanical and electrical upgrades to support the scope of work

▪ Miscellaneous repairs and upgrades

All work is located at Mary McCormick Recreation Centre, 66 Sheridan Avenue in Toronto, Ontario.

1.3 Contract Method

.1 Construct Work under single, stipulated price contract.

1.4 Work Sequence

.1 Work is to be completed in a continuous manner so that the facility may resume its regularly scheduled programming as soon as possible. Refer to the City’s Front-End for further details on the schedule requirements Note: facility will be partially occupied during the works.

.2 Maintain fire access/control.

1.5 Contractor Use of Premises

.1 Contractor shall limit use of premises for Work & storage.

.2 Coordinate use of premises under direction of Owner.

.3 Obtain and pay for use of additional storage or work areas needed for operations under this Contract.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Not Used

.1 Not used.

PART 3 – EXECUTION

3.1 Not Used

.1 Not used.

End of Section

ALLOWANCES Mary McCormick Recreation Centre 66 Sheridan Avenue, Toronto Section 01210 - Page 1 of 2

PART 1 - GENERAL


.1 Cash allowances. .2 Contingency allowance.

1.2 References

.1 City’s Front-End

1.3 Cash Allowances

.1 Reserved. .2 Amount of cash allowance, for Work, is in the amount shown

on the Bid Form and is as follows:

.1 Testing and inspection

.2 Asbestos Abatement .3 Expenditures under cash allowance will be authorized by City

of Toronto. Consultant will confirm the type and number of tests required.

1.4 Contingency Allowance

.1 Included in Contract Price a contingency allowance as specified on the Bid Form.

.2 Expenditures under contingency allowance will be authorized

in accordance with City of Toronto procedures.

1.5 Overhead and Profit

.1 The Contractor’s overhead and profit when applied to changes to the contract is understood to include:

.1 The Contractor’s and Sub-Contractor’s administrative

and incidental costs relating to a change including, without limitation, head office and site office expenses, associated traveling costs, all vehicle costs, downtime, estimating, purchasing, project coordination, workers’ tools, financing costs including holdback, bonding and insurance costs, business development.

.2 The salaries of Superintendents, Project Managers,

engineers, timekeepers, accountants, clerks, watch persons and other site supervision staff above foreperson level employed directly on the Work; Administrative costs including payroll and benefits burden, shop drawing production and record drawings, clean-up and disposal of waste materials, etc.

ALLOWANCES Mary McCormick Recreation Centre 66 Sheridan Avenue, Toronto Section 01210 - Page 2 of 2

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 Not Used

.1 Not Used.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Not Used

.1 Not Used.

End of Section

CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION Mary McCormick Recreation Centre 66 Sheridan Avenue, Toronto Section 01320 - Page 1 of 2

PART 1 - GENERAL


.1 Schedule, form, content.

1.2 Related Sections

.1 Section 01330 – Submittal Procedures.

1.3 Schedules Required

.1 Submit schedules as follows:

.1 Construction Progress Schedule.

.2 Cost Breakdown.

.3 Submittal Schedule for Shop Drawings and Product Data.

.4 Submittal Schedule for Samples.

.5 Product Delivery Schedule.

.6 Cash Allowance Schedule for purchasing Products.

.7 Shutdown or closure activity.

1.4 Format

.1 Prepare schedule in form of a horizontal Gantt bar chart. .2 Provide a separate bar for each major item of work, trade

or operation. .3 Split horizontally for projected and actual performance. .4 Provide horizontal time scale identifying first work day of

each week. .5 Format for listings: Table of Contents of this specification. .6 Identification of listings: By specification Section numbers

and specification subjects.

1.5 Submission

.1 Submit initial format of schedules within 15 working days after award of Contract.

.2 Submit schedules in electronic format, forward through e-

mail as pdf files. .3 Submit one opaque reproduction, plus 2 copies to be

retained by Consultant. .4 Consultant will review schedule and return review copy

within 10 days after receipt. .5 Resubmit finalized schedule within 7 days after return of

review copy.

CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION Mary McCormick Recreation Centre 66 Sheridan Avenue, Toronto Section 01320 - Page 2 of 2

.6 Submit revised progress schedule with each application for payment.

.7 Distribute copies of revised schedule to:

.1 Job site office.

.2 Subcontractors.

.3 Other concerned parties. .8 Instruct recipients to report to Contractor within 10 days,

any problems anticipated by timetable shown in schedule.

1.6 Progress Photographs

.1 Progress Photographs By Consultant

.1 Consultant will take periodic progress photographs. .2 Progress Photographs By Contractor

.1 Contractor will take daily photographs to illustrate the progress of the work. These photographs to be emailed weekly to the consultant. In addition, at the end of the project, the contractor is to organize all photographs on a CD and submit to the consultant as part of the closeout documents.

1.7 Submittals Schedule

.1 Include schedule for submitting shop drawings, product data and samples.

.2 Indicate dates for submitting, review time, resubmission

time, last date for meeting fabrication schedule. .3 Include dates when reviewed submittals will be required

from Consultants.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Not Used

.1 Not Used.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Not Used

.1 Not Used.

End of Section

SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES Mary McCormick Recreation Centre 66 Sheridan Avenue, Toronto Section 01330 - Page 1 of 4

PART 1 - GENERAL


.1 Shop drawings and product data. .2 Samples. .3 Certificates and transcripts.


.1 Section 01320 - Construction Progress Documentation. .2 Section 01450 - Quality Control. .3 Reserved.

1.3 Administrative

.1 Submit to Consultant submittals listed for review. Submit with reasonable promptness and in orderly sequence so as to not cause delay in Work. Failure to submit in ample time is not considered sufficient reason for an extension of Contract Time and no claim for extension by reason of such default will be allowed.

.2 Work affected by submittal shall not proceed until review is

complete. .3 Present shop drawings, product data, samples and mock-

ups in SI Metric units. .4 Where items or information is not produced in SI Metric

units converted values are acceptable. .5 Review submittals prior to submission to Consultant. This

review represents that necessary requirements have been determined and verified, or will be, and that each submittal has been checked and coordinated with requirements of Work and Contract Documents. Submittals not stamped, signed, dated and identified as to specific project will be returned without being examined and shall be considered rejected.

.6 Notify Consultant, in writing at time of submission,

identifying deviations from requirements of Contract Documents stating reasons for deviations.

.7 Verify field measurements and affected adjacent Work are

coordinated. .8 Contractor's responsibility for errors and omissions in

submission is not relieved by Consultant's review of submittals.


.9 Contractor's responsibility for deviations in submission from requirements of Contract Documents is not relieved by Consultant review.

.10 Keep one reviewed copy of each submission on site.

1.4 Shop Drawings and Product Data

.1 The term "shop drawings" means drawings, diagrams, illustrations, schedules, performance charts, brochures and other data which are to be provided by Contractor to illustrate details of a portion of Work.

.2 Indicate materials, methods of construction and attachment

or anchorage, erection diagrams, connections, explanatory notes and other information necessary for completion of Work. Where articles or equipment attach or connect to other articles or equipment, indicate that such items have been coordinated, regardless of Section under which adjacent items will be supplied and installed. Indicate cross references to design drawings and specifications.

.3 Allow 10 days for Consultant's review of each submission. .4 Adjustments made on shop drawings by Consultant are not

intended to change Contract Price. If adjustments affect value of Work, state such in writing to Consultant prior to proceeding with Work.

.5 Make changes in shop drawings as Consultant may

require, consistent with Contract Documents. When resubmitting, notify Consultant in writing of any revisions other than those requested.

.6 Accompany submissions with transmittal letter, in

duplicate, containing: .1 Date. .2 Project title and number. .3 Contractor's name and address. .4 Identification and quantity of each shop drawing,

product data and sample. .5 Other pertinent data.

.7 Submissions shall include:

.1 Date and revision dates.

.2 Project title and number.

.3 Name and address of: .1 Subcontractor. .2 Supplier. .3 Manufacturer.

.4 Contractor's stamp, signed by Contractor's authorized representative certifying approval of submissions, verification of field measurements and compliance with Contract Documents.


.5 Details of appropriate portions of Work as applicable: .1 Fabrication. .2 Layout, showing dimensions, including

identified field dimensions, and clearances. .3 Setting or erection details. .4 Capacities. .5 Performance characteristics. .6 Standards. .7 Operating weight. .8 Wiring diagrams. .9 Single line and schematic diagrams. .10 Relationship to adjacent work.

.8 After Consultant's review, distribute copies.

.9 Submit 6 prints and 1 electronic copy of shop drawings for each requirement requested in specification Sections and as consultant may reasonably request.

.10 Submit 6 prints and 1 electronic copy of product data sheets or brochures for requirements requested in specification Sections and as requested by Consultant where shop drawings will not be prepared due to standardized manufacture of product.

.11 Delete information not applicable to project.

.12 Supplement standard information to provide details applicable to project.

.13 If upon review by Consultant, no errors or omissions are discovered or if only minor corrections are made, copies will be returned and fabrication and installation of Work may proceed. If shop drawings are rejected, noted copy will be returned and resubmission of corrected shop drawings, through same procedure indicated above, must be performed before fabrication and installation of Work may proceed.

.14 The review of shop drawings by Consultant is for sole purpose of ascertaining conformance with general concept. This review shall not mean that Consultant approves detail design inherent in shop drawings, responsibility for which shall remain with Contractor submitting same, and such review shall not relieve Contractor of responsibility for errors or omissions in shop drawings or of responsibility for meeting all requirements of construction and Contract Documents. Without restricting generality of foregoing, Contractor is responsible for dimensions to be confirmed and correlated at job site, for information that pertains solely to fabrication processes or to techniques of construction and installation and for coordination of Work of all sub-trades.


1.5 Samples

.1 Submit for review samples in duplicate/triplicate as requested in respective specification Sections. Label samples with origin and intended use.

.2 Deliver samples prepaid to Consultant's business address. .3 Notify Consultant in writing, at time of submission of

deviations in samples from requirements of Contract Documents.

.4 Where colour, pattern or texture is criterion, submit full

range of samples. .5 Adjustments made on samples by Consultant are not

intended to change Contract Price. If adjustments affect value of Work, state such in writing to Consultant prior to proceeding with Work.

.6 Make changes in samples which Consultant may require,

consistent with Contract Documents. .7 Reviewed and accepted samples will become standard of

workmanship and material against which installed Work will be verified.

1.6 Progress Photographs

.1 Contractor to maintain progress photographs in accordance with Section 01320 - Construction Progress Documentation. . A mandatory requirement for this project is for the contractor to submit all progress photographs on a CD at the end of the project as part of the closeout documents. Photographs to be labeled by date/construction activity. Submission of photographs (in hard copy format) will be required in the event of a discrepancy between the Consultant and Contractor

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Not Used

.1 Not Used.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Not Used

.1 Not Used.

End of Section

SPECIAL PROCEDURES FOR OCCUPIED BUILDINGS Mary McCormick Recreation Centre 66 Sheridan Avenue, Toronto Section 01360 - Page 1 of 3

1. CONTRACTOR USE OF PREMISES .1 Limit access of construction personnel to existing building only at locations approved by

the Owner.

Ensure that construction personnel perform work in existing building only as required under the Contract; and that they do not use it as access to work areas, except for work in existing building, or for other purposes.

.3 Use of washroom and services in existing building by construction personnel is strictly prohibited.

.4 Construction personnel shall use areas of the existing building for their purposes only as designated by the Owner and only while Work is in progress. Prohibit lounging and smoking. Keep assigned areas clean and return them to an "as was" condition at completion of construction.

.5 Smoking is strictly prohibited on all property.

.6 Do not take meal and coffee breaks in the existing building. Provide space outside the building, or in site trailer for workers' breaks.

.7 Keep traffic through existing occupied areas to an absolute minimum in executing the Work.

.8 Minimize noise, dust, and odours to ensure patrons in areas adjacent to the construction area are disturbed as little as possible. Implement immediate corrective action to cease or limit disagreeable annoyances to patrons upon notification by Owner.

.9 Make good damage to building, fixtures, and fittings caused during use by construction personnel by replacement with new work. Include cost of installation and making good of other work thereby affected in replacement.

.10 Assume total responsibility for security of construction areas within the existing building upon commencement of Work, particularly where construction areas are exposed to the exterior. Secure construction areas by methods compatible with the total security established for building.

.11 Construction personnel shall use areas of the existing buildings only in a manner as determined by the Work.

.12 Arrange with the Owner for appropriate times for noisy and dusty work.

2. OWNER'S USE OF EXISTING BUILDING

.1 The existing building will remain in use throughout the duration of construction of the Work. The Owner will maintain control over operation of building systems during construction.

.2 Provide and maintain continuation of fire protection, fire walls and fire rated assemblies in existing building.


.3 Maintain existing exits and provide proper and safe means of egress from all parts of existing building to open spaces at all times to the approval of jurisdictional authorities. Identify, provide exit lights, and illuminate temporary means of egress.

.4 Execute work in existing building at times approved by Owner, so not to inconvenience their occupation or in any manner hinder their use of building.

.5 Give Owner two weeks (minimum 14 working days) notice of intention to commence work in a room or area of existing building.

.6 Execute work as quietly as possible in and around existing building at all times Owner is occupying it. Schedule noisy operations with Owner to achieve least disturbance to staff and students.

3. DUST CONTROL .1 Prior to any work being done or removal of ceiling tiles or opening of ceiling access

hatches, erect a floor to ceiling dust tight partition which completely encloses the area of work; .1 Maintain barriers throughout the work and repair or replace as required or

instructed.

.2 Completely remove barrier when work is finished and remove any marks left by tape or studs.

.2 Post "Construction Zone" signage outside barrier and entrance to all work areas.

.3 Take precautions when working on existing ceilings, ducts and piping systems. Protect workers with the following minimum requirements: .1 Carefully remove acoustical ceiling panels keeping horizontal if possible,

and vacuum and clean the panels immediately upon removal.

.2 Clean air ducts, conduits and space above the ceiling with a HEPA filter equipped vacuum cleaner prior to start of any work.

.4 Throughout the work period, ensure that: .1 Plastic barrier flaps or doors to construction area remain closed. .2 Place adhesive floor strips or walk-off mats outside the door to the

construction area. .3 Clean and vacuum construction and surrounding areas frequently with

vacuum cleaners equipped with HEPA filters. .4 Vacuum carpeted areas daily or more often if necessary .5 Shampoo carpets when the construction work is complete. .6 Remove dust from body and clothing when traversing Owner occupied areas.

.5 Carts, tools and equipment entering the construction area should remain there until the work is complete. Clean thoroughly prior to removal from the construction area.


4. PROTECTION

.1 Protect staff and visitors from any danger arising from the work. Supply, erect. maintain and remove signs, barricades, barriers, etc. as required, sharp tools and dangerous objects must not be left unattended.

.2 The job site shall remain clean and tidy at all times. Only those materials required each day are to be brought to the job Site.

.3 Remove all garbage and scrap from work site on a daily basis, or more often if required. Owner's recycle containers and garbage bins shall not be used.

.4 Fire routes or personnel thoroughfares must not be obstructed. Fire doors must not be wedged open or latches disengaged.

.5 Safety clearances are required before any cutting, welding, core drilling, open flame work or dust work is done. A request in writing to the Owner must be made and approved a minimum of 72 hours before this work is anticipated.

.6 Provide dust tight partitions to prevent dust and dirt migrating from the work area. Remove when no longer required.

7 Apply craft paper to all windows (interior & exterior) for privacy. Remove when no longer required (i.e. when the construction work is complete). Interior windows to be covered completely from top to bottom; exterior windows to be covered up to 2400mm in height to allow some natural daylight to enter the space.

5. EMERGENCY AND FIRE PROTECTION

.1 Provide and maintain at all times, ready access to fire-fighting equipment

.2 While work is proceeding in existing building, existing fire hoses and fire extinguishers shall be used as required. Recharge fire extinguishers if used and re-rack hoses,

.3 Provide temporary portable fire extinguishers throughout the work and at every work area

.4 Prior to execution of any work which may possibly start a fire, provide proper and suitable precautions and fire extinguishers. Provide fire-watch during and for minimum 6 hours after all welding operations.

6. TEMPORARY EXHAUST

.1 Maintain areas of construction and demolition under negative pressure during the work. Employ minimum 400 L/s temporary exhaust system to provide directional airflow from occupied space through dust screens.

.2 Provide and maintain during the work, temporary exhaust system discharging to the building exterior, consisting of discharge ducts, exhaust fan, atmospheric draft damper, temporary duct with taped joints from exhaust fan through new opening in the building envelope and extract points within each contained construction area.

End of Section

QUALITY CONTROL Mary McCormick Recreation Centre 66 Sheridan Avenue, Toronto ection 01450 - Page 1 of 3

PART 1 - GENERAL


.1 Inspection and testing, administrative and enforcement requirements.

.2 Tests and mix designs. .3 Mill tests. .4 Equipment and system adjust and balance.


.1 Section 01210 - Allowances. .2 Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures. .3 Section 01420 - References. .4 Section 01780 - Closeout Submittals.

1.3 Inspection

.1 Allow Consultant access to Work. If part of Work is in preparation at locations other than Place of Work, allow access to such Work whenever it is in progress.

.2 Give timely notice requesting inspection if Work is

designated for special tests, inspections or approvals by Consultant instructions, or law of Place of Work.

.3 If Contractor covers or permits to be covered Work that

has been designated for special tests, inspections or approvals before such is made, uncover such Work, have inspections or tests satisfactorily completed and make good such Work.

.4 Consultant may order any part of Work to be examined if

Work is suspected to be not in accordance with Contract Documents. If, upon examination such work is found not in accordance with Contract Documents, correct such Work and pay cost of examination and correction. If such Work is found in accordance with Contract Documents, Owner shall pay cost of examination and replacement.

1.4 Independent Inspection Agencies

.1 Independent Inspection/Testing Agencies will be engaged by Owner for purpose of inspecting and/or testing portions of Work.

.2 Allocated costs: to Section 01210 - Allowances. .3 Provide equipment required for executing inspection and


testing by appointed agencies. .4 Employment of inspection/testing agencies does not relax

responsibility to perform Work in accordance with Contract Documents.

.5 If defects are revealed during inspection and/or testing,

appointed agency will request additional inspection and/or testing to ascertain full degree of defect. Correct defect and irregularities as advised by Consultant at no cost to Consultant. Pay costs for retesting and reinspection.

1.5 Access to Work

.1 Allow inspection/testing agencies access to Work, off site manufacturing and fabrication plants.

.2 Co-operate to provide reasonable facilities for such

access.

1.6 Procedures

.1 Notify appropriate agency and Consultant in advance of requirement for tests, in order that attendance arrangements can be made.

.2 Submit samples and/or materials required for testing, as

specifically requested in specifications. Submit with reasonable promptness and in an orderly sequence so as not to cause delay in Work.

.3 Provide labour and facilities to obtain and handle samples

and materials on site. Provide sufficient space to store and cure test samples.

1.7 Rejected Work

.1 Remove defective Work, whether result of poor workmanship, use of defective products or damage and whether incorporated in Work or not, which has been rejected by Consultant as failing to conform to Contract Documents. Replace or re-execute in accordance with Contract Documents.

.2 Make good other Contractor's work damaged by such

removals or replacements promptly. .3 If in opinion of Consultant it is not expedient to correct

defective Work or Work not performed in accordance with Contract Documents, Owner may deduct from Contract Price difference in value between Work performed and that called for by Contract Documents, amount of which shall be determined by Consultant.


1.8 Reports

.1 Submit 4 copies of inspection and test reports to Consultant.

.2 Provide copies to Subcontractor of work being inspected or

tested.

1.9 Tests and Mix Designs

.1 Furnish test results and mix designs as may be requested. .2 The cost of tests and mix designs beyond those called for

in Contract Documents or beyond those required by law of Place of Work shall be appraised by Consultant and may be authorized as recoverable.

1.10 Mill Tests

.1 Submit mill test certificates as required of specification Sections.

1.11 Equipment and Systems

.1 Submit adjustment and balancing reports for mechanical, electrical and building equipment systems.

.2 Refer to appropriate sections for definitive requirements.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Not Used

.1 Not Used.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Not Used

.1 Not Used.

End of Section

TEMPORARY BARRIERS AND ENCLOSURES Mary McCormick Recreation Centre 66 Sheridan Avenue, Toronto Section 01560 - Page 1 of 2

PART 1 - GENERAL


.1 Barriers. .2 Environmental Controls. .3 Traffic Controls. .4 Fire Routes.


.1 Section 01510 - Temporary Utilities. .2 Section 01520 - Construction Facilities.

1.3 References

.1 Canadian General Standards Board (CGSB) .1 CGSB 1.189M-84, Primer, Alkyd, Wood, Exterior. .2 CGSB 1.59-97, Alkyd Exterior Gloss Enamel.

.2 Canadian Standards Association (CSA International)

.1 CSA-O121-M1978, Douglas Fir Plywood.

1.4 Installation and Removal

.1 Provide temporary controls in order to execute Work expeditiously.

.2 Remove from site all such work after use.

1.5 Hoarding

.1 Erect temporary site enclosure using new 2.0 m high mod-u-loc steel wired fence. Provide one lockable truck gate. Maintain fence in good repair.

.2 Provide barriers around trees and plants designated to

remain. Protect from damage by equipment and construction procedures.

1.6 Guard Rails and Barricades

.1 Provide secure, rigid guard rails and barricades around excavations and open shafts.

.2 Provide as required by governing authorities.

1.7 Access to Site

.1 Provide and maintain access roads, sidewalk crossings, ramps and construction runways as may be required for access to Work.

TEMPORARY BARRIERS AND ENCLOSURES Mary McCormick Recreation Centre 66 Sheridan Avenue, Toronto Section 01560 - Page 2 of 2

1.8 Public Traffic Flow

.1 Provide and maintain competent signal flag operators, traffic signals, barricades and flares, lights, or lanterns as required to perform Work and protect the public.

1.9 Fire Routes

.1 Maintain access to property including overhead clearances for use by emergency response vehicles.

1.10 Protection for Off-Site and Public Property

.1 Protect surrounding private and public property from damage during performance of Work.

.2 Be responsible for damage incurred.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Not Used

.1 Not Used.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Not Used

.1 Not Used.

End of Section

EXECUTION Mary McCormick Recreation Centre 66 Sheridan Avenue, Toronto Section 01730 - Page 1 of 3

PART 1 - GENERAL


.1 Requirements and limitations for cutting and patching the Work.


.1 Section 01110 - Summary of Work. .2 Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures.

1.3 Submittals

.1 Submit written request in advance of cutting or alteration which affects: .1 Structural integrity of any element of Project. .2 Integrity of weather-exposed or moisture-resistant elements. .3 Efficiency, maintenance, or safety of any operational element. .4 Visual qualities of sight-exposed elements. .5 Work of Owner or separate contractor.

.2 Include in request:

.1 Identification of Project.

.2 Location and description of affected Work.

.3 Statement on necessity for cutting or alteration.

.4 Description of proposed Work, and products to be used. .5 Alternatives to cutting and patching. .6 Effect on Work of Owner or separate contractor. .7 Written permission of affected separate contractor. .8 Date and time work will be executed.

1.4 Materials

.1 Required for original installation. .2 Change in Materials: Submit request for substitution in

accordance with Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures.

1.5 Preparation

.1 Inspect existing conditions, including elements subject to damage or movement during cutting and patching.

.2 After uncovering, inspect conditions affecting performance

of Work. .3 Beginning of cutting or patching means acceptance of

existing conditions. .4 Provide supports to assure structural integrity of

surroundings; provide devices and methods to protect other portions of project from damage.


.5 Provide protection from elements for areas which may be

exposed by uncovering work; maintain excavations free of water.

1.6 Execution

.1 Execute cutting, fitting, and patching including excavation and fill, to complete Work.

.2 Fit several parts together, to integrate with other Work. .3 Uncover Work to install ill-timed Work. .4 Remove and replace defective and non-conforming Work. .5 Provide openings in non-structural elements of Work for

penetrations of mechanical and electrical Work. .6 Execute Work by methods to avoid damage to other Work,

and which will provide proper surfaces to receive patching and finishing.

.7 Employ original installer to perform cutting and patching for

weather-exposed and moisture-resistant elements, and sight-exposed surfaces.

.8 Cut rigid materials using masonry saw or core drill.

Pneumatic or impact tools not allowed on masonry work without prior approval.

.9 Restore work with new products in accordance with

requirements of Contract Documents. .10 Fit Work airtight to pipes, sleeves, ducts, conduit, and

other penetrations through surfaces. .11 At penetration of fire rated wall, ceiling, or floor

construction, completely seal voids with firestopping material, full thickness of the construction element.

.12 Refinish surfaces to match adjacent finishes: For

continuous surfaces refinish to nearest intersection; for an assembly, refinish entire unit.

.13 Conceal pipes, ducts and wiring in floor, wall and ceiling

construction of finished areas except where indicated otherwise.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 Not Used

.1 Not Used.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Not Used

.1 Not Used.

End of Section

EXCAVATING, TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING Mary McCormick Recreation Centre 66 Sheridan Avenue, Toronto Section 02315 - Page 1 of 7

PART 1 - GENERAL


.1 Section 02901 - Tree and Shrub Preservation.

1.2 References

.1 American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) .1 ASTM C 117-95, Standard Test Method for Material Finer Than 0.075 mm (No.200) Sieve in Mineral Aggregates by Washing. .2 ASTM C 136-96a, Standard Test Method for Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates. .3 ASTM D 422-98, Standard Test Method for Particle-Size Analysis of Soils. .4 ASTM D 698-00a, Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort (12,400 ft-lbf/ft ³ ) (600 kN-m/m ³ ). .5 ASTM D 1557-00, Test Method for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Modified Effort (56,000 ft-lbf/ft ³ ) (2,700 kN-m/m ³ ). .6 ASTM D 4318-00, Standard Test Methods for Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit, and Plasticity Index of Soils.

1.3 Definitions

.1 Excavation classes: two classes of excavation will be recognized; common excavation and rock excavation. .1 Rock : any solid material in excess of 0.25 m ³ and which cannot be removed by means of heavy duty mechanical excavating equipment with 0.95 to 1.15 m³ bucket. Frozen material not classified as rock. .2 Common excavation: excavation of materials of whatever nature, which are not included under definitions of rock excavation.

.2 Unclassified excavation: excavation of deposits of

whatever character encountered in Work. .3 Topsoil: material capable of supporting good vegetative

growth and suitable for use in top dressing, landscaping and seeding.

.4 Waste material: excavated material unsuitable for use in

Work or surplus to requirements. .6 Unsuitable materials:

.1 Weak and compressible materials under excavated areas. .2 Frost susceptible materials under excavated areas. .3 Frost susceptible materials:


.1 Fine grained soils with plasticity index less than 10 when tested to ASTM D 4318, and gradation within limits specified when tested to ASTM D 422 and ASTM C 136: Sieve sizes to CAN/CGSB-8.1.

.2 Table

Sieve Designation % Passing 2.00 mm 100 0.10 mm 45 - 100 0.02 mm 10 - 80 0.005 mm 0 - 45

.3 Coarse grained soils containing more than 20 % by mass passing 0.075 mm sieve.

.7 Unshrinkable fill: very weak mixture of Portland cement,

concrete aggregates and water that resists settlement when placed in utility trenches, and capable of being readily excavated.

1.4 Protection of Existing Features

.1 Protect existing features in accordance with Section 01560 - Temporary Barriers and Enclosures and applicable local regulations.

.2 Existing buried utilities and structures:

.1 Size, depth and location of existing utilities and structures as indicated are for guidance only. Completeness and accuracy are not guaranteed. .2 Prior to commencing excavation Work, notify applicable Owner or authorities having jurisdiction, establish location and state of use of buried utilities and structures. Owners or authorities having jurisdiction to clearly mark such locations to prevent disturbance during Work. .3 Confirm locations of buried utilities by careful test excavations. .4 Maintain and protect from damage, water, sewer, gas, electric, telephone and other utilities and structures encountered as indicated. .5 Where utility lines or structures exist in area of excavation, obtain direction of Consultant before removing or re-routing. Costs for such Work to be paid by Owner. .6 Record location of maintained, re-routed and abandoned underground lines.

.3 Existing buildings and surface features:

.1 Conduct, with Consultant, condition survey of


existing buildings, trees and other plants, lawns, fencing, service poles, wires, rail tracks, pavement, survey bench marks and monuments which may be affected by Work. .2 Protect existing buildings and surface features from damage while Work is in progress. In event of damage, immediately make repair to approval of Consultant. .3 Where required for excavation, cut roots or branches in accordance with Section 02901 - Tree and Shrub Preservation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Materials

.1 Type 1 and Type 2 fill: properties to Section 02701 - Aggregates: General and the following requirements: .1 Crushed, pit run or screened stone, gravel or sand. .2 Gradations to be within limits specified when tested to ASTM C 136 and ASTM C 117. Sieve sizes to CAN/CGSB-8.1.

.3 Table

Sieve % Passing Designation Type 1 Type 2 75 mm - 100 50 mm - - 37.5 mm - - 25 mm 100 - 19 mm 75-100 - 12.5 mm - - 9.5 mm 50-100 - 4.75 mm 30-70 22-85 2.00 mm 20-45 - 0.425 mm 10-25 5-30 0.180 mm - - 0.075 mm 3-8 0-10

.2 Type 3 fill: selected material from excavation or other sources, approved by Consultant for use intended, unfrozen and free from rocks larger than 75 mm, cinders, ashes, sods, refuse or other deleterious materials.

.3 Unshrinkable fill; proportioned and mixed to provide.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Site Preparation

.1 Remove obstructions, ice and snow, from surfaces to be excavated within limits indicated.


.2 Cut pavement or sidewalk neatly along limits of proposed

excavation in order that surface may break evenly.

3.2 Stripping of Topsoil

.1 Commence topsoil stripping of areas after area has been cleared of weeds and grasses and removed from site.

.2 Strip topsoil to depths as indicated. Do not mix topsoil with

subsoil. .3 Stockpile in locations as directed by Consultant. Stockpile

height not to exceed 2 m. .4 Dispose of unused topsoil off site.

3.3 Stockpiling

.1 Stockpile fill materials in areas designated by Consultant. Stockpile granular materials in manner to prevent segregation.

.2 Protect fill materials from contamination.

3.4 Cofferdams, Shoring, Bracing and Underpinning

.1 Construct temporary Works to depths, heights and locations as directed by Consultant.

.2 During backfill operation:

.1 Unless otherwise as indicated or as directed by Consultant, remove sheeting and shoring from excavations. .2 Do not remove bracing until backfilling has reached respective levels of such bracing. .3 Pull sheeting in increments that will ensure compacted backfill is maintained at an elevation at least 500 mm above toe of sheeting.

.4 When sheeting is required to remain in place, cut off tops

at elevations as indicated. .5 Upon completion of substructure construction:

.1 Remove cofferdams, shoring and bracing.

.2 Remove excess materials from site and restore water courses as indicated and as directed by Consultant.

3.5 Dewatering and Heave Prevention

.1 Keep excavations free of water while Work is in progress. .2 Submit for Consultant's review details of proposed

dewatering or heave prevention methods, such as dikes, well points, and sheet pile cut-offs.


.3 Avoid excavation below groundwater table if quick condition or heave is likely to occur. Prevent piping or bottom heave of excavations by groundwater lowering, sheet pile cut-offs, or other means.

.4 Protect open excavations against flooding and damage

due to surface run-off. .5 Dispose of water in a manner not detrimental to public and

private property, or any portion of Work completed or under construction.

.6 Provide flocculation tanks, settling basins, or other

treatment facilities to remove suspended solids or other materials before discharging to storm sewers, water courses or drainage areas.

3.6 Excavation

.1 Excavate to lines, grades, elevations and dimensions as indicated.

.2 Remove concrete, masonry, paving, walks, demolished

foundations and ruble and other obstructions encountered during excavation.

.3 Excavation must not interfere with bearing capacity of

adjacent foundations (normal 45 degree splay of bearing from bottom of any footing).

.4 Do not disturb soil within branch spread of trees or shrubs

that are to remain. If excavating through roots, excavate by hand and cut roots with sharp axe or saw.

.5 For trench excavation, unless otherwise authorized by

Consultant in writing, do not excavate more than 30 m of trench in advance of installation operations and do not leave open more than 15 m at end of day's operation.

.6 Keep excavated and stockpilled materials a safe distance

away from edge of trench as directed by Consultant. .7 Restrict vehicle operations directly adjacent to open

trenches. .8 Dispose of surplus and unsuitable excavated material off

site. .9 Do not obstruct flow of surface drainage or natural

watercourses. .10 Earth bottoms of excavations to be undisturbed soil, level,

free from loose, soft or organic matter.


.11 Notify Consultant when bottom of excavation is reached. .12 Obtain Consultant approval of completed excavation. .14 Remove unsuitable material from trench bottom to extent

and depth as directed by Consultant. .15 Hand trim, make firm and remove loose material and

debris from excavations. Where material at bottom of excavation is disturbed, compact foundation soil to density at least equal to undisturbed soil. Clean out rock seams and fill with concrete mortar or grout to approval of Consultant.

3.7 Fill Types and Compaction

.1 Use fill of types as indicated or specified below. Compaction densities are percentages of maximum densities obtained from ASTM D 698, ASTM D 1557 in accordance with - Corrected Maximum Dry Density.

3.8 Bedding and Surround of Underground Services

.1 Place and compact granular material for bedding and surround of underground services as indicated.

.2 Place bedding and surround material in unfrozen condition.

3.9 Backfilling

.1 Do not proceed with backfilling operations until Consultant has inspected and approved installations.

.2 Areas to be backfilled to be free from debris, snow, ice,

water and frozen ground. .3 Do not use backfill material which is frozen or contains ice,

snow or debris. .4 Place backfill material in uniform layers not exceeding 150

mm compacted thickness up to grades indicated. Compact each layer before placing succeeding layer.

.5 Backfilling around installations.

.1 Place bedding and surround material as specified elsewhere. .2 Do not backfill around or over cast-in-place concrete within 24 hours after placing of concrete. .3 Place layers simultaneously on both sides of installed Work to equalize loading. Difference not to exceed 1 m. .4 Where temporary unbalanced earth pressures are liable to develop on walls or other structures:

.1 Permit concrete to cure for minimum [14] days or until it has sufficient strength to withstand


earth and compaction pressure and approval obtained from Consultant: .2 If approved by Consultant, erect bracing or shoring to counteract unbalance, and leave in place until removal is approved by Consultant.

.6 Install drainage filter system in backfill as indicated.

3.10 Restoration

.1 Upon completion of Work, remove waste materials and debris, trim slopes, and correct defects as directed by Consultant.

.2 Replace topsoil as indicated. .3 Reinstate lawns to elevation which existed before

excavation. .4 Reinstate pavements [and sidewalks] disturbed by

excavation to thickness, structure and elevation which existed before excavation.

.5 Clean and reinstate areas affected by Work as directed by

Consultant. .6 Use temporary plating to support traffic loads over

unshrinkable fill for initial 24 hours.

End of Section

SELECTIVE DEMOLITION



PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 General Requirements

.1 The General Conditions of the Contract form part of this section, and must be read in conjunction with the requirements of this section.

.2 The Contractor shall, together with any and all Subcontractors involved in the work of this section, examine all surfaces or conditions relating to the Work, in order to determine the acceptability of such surfaces or conditions for the work of this section to commence.

.3 Subcontractors shall report in writing, any observed defects or deficiencies in any surfaces or conditions that would adversely affect the work of this section, to the Contractor for correction prior to commencing the work of this section.

.4 Commencement of the work of this section shall imply acceptance of all surfaces and conditions.


.1 Requirements for selective demolition of portion, or portions, of existing buildings in preparation for renovation or re-modeling. Demolition work shall include the draining and capping and/or re-routing of existing building services, protection of remaining structure and other building elements, and removal of debris.

1.3 References

.1 CSA S350; Code of Practice for Safety in Demolition of Structures.

.2 Occupation Health and Safety Act and Regulations for Construction Projects; Ontario Reg.213/91, as amended by Reg. 145/00.

1.4 Submittals

.1 Demolition Drawings .1 Submit drawings, diagrams, and/or details for approval, clearly

indicating sequence of demolition work. .2 Where required by authorities having jurisdiction, such

drawings shall bear the stamp of qualified professional engineer registered or licensed in the Province of Ontario.

.3 Drawing, indicating location of hoardings, as required. .2 Proposed schedule providing the following for each separate Work

Area: .1 Duration of work in each Work Area. .2 Proposed shut-down of utilities or services.

.3 Any proposed deviation from specifications, procedures, or drawings.

.4 Documentation including test results, fire and flammability data, and Material Safety Data Sheets for chemicals or material used in the course of the Project.

.5 Pre-demolition survey and photographic record of damage to

properties.




.6 Name and address of recycling facilities for waste brick, masonry rubble, concrete, gypsum waste, waste wood and metals.

.7 Submit completed Waste Manifest forms on a weekly basis and upon

completion of the work.

1.5 Quality Assurance

.1 Requirements of Regulatory Agencies .1 Conform to the requirements of all pertinent codes, by-laws and

regulations.

.2 Conform to the requirements of NFPA 51B Fire Prevention in use of cutting and welding processes.

.2 Carry out demolition in strict accordance with federal, provincial and municipal regulations as applicable.

.3 Ministry of Labour Occupational Health and Safety Act Regulations for Construction Projects including Revised Statutes of Ontario as amended by Ontario Regulation 213/91 and R.R.O. 1990, Reg. 838 as amended by O. Reg. 510/92 (formerly Ontario Regulation 654/85).

.4 The Ontario Building Code, The Occupational Health and Safety Act, and Regulations for Construction Projects and Fire Code, a Regulation under the Fire Marshals Act.

.5 Ministry of Transportation Regulations for the transport of waste, including the Transportation of Dangerous Goods Act.

.6 Ministry of Environment Regulations for the disposal of waste, including R.R.O. 1990, Reg. 347 (formerly Ontario Regulation 309/82), Reg. 558 and Reg. 903.

.7 CSA S350 -Code of practice of Safety in Demolition in Structures.

.8 Ministry of Environment and Energy 3R Regulations for the reducing, reusing and recycling of generated waste material, this includes Ontario Regulations 101/94, 102/94, 103/94, 104/94 and 105/94 made under the Environmental Protection Act.

1.6 Job Conditions

.1 Protection

.1 Protect the Public and all users of streets. Coordinate traffic

control requirements with, and obtain any required permit from local traffic authorities.

.2 Protect immediate and adjacent property against damage which might occur from falling debris or other cause; do not interfere with use of or safe passage to and from buildings.

.3 Take precautions to guard against damaging vibration, movement or settlement of adjacent portions of structure or buildings; design, provide and place bracing or shoring as required; be responsible for safety and support of such elements; be liable for any such movement or settlement, any damage or injury caused thereby or resulting therefrom. If at any time safety of any adjacent building appears to be endangered, cease operations, notify Consultant, take precautions to support structure; do not resume operations until




permission has been granted. If such movement or settlement of adjacent portion of building is caused by negligence or default of Contractor, restore the structural integrity of the structure to the Consultant’s design at no extra cost to Owner. When Consultant considers additional bracing or shoring necessary to safeguard or prevent such movement or settlement, install bracing and shoring upon order.

.4 Take precautions to guard against movement, settlement or collapse of any adjacent or Owner’s services, sidewalks, driveways, or trees; be liable for such movement, settlement or collapse caused by Contractor’s negligence or default; repair promptly such damage when so ordered.

.5 Provide and maintain all legal and necessary guards, railings, lights, warning signs, morality lights, and watchmen during execution of Work to fully protect all persons and Owner from loss, damage, death or injury through neglect, carelessness or incompetence of Contractor or his employees or condition or handling of materials.

.6 Selling, burying or burning of debris onsite is not permitted.

.7 Blasting of existing structures is not permitted.

.8 Provide adequate tree protection around existing trees.

.9 Prevent debris from blocking the drainage systems.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Not Used

.1 Not Used

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Protection

.1 Prevent movement, settlement or damage of adjacent structures, services, and other parts of existing building to remain. Provide all bracing, shoring, and/or underpinning required. Make good damage caused by demolition.

.2 Take precautions to support affected structures and if safety of building being demolished, or adjacent structures or services appears to be endangered, cease operations and notify Consultant.




.3 Prevent dust and debris from blocking surface drainage systems, or affecting elevators, mechanical, and/or electrical systems which must remain in operation.

.4 Provide all temporary safety controls, as required by The Occupational Health & Safety Act, and Section 01 50 00.

.5 Ensure that secure site hoarding and/or fencing is in place and complete, prior to commencement of demolition operations. Maintain hoarding during demolition operations. Replace or repair sections of hoarding damaged or removed, as a result of demolition operations.

3.2 Preparation

.1 Locate and mark all buried, enclosed or hidden services within the structure, and on the site

.2 Disconnect and re-route electrical and telephone service lines

entering or traversing areas to be demolished, in accordance with authorities having jurisdiction. Post warning signs on electrical lines and equipment which must remain energized during period of demolition.

.3 Disconnect and cap, designated mechanical services in accordance

with authorities having jurisdiction; .4 Do not disrupt active or energized utilities traversing premises,

designated to remain undisturbed.

3.3 Safety Code

.1 Unless otherwise specified, carry out demolition work in accordance with CSA S350.

3.4 Demolition .1 Demolish parts of building to permit construction of addition and/or remedial work as indicated on the drawings.

.2 All concrete and masonry broken from demolition work to be removed from open basements or excavations.

.3 Remove existing equipment, services, and obstacles where required for refinishing or making good of existing surfaces, and replace same as work progresses.

.4 At end of each day's work, leave work in safe condition so that no part is in danger of toppling or falling. Protect interiors of parts not to be demolished from exterior elements at all times.

.5 Demolish to minimize dusting. Keep dusty materials wetted as directed by Consultant.

.6 Demolish masonry and concrete in small sections to prevent damage to existing structure or surfaces to remain.

.7 Remove contaminated or dangerous materials, as defined by authorities having jurisdiction, from site, and dispose of in strict accordance with by-laws, regulations and/or guidelines applicable to such material.




.8 Salvaged Materials .1 Carefully remove materials and equipment intended for

salvage. Store, protect and leave ready for installation by other trades.

3.5 Site Cleaning

.1 Promptly remove and dispose of demolished materials except where noted otherwise, in accordance with authorities having jurisdiction.

.2 Do not sell, bury or burn materials onsite.

.3 Leave interior areas in a "swept clean" condition after demolition in

preparation for remedial work.

.4 If affected by demolition, leave exterior soft areas in a "raked clean" condition, and clear of all debris. Leave paved areas in a "swept clean" condition, and clear of all dirt, debris, and other contamination.

End of Section

TREE AND SHRUB PRESERVATION Mary McCormick Recreation Centre 66 Sheridan Avenue, Toronto Section 02901 - Page 1 of 4

PART 1 - GENERAL


.1 Section 02315 – Excavating, Trenching and Backfilling. .2 Section 02911 – Topsoil and Finish Grading. .3 Section 02933 - Sodding.

1.2 References

.1 Canadian Standards Association (CSA International) .1 CSA G30.5-M1983(R1998), Welded Steel Wire Fabric for Concrete Reinforcement.

.2 Health Canada - Pest Management Regulatory Agency

(PMRA) .1 National Standard for Pesticide Education, Training and Certification in Canada (1995).

.3 Department of Justice Canada

.1 Fertilizers Act (R.S. 1985, c. F-10).

.2 Fertilizers Regulations (C.R.C., c. 666).

1.3 Scheduling

.1 Obtain approval from Consultant of schedule indicating beginning of Work.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Materials

.1 Fill: .1 Type (A): clean, natural river sand and gravel material, free from silt, clay, loam, friable or soluble materials and organic matter. .2 Type (B): excavated soil, free from roots, rocks larger than 75 mm, building debris, and toxic ingredients (salt, oil, etc). Excavated material shall be approved by Consultant before use as fill.

.2 Coarse washed stones: 35-75 mm diameter. .3 Peatmoss:

.1 Derived from partially decomposed species of Sphagnum Mosses. .2 Elastic and homogeneous. .3 Free of wood and deleterious material which could


prohibit growth. .4 Shredded minimum particle size: 5 mm.

.4 Fertilizer:

.1 To Canada Fertilizer Act and Fertilizers Regulations. .2 Complete, commercial, slow release with 35 % of nitrogen content in water-insoluble form.

.5 Anti-desiccant: commercial, wax-like emulsion. .6 Filter Cloth:

.1 Type 1: 100 % non-woven needle punched polyester, 2.75 mm thick, 240 g/m² mass. .2 Type 2: biodegradable burlap.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Identification and Protection

.1 Identify plants and limits of root systems to be preserved as approved by Consultant.

.2 Protect plant and root systems from damage, compaction

and contamination resulting from construction as approved by Consultant.

.3 Ensure no pruning is done inside drip line. If pruning inside

drip line is required consult an aborist or Canadian Certified Horticultural Technician (CCHT) as approved by Consultant.

3.2 Root Curtain System

.1 Identify limits for required construction excavation as approved by Consultant.

.2 Prior to construction excavation, [hand] dig trench

minimum 500 mm wide x 1500 mm deep, along perimeter of excavation limits.

.3 Prune exposed roots cleanly at side of trench nearest

plants to be preserved. Pruned ends to point obliquely downwards.

.4 Install wooden posts recycled composite plastic posts and

welded wire fabric against construction edge of trench. .5 Securely attach Type 2 filter fabric on plant side of wire

mesh. .6 Prepare homogeneous mixture of fertilizer, parent material

and organic matter.


.1 Add organic matter to mixture to achieve 7-9 % organic matter content by weight. .2 Incorporate with mixture grade 2:12:8 ratio fertilizer (dry) at rate of 1.5 kg/m³.

.7 Backfill with homogeneous mixture between curtain wall

and plants to be preserved in layers not exceeding 150 mm in depth. Compact each layer to 85 % Standard Proctor Density.

.8 Protect root curtain from damage during construction

operations. .9 Water plants and root curtain sufficiently during

construction to maintain optimum soil moisture condition until backfill operations are complete.

.10 Protect root curtain before during backfill operations.

Ensure root curtain is cut down to 300 mm below finished grade and remove cut material.

3.3 Trenching and Tunneling for Underground Services

.1 Centre line location and limits of trench/tunnel excavation to be approved by Consultant prior to excavation. Tunnel excavation to extend 2000 mm from edge of trunk on either side.

.2 Excavate manually within zone of root system. Do not

sever roots greater than 40 mm diameter except at greater than 500 mm below existing grade. Protect roots, and cut roots cleanly with sharp disinfected tools.

.3 Excavate tunnel under centre of tree trunk using methods

and equipment approved by Consultant. .4 Minimum acceptable depth to top of tunnel: 1000 mm. .5 Backfill for tunnel and trench to 85 % Standard Proctor

Density. Avoid damage to trunk and roots of tree. .6 Complete tunneling and backfilling at tree within 2 weeks

of beginning Work.

3.4 Pruning

.1 Prune crown to compensate for root loss while maintaining general form and character of plant. Dispose of debris through mulching.


3.5 Anti-Desiccant

.1 Apply anti-desiccant to foliage where applicable and as directed by Consultant.

End of Section

CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT Mary McCormick Recreation Centre 66 Sheridan Avenue, Toronto Section 03200 - Page 1 of 2 PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 References

.1 American Concrete Institute (ACI) .1 ACI 315R-80, Manual of Engineering and Placing Drawings for Reinforced Concrete Structure.

.2 American National Standards Institute/American Concrete

Institute (ANSI/ACI) .1 ANSI/ACI 315-80, Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement.

.3 Canadian Standards Association (CSA)

.1 CAN/CSA-A23.1-94, Concrete Materials and Methods of Concrete Construction. .2 CSA G30.3-M1983(R1991), Cold Drawn Steel Wire for Concrete Reinforcement. .3 CSA G30.5-M1983(R1991), Welded Steel Wire Fabric for Concrete Reinforcement. .4 CAN/CSA-G30.18-M92, Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement. .5 CAN/CSA-G40.21-M92, Structural Quality Steels. .6 CSA W186-M1990, Welding of Reinforcing Bars in Reinforced Concrete Construction.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Materials

.1 Substitute different size bars only if permitted in writing by Engineer.

.2 Reinforcing steel: billet steel, grade 300, deformed bars to

CAN/CSA-G30.18, unless indicated otherwise. .3 Cold-drawn annealed steel wire ties: to CSA G30.3. .4 Welded steel wire fabric: to CSA G30.5. Provide in flat sheets

only. .5 Chairs, bolsters, bar supports, spacers: to CAN/CSA-A23.1. .6 Mechanical splices: subject to approval of Engineer.

2.2 Shop Drawings

.1 Contractor to ensure that proper and complete shop drawings

are submitted for review.

CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT Mary McCormick Recreation Centre 66 Sheridan Avenue, Toronto Section 03200 - Page 2 of 2 2.3 Fabrication

.2 Shop Drawings to be on the steel manufacturer’s letterhead or formal bar-detailing documentation and to include at a minimum the following information:

a. The grade of steel. b. Bar detailing. c. Clearance between the concrete and rebar. d. Ties are to be shown and detailed.

.3 Shop Drawings to be stamped (signed and dated) by a

professional engineer, licensed to practice in Ontario. .1 Fabricate reinforcing steel in accordance with CAN/CSA-

A23.1, ANSI/ACI 315, and Reinforcing Steel Manual of Standard Practice by the Reinforcing Steel Institute of Canada. ACI 315R, Manual of Engineering and Placing Drawings for Reinforced Concrete Structures unless indicated otherwise.

.2 Obtain Engineer's approval for locations of reinforcement

splices other than those shown on placing drawings. .3 Upon approval of Engineer, weld reinforcement in accordance

with CSA W186.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Field Bending

.1 Do not field bend or field weld reinforcement except where indicated or authorized by Engineer.

.2 When field bending is authorized, bend without heat, applying

a slow and steady pressure. .3 Replace bars which develop cracks or splits.

3.2 Placing Reinforcement

.1 Place reinforcing steel as indicated on reviewed placing drawings and in accordance with CAN/CSA-A23.1.

.2 Prior to placing concrete, obtain Engineer's approval of

reinforcing material and placement. .3 Ensure cover to reinforcement is maintained during concrete

pour.

3.3 Cleaning

.1 Concrete reinforcement is to be clean (free of oil, rust and deleterious material) prior to placing.

End of Section

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE Mary McCormick Recreation Centre 66 Sheridan Avenue, Toronto Section 03300 - Page 1 of 3

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 References

.1 .1 ASTM C 260- 94, Specification for Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete. .2 ASTM C 309- 94, Specification for Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete. .3 ASTM C 494- 92, Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete.


.1 CAN/CSA-A5- 93, Portland Cement.

.2 CAN/CSA-A23.1- 94, Concrete Materials and Methods of Concrete Construction. .3 CAN/CSA-A23.2- 94, Methods of Test for Concrete.


.1 Minimum 4 weeks prior to starting concrete work, submit proposed quality control procedures for Engineer's approval for following items: .1 Falsework erection. .2 Hot weather concrete. .3 Cold weather concrete. .4 Curing. .5 Finishes. .6 Formwork removal.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Materials

.1 Portland cement: to CAN/CSA-A5. .2 Supplementary cementing materials: to CAN/CSA-A23.5. .3 Water: to CAN/CSA-A23.1. .4 Aggregates: to CAN/CSA-A23.1. Coarse aggregates to be

high density. .5 Air entraining admixture: to ASTM C 260. .6 Chemical admixtures: to ASTM C 494. Engineer to approve

accelerating or set retarding admixtures during cold and hot weather placing.

.7 Concrete retarders: to ASTM C 494 water based, low VOC,

solvent free. Do not allow moisture of any kind to come in contact with the retarder film.

.8 Curing compound: to CAN/CSA-A23.1 [white] and to ASTM C

309, Type1-D with fugitive dye.


2.2 Mixes

.1 Proportion normal density concrete in accordance with CAN/CSA-A23.1, Alternative 1 to give following quality and yield for all concrete (except for Rink Slab Concrete). .1 Cement:

.1 Type 10 Portland cement. .2 Minimum compressive strength at 28 days: 40 MPa. .3 Minimum cement content: 500 kg/m3 of concrete. .4 Class of exposure: C. .5 Nominal size of coarse aggregate: 19 mm. .6 Slump at time and point of discharge: 60 mm to 80 mm. .7 Air content: 5.5 % to 7.0 %. .8 Chemical admixtures: following admixtures in accordance with ASTM C 494, type, quantity, water reducing strength increasing and air entraining.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Preparation

.1 Obtain Engineer's approval before placing concrete. Provide 24 hours notice prior to placing of concrete.

.2 Ensure reinforcement and inserts are not disturbed during

concrete placement. .3 Prior to placing of concrete obtain Engineer's approval of

proposed method for protection of concrete during placing and curing in adverse weather.

.4 Maintain accurate records of poured concrete items to indicate

date, location of pour, quality, air temperature and test samples taken.

3.2 Construction

.1 Do cast-in-place concrete work in accordance with CAN/CSA-A23.1.

.2 Finishing.

.1 Finish concrete in accordance with CAN/CSA-A23.1. .1 Clause 15 and Tables 7, 8 and 9.

.2 Use procedures acceptable to Engineer or those noted in CAN/CSA-A23.1 to remove excess bleed water. Ensure surface is not damaged. .3 Use curing compounds compatible with applied finish on concrete surfaces. Provide written declaration that compounds used are compatible. .4 Provide swirl-trowelled finish unless otherwise indicated. .5 Rub exposed sharp edges of concrete with carborundum to produce 3 mm radius edges unless otherwise


indicated.

3.3 Site Tolerance

.1 Concrete tolerance in accordance with CAN/CSA-A23.1 straight edge method to tolerance schedule as indicated.

3.4 Field Quality Control

.1 Inspection and testing of concrete and concrete materials will be carried out by a Testing Laboratory designated by Engineer in accordance with CAN/CSA-A23.1 and Section 01450 - Quality Control.

.2 Engineer will take additional test cylinders during cold weather

concreting. Cure cylinders on job site under same conditions as concrete which they represent.

.3 Non-destructive Methods for Testing Concrete shall be in

accordance with CAN/CSA-A23.2.

End of Section

SPECIALTY REPAIR CONCRETE WORK Mary McCormick Recreation Centre 66 Sheridan Avenue, Toronto Section 03484 - Page 1 of 4

PART 1 - GENERAL


.1 Provide all materials, labour, and equipment necessary to complete concrete repairs, replacements, upgrades and appurtenances as shown on the drawings and described herein.


.1 Read and conform to Division 00, Division 1, Division 2 and Division 3 which all apply to and form part of the work.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Materials

.1 Polymer Modified Mortar:

Polymer modified mortar shall be pre-packaged mortar, either latex or epoxy based, and shall be supplied by one of the following companies:

Horizontal Surfaces Company Product . Concrete Chemicals - REDKRETE Fosroc Construction Chemicals - Renderoc SD2 The Master Builders Company Ltd. - EMACO R310 Sika Canada Inc. - SikaTop 122 PLUS Vertical and Overhead Surfaces Company Product . Fosroc Construction Chemicals - Renderoc HB2 Sika Canada Inc. - SikaTop 123 PLUS .2 Bonding Agent:

Bonding agent may be either latex or epoxy and shall be as supplied by one of the following companies:

Company Product . Cappar Ltd. - CAPBOND E Concrete Chemicals - Concrete Adhesive #900 Fosroc Construction Chemicals - Nitobond 881-43 The Master Builders Company Ltd. - CONCRESIVE LIQUID LPL W.R. Meadows of Canada Ltd. - SEALTIGHT REZI- WELD 1000 Sika Canada Inc. - SikaTop Armatec 110 EpoCem Sternson Ltd. - BONDING AGENT ST-432 .3 Elastomeric Joint Sealant:

Elastomeric Joint Sealant will be entirely suited for the purpose required and shall be as supplied by one of the


following companies:

Company Product . Fosroc Construction Chemicals - Nitoseal 225 Sika Canada Inc. - Sikaflex-1a Sternson Ltd. – STERNSON RC-2 .4 Silane Penetrating Sealer:

Silane Penetrating Sealer will be entirely suited for the purpose required and shall be as supplied by one of the following companies.

Company Product . Cappar Ltd. - CAPSEAL W Concrete Chemicals - CONSEAL Fosroc Construction Chemicals - Dekguary P-40 The Master Builders Company Ltd. - MASTERSEAL SL 40 Sika Canada Inc. - SikaGUARD 71H Sternson Ltd. - HYDROZO ENVIROSEAL 20 Thorosystems Products of Canada Ltd. – THOROSILOXANE 8S

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Prepatory Work

.1 Reserved .2 Prior to commencement of repairs, brush clean all faces to

present a clean, intact concrete surface free of deleterious material. Blow clean using oil-free compressed air.

3.2 Location and Determination of Unsound Areas

.1 Notwithstanding the information supplied by the Consultant, the Contractor shall, prior to removal, chain drag or sound all surfaces and mark the outline of all defective, unsound, or deteriorated concrete to be removed. The marking shall be in a contrasting colour to that of the slab. The pattern for cutting and removal shall be mutually agreed upon between the Contractor and the Consultant such that unnecessary concrete removal is avoided.

.2 The Contractor shall verify with the Consultant all areas of

repair, and/or removal involved, prior to commencing removal.


3.3 Temporary Shoring

.1 Design, supply and install temporary shoring to maintain the integrity of the existing structure during repairs.

3.4 Removals

.1 The perimeter area and depth of concrete removal shall be controlled in keeping with the plans and specifications. However, all delaminated, deteriorated, and defective concrete shall be removed.

.2 Concrete shall be removed to produce a square-sided cut

using sawcutting and chipping hammers.

.1 The perimeter of all areas of repair shall be sawcut a minimum of 12 mm deep with the following stipulations:

.1 Chipping of perimeter corners to a vertical

edge is permitted to prevent sawcut over-run.

.2 Chipping of the perimeter to a vertical edge

is permitted when the existing reinforcing steel has insufficient cover to permit the required 12mm deep sawcut and the Contractor has verified this through use of a covermetre.

.3 Chipping of the perimeter to a vertical edge

is permitted when obstructions such as handrails, prevent the reasonable and safe use of a concrete saw.

FEATHER EDGES AND SAWCUT OVER-RUNS ARE

NOT PERMITTED. Care shall be exercised so as not to injure, cut, or

otherwise damage the reinforcing steel or the surrounding sound areas.

.3 Chipping hammer size shall not exceed 7 kg. (15 lbs.) and

shall not be operated closer than 3 m (10 ft.) to each other. .4 Where reinforcing steel is encountered and more than 50%

of the bar perimeter is exposed, or the bond between the bar and the concrete is broken, extend the concrete removal around the reinforcing steel bar so that there is a 20mm minimum clearance between the steel and the surrounding sound concrete.

.5 All scale, rust, and corrosion products shall be removed

from the exposed reinforcing steel by mechanical methods. Areas shall be cleaned so that all surface contaminants,


sediment deposits and deleterious materials are removed and coarse aggregate of the sound concrete exposed.

.6 Re-tie all exposed, existing reinforcing steel. In large

areas, where reinforcing bars are completely exposed, they shall be re-tied at each intersecting point and securely anchored to the sound concrete surface by drilled in anchors at one (1.0) metre centers maximum. The original concrete cover distance to the bar shall be maintained or increased as directed. Supply and installation of anchors and tying of reinforcement shall be incidental to the contract and no further or separate payment shall be made.

End of Section

BASIC UNIT MASONRY



PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 Scope .1 Read and conform to General Requirements and in particular Division 1, which

applies to and forms part of the work. .2 Provide all materials, labour and equipment for the installation of brick and block

masonry shown on the drawings, described herein or as necessary to complete the work.

1.2 Applicable Codes and Standards

.1 Technical Builders Bulletins, Section 20 "Above Grade Masonry". .2 Ontario Building Code "Plain and Reinforced Masonry". .3 CAN3-S304-M84 "Masonry Design for Buildings". .4 CAN3-A370-M84 "Connectors for Masonry". .5 CAN3-A371-M84 "Masonry Construction for Buildings". .6 ULC fire-rated assemblage requirements. 1.3 Inspections and Tests .1 Inspect previously prepared bearing surfaces. Reject unsatisfactory surfaces

upon which masonry depends. Commencement of work implies acceptance of the bearing surface.

.2 The Owner shall be the sole judge as to acceptability of work. If any work is

rejected, promptly remove from site and replace with proper materials and workmanship as required. Pay for any tests required to determine cause of failures.

1.4 Delivery and Storage .1 Handle and store mortar materials to CAN3-S304-M84 in a dry state with

manufacturers seals and labels intact. .2 Stack units, strapped to delivery pallets, clear of ground and under clean and dry

weather tight cover. 1.5 Protection .1 Protect stored materials against damage. Remove rejected or damaged materials

from site. .2 Protect surrounding surfaces and work of others. Install temporary protective

covers, nosings, etc. Remove before final inspection.

BASIC UNIT MASONRY



.3 During construction and until completed and protected by flashings or caps, keep

masonry work, particularly cavities, dry by using waterproof, non-staining coverings extending over and down side surfaces to protect walls and mortar cure from wind-driven rain. Maintain wall cavities free of mortar droppings to prevent bridging and to ensure drainage. Leave temporary clean out openings at base of cavity and afterwards reinstate when mortar cleaned.

.4 Protect completed work from marking or other damage, particularly from overhead

mortar droppings. .5 Provide temporary protection to interior of building existing weatherproof surface

disturbed prior to installing new masonry. .6 Provide adequate temporary bracing of new and existing masonry work during

construction until permanent lateral support in place. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 Mortars .1 Cement - CAN/CSA-A5-93 - 'Portland Cement'. .2 Sand - CSA A82.56-M76 - 'Aggregate for Masonry Mortar'. .3 Water - Drinking quality. .4 Plasticizer: Acceptable Products:

Master Builders 'Omicron' Sternson 'Sterad 300'

.5 Refractory Mortar - ASTM C105. .6 Mortar Colours Non-fading, non-staining, lime-proof metallic oxide pigments.

Acceptable Manufacturers: Northern Pigment

2.2 Mortar Mixes .1 Cement Mortar for below grade, grout and parging

Type 'M': to CSA A179-M76 [17.5 MPa] 1 part cement

1/4 part lime putty 3 parts sand .2 Cement Mortar for above grade

Type 'N': to CSA A179-M76 [5 MPa] 1 part cement

1 part lime putty 6 parts sand

BASIC UNIT MASONRY



.3 Non-shrink Grout for inserts: Pre-mixed, minimum strength 4 MPa at 28 days.

Acceptable Products: C.C. Chemicals 'In Pakt' CPD Services 'Non-shrink Grout' Master Builders 'Masterflow 713' Sternson 'Ferrogrout' Meadows 'U-3'

2.3 Handling Mortar .1 Prepare only sufficient mortar usable within one hour of mixing. Wash out mixing

box, transport boards, mixing and handling tools between each load. Add only enough water to maintain mix at a stiff workable consistency.

2.4 Control Joint Backup .1 Purpose-made elastomer to ASTM D2240.

Acceptable Products: Industrial Thermo Polymers 'Backup Rod' Sternson 'Backup Rod'

2.5 Damp Proof Course and Flashings .1 600 g/sq m copper sheet asphalt bonded to two layers of heavy kraft paper, all

bonded together with asphalt and reinforced with glass fibre scrim. Acceptable Products: Gummed Papers '2 ox. Copper Glaskraft' Meadows '2 oz. Pure Copperguard'

2.6 Lap Adhesive .1 Fibrated cut back asphalt top cement to CGSB 37-GP-4Ma.

Acceptable Products: Lexsuco 'CA-103' or 'CA-106'

2.7 Back-paint .1 Bituminous coating to CAN/CGSB 1-GP-108. 2.8 Masonry Reinforcement .1 Wall Reinforcement: To CAN3-A370 and CAN3-A371-M84; hot dipped galvanized

truss type 4.8mm deformed side rods and 3.9mm cross rods, with preformed corner pieces and partition tees. Acceptable Products: Blok-Lok Dur-O-Wal

.2 Bolts and Anchors: To CAN3-S304-M84, corrosion resistant anchorages, as

detailed.

BASIC UNIT MASONRY



2.9 Concrete Block .1 To CAN3-A165-M85 with metric modular units from one manufacturer; uniform in

colour, shade and texture; test-rated at: .1 H/7.5/A/M: For exterior exposed block walls, foundation walls and load

bearing partitions.

.2 H/12.5/A/M: 100 percent solid for top course of load bearing walls and at load bearing structural members.

.3 H/7.5/B/M: For all other locations. .4 Provide test reports attesting to the requirements of the specified material. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 Preliminary Work .1 Give at least 3 days notice to the Owner before starting work. .2 Provide temporary protection to all interior areas during operations. 3.2 General .1 Do all work in accordance with CAN3-A371-M84, Masonry Construction for

Buildings. 3.3 Co-ordination .1 Co-ordinate masonry work with work of other trades. Obtain and build in fittings

supplied by others. Instruct masonry trade to fit work of others, as required. .2 Distribute units of varying colours and/or textures throughout the wall surface to

avoid spottiness in finished surface. Do not use units with colours or textures excessively contrasting with the overall range. Reject chipped, blemished, cracked or defective units.

3.4 Grades, Lines and Levels .1 Ensure grades, lines and levels are accurate, plumb, square and true to line. 3.5 Damp Proof Course and Flashings .1 To Can3-A371-M84. .2 Install flashings under exterior masonry bearing on foundation walls; first masonry

course above grade line; slabs, shelf angles, exterior lintels; under sills; roofs; roof flashings; other location detailed.

.3 Lap joints 150mm and seal with adhesive.

BASIC UNIT MASONRY



3.6 Coursing .1 Use a 'storey pole' showing coursing and use during project. .2 Erect masonry with level, accurately spaced courses. .3 Align coursing horizontally and vertically. .4 Take particular care at corners and reveals. .5 Unless otherwise detailed, use running bond, 3 bricks to 1 block, in 3 block lifts of

600mm. 3.7 Tolerances .1 Comply with CAN3-A371-M84. 1. Plumb: Maximum tolerance of 6mm in 3 m. 2. Level: Maximum tolerance of 6mm in 6 m. 3. Line: Maximum tolerance of 6mm in 6 m. 3.8 Cutting .1 Lay out masonry work to ensure a minimum of cut units. .2 Where necessary cut units with approved masonry saw. .3 Make cuts straight, square and free from chips or breaks. .4 Reject cuts with fractures on face edge. .5 Do not install cut units at corners or reveals. 3.9 Beds .1 In hot weather, use mortar of higher moisture content to ensure proper bonding. .2 Place units on full mortar beds. .3 Butter ends of units for full vertical joints. .4 Partially filled beds or partially filled vertical joints are not acceptable. .5 At end of each days work, securely cover exposed and curing work. 3.10 Joints .1 As the work proceeds, wipe surface with a rough cloth to remove unsightly mortar

stains. .2 Unless otherwise specified, when mortar is 'thumb-print' hard, tool joints evenly,

concave, smooth and straight.

BASIC UNIT MASONRY



.3 Ensure vertical joints form smoothly into horizontal joints, all uniformly concave

approximately 10mm deep. 3.11 Lintels, Sleeves, etc. .1 Accurately build in lintels, sleeves, ties, frames, plugs, hangers, anchors, plates

and other fitments. 3.12 Expansion Joints .1 As shown on the drawings and as required by CAN3-S302-M84 and OBC. .2 Accurately construct weatherbarred reveals with vertical joints plumb and true. .3 Build horizontal expansion joints to proper clearances between steel support

angles and masonry panels. 3.13 Jambs, Piers, Pilasters, Intersections .1 Solidly build jambs, piers, pilasters, etc. .2 Fill hollow core units with concrete and rod to fill cores. .3 Bond intersecting walls in alternate courses or with dovetail anchors. 3.14 Control Joints .1 As required by CAN3-S304-M84 and OBC: material to suit size and shape of joint. .2 Make joints to other materials plumb, square and aligned. .3 Clear mortar from joint and prepare for caulking. 3.15 Bull Nosing .1 Bull Nose corners at windows, doors and piers.

.2 Bull Nose all 90 degree edges. 3.16 Back Painting .1 Back paint contact surfaces of dissimilar materials with bituminous coating. 3.17 On Completion .1 After mortar has cured and if staining has occurred, wash down surfaces as

follows. Protect other work during washdown operations.

.1 For Concrete Block and Concrete Faces: Wet surface with clear water. Scrub in a zinc sulphate solution [i.e. zinc sulphate 200 g. to 1 L water] and remove stains with a fibre brush. Thoroughly flush with clean water.

BASIC UNIT MASONRY



3.18 Clean-up .1 Carefully rub down finish surfaces and remove stains using a rough cloth and/or

fibre brushes. Remove mortar droppings, debris and broken or chipped units. 3.19 Maintenance .1 Replace or repair any work damaged during construction or warranty period,

including removing and neutralizing efflorescence.

End of Section

STRUCTURAL STEEL FOR BUILDINGS Mary McCormick Recreation Centre 66 Sheridan Avenue, Toronto Section 05121 - Page 1 of 4

PART 1 - GENERAL


.1 Section 03300 – Cast-in-Place Concrete.

1.2 References

.1 American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) .1 ASTM A 325M-97, Specification for High-Strength Bolts for Structural Steel Joints [Metric].

.2 Canadian General Standards Board (CGSB)

.1 CAN/CGSB-1.40-97, Primer Structural Steel, Oil Alkyd Type.

.2 CGSB 85-GP-14M-78, Painting Steel Surfaces Exposed to Normally Dry Weather. .3 CAN/CGSB-85.100-93, Painting.

.3 Canadian Institute of Steel Construction (CISC)/Canadian Paint

Manufacturer's Association (CPMA). .1 CISC/CPMA1-73b, Quick-Drying, One-Coat Paint for Use on Structural Steel. .2 CISC/CPMA2 -75, Quick-Drying, Primer for use on Structural Steel.


.1 CAN/CSA-G40.20-M92, General Requirements for Rolled or Welded Structural Quality Steel. .2 CAN/CSA-G40.21-M92, Structural Quality Steels. .3 CAN/CSA-G164-M92, Hot Dip Galvanizing of Irregularly Shaped Articles. .4 CAN/CSA-S16.1-94, Limit States Design of Steel Structures. .5 CAN/CSA-S136-94, Cold Formed Steel Structural Members. .6 CSA W47.1-92, Certification of Companies for Fusion Welding of Steel Structures. .7 CSA W48 Series-[Various Dates], Electrodes. .8 CSA W55.3-1965, Resistance Welding Qualification Code for Fabricators of Structural Members Used in Buildings. .9 CSA W59-M1989, Welded Steel Construction (Metal Arc Welding) [Metric].

1.3 Shop Drawings

.1 Submit shop drawings including fabrication and erection documents and materials list.

.2 On erection drawings, indicate all details and information necessary for

assembly and erection purposes such as, description of methods, sequence of erection, type of equipment used in erection and temporary bracings.

.3 Ensure Fabricator designed assemblies, components and connections,

and drawings are stamped and signed by qualified professional engineer licensed in the province of Ontario, Canada.


1.4 Design of Details and Connections

.1 Design details and connections in accordance with requirements of

CAN/CSA-S16.1 and CAN/CSA-S136 with CSA S136.1 to resist forces, moments, shears and allow for movements indicated.

.2 If connection for shear only (standard connection) is required:

.1 Select framed beam shear connections from an industry accepted publication such as "Handbook of the Canadian Institute of Steel Construction". .2 If shears are not indicated, select or design connections to support reaction from maximum uniformly distributed load that can be safely supported by beam in bending, provided no point loads act on beam.

.3 For non standard connections, submit sketches and design calculations

stamped and signed by qualified professional engineer licensed in Province of Ontario, Canada.


.1 Submit 4 copies of mill test reports showing chemical and physical properties and other details of steel to be incorporated into work at least [4] weeks prior to fabrication of structural steel. Mill test reports shall be certified by metallurgists qualified to practice in province of Ontario, Canada.

.2 Ensure Fabricator of structural steel, in addition, provides an affidavit

stating that materials and products used in fabrication conform to applicable material and products standards called for by design drawings and specifications.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Materials

.1 Structural steel: to CAN/CSA-G40.21 Grade 300W. .2 Anchor bolts: to CAN/CSA-G40.21, Grade 300W. .3 Bolts, nuts and washers: to ASTM A325M. .4 Welding materials: to CSA W59 and certified by Canadian Welding

Bureau. .5 Shop paint primer: to CAN/CGSB-1.40. .6 Hot dip galvanizing: galvanize steel, where indicated, to CAN/CSA-

G164, minimum zinc coating of 600 g/m².

2.2 Fabrication

.1 Fabricate structural steel in accordance with CAN/CSA-S16.1, CAN/CSA-S136 and in accordance with reviewed shop drawings.

.2 Continuously seal members by continuous welds where indicated. Grind

smooth.


2.3 Shop Painting

.1 Clean, prepare surfaces and shop prime structural steel in accordance with [CAN/CSA-S16.1] [CAN/CSA-S136] [CAN/CGSB-85.100] [except where members to be encased in concrete].

.2 Clean all members, remove loose mill scale, rust, oil, dirt and other

foreign matter. Prepare surface according to SSPCSPI blast. .3 Apply one coat of primer in shop to all steel surfaces to achieve minimum

dry film thickness of 4 to 6 mils, except: .1 Surfaces to be encased in concrete. .2 Surfaces to receive field installed stud shear connections. .3 Surfaces and edges to be field welded. .4 Faying surfaces of friction-type connections. .5 Below grade surfaces in contact with soil.

.4 Apply paint under cover, on dry surfaces when surface and air

temperatures are above 5°C. .5 Maintain dry condition and 5°C minimum temperature until paint is

thoroughly dry. .6 Strip paint from bolts, nuts, sharp edges and corners before prime coat

is dry.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 General

.1 Structural steel work: in accordance with CAN/CSA-S16.1, CAN/CSA-S136.

.2 Welding: in accordance with CSA W59. .3 Companies to be certified under Division 1 or 2.1 of CSA W47.1 for fusion

welding of steel structures and/or CSA W55.3 for resistance welding of structural components.

3.2 Connection to Existing Work

.1 Verify dimensions and condition of existing work, report any discrepancy and potential problem areas to Engineer for direction before commencing fabrication.

3.3 Marking

.1 Mark materials in accordance with CAN/CSA-G40.20. Do not use die

stamping. If steel is to be left in unpainted condition, place marking at locations not visible from exterior after erection.

.2 Match marking: shop mark bearing assemblies and splices for fit and

match.


3.4 Erection

.1 Erect structural steel, as indicated and in accordance with CAN/CSA-S16.1, CAN/CSA-S136 and in accordance with reviewed erection drawings.

.2 Field cutting or altering structural members: to approval of Engineer. .3 Clean with mechanical brush and touch up shop primer to bolts, rivets,

welds and burned or scratched surfaces at completion of erection. .4 Continuously seal members by continuous welds where indicated. Grind

smooth.

3.5 Field Quality Control

.1 Inspection and testing of [materials and workmanship] will be carried out by testing laboratory designated by Engineer.

.2 Provide safe access and working areas for testing on site, as required by

testing agency and as authorized by Engineer. .3 Submit test reports to Engineer within one week of completion of

inspection. .4 Test shear studs in accordance with CSA W59.

3.6 Field Painting

.1 Paint in accordance with approved industry standards. .1 Touch up all damaged surfaces and surfaces without shop coat with primer to CAN/CGSB-1.40 except as specified otherwise. Apply in accordance with CGSB 85-GP-14M.

End of Section

SEALANTS Mary McCormick Recreation Centre 66 Sheridan Avenue, Toronto Section 07900 - Page 1 of 4 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 Scope .1 Read and conform to Division 00 and Division 1 which both apply to and form part of

the work. .2 Provide materials, labour and equipment to complete joint sealant work as shown on

the drawings, schedules, described herein, or as necessary to complete the work. .3 Sealing of interior and exterior work including but not limited to: .1 Joints between precast floor and walls. .2 Joints around inside and outside of doors. .3 Joints between concrete slab and masonry. .4 Joints between inside and outside of windows. 1.2 Standards .1 Perform work in accordance with sealant manufacturer's written instructions for

preparation of surfaces and material installation. 1.3 Samples .1 Submit duplicate samples of each type of material and colour to be used by this

trade. .2 Cure samples under conditions anticipated at job site during application. 1.4 Environmental Requirements .1 Ensure sealant and substrate materials are within the temperature range of 5°C to

27°C for 24 hours before and during application, until sealant has cured. .2 Where necessary to apply sealants below temperature of +5 degrees C, follow

manufacturers recommendations. .3 Use sealants listed in CGSB Quality Product Listings only. 1.5 Warranty .1 Provide a signed certificate warranting that caulking work will not leak, crack,

crumble, melt, shrink, run, lose adhesion or stain adjacent surfaces for a period of five (5) years after the certificate of final acceptance.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 Primers .1 Non-staining type recommended by sealant manufacturer.

SEALANTS Mary McCormick Recreation Centre 66 Sheridan Avenue, Toronto Section 07900 - Page 2 of 4 2.2 Joint Fillers .1 General: Compatible with primers and sealant, outsized 30 to 50 percent. .2 Extruded Closed Cell Foam: Polyethylene, urethane, neoprene or vinyl; Shore A,

hardness of 20, tensile strength 140 to 200 kPa. Acceptable Products: Sternson Backer Rod Industrial Thermo Polymers Backer Rod 2.3 Extruded Tubing .1 Polyvinyl chloride or neoprene; with 6mm minimum wall thickness; outsized 30% to

50%. 2.4 Bond Breaker .1 Pressure sensitive plastic tape. Acceptable Products: 3M Ltd. No. 266 or No. 481 2.5 Sealants .1 Sealant for vertical and horizontal non-traffic bearing joints. .1 Dry conditions normal temperature range: to CAN/CGSB 19.18-M87,

Sealing Compound, One Component, Silicone Base, Solvent Curing; movement range to 25 percent.

.2 Dry conditions low temperature range: to CAN/CGSB 19.13-M87, Sealing

Compound, One Component, Elastomeric Chemical Curing; movement range to 25 percent.

Acceptable Products: Sikaflex 1A Tremco Dymonic Vulkem H6C 2.6 Foam Insulating Sealant .1 Two component urethane foam in nozzle or pressure-applicator. Acceptable Products: Insta-Foam 'Froth Pak' 2.7 Joint Cleaner .1 Xylol, methylethyleketon, toluol or non-corrosive type recommended by sealant

manufacturer and compatible with joint forming materials. 2.8 Vent Tubing .1 3mm inside diameter extruded polyvinyl chloride tubing.

SEALANTS Mary McCormick Recreation Centre 66 Sheridan Avenue, Toronto Section 07900 - Page 3 of 4 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 Preliminary Work .1 Give at least 3 days notice to the Owner before starting work. .2 Remove and store residents and other furniture in a safe place during the work and

afterwards replace. .3 Provide temporary protection to all interior areas during operations. 3.2 Inspection .1 Ensure joints to receive sealant and caulking are properly prepared. .2 Ensure surfaces to be caulked are sound, dry, free from dirt, water, frost, loose

materials, corrosion, paint and other foreign matter. .3 Inspect joint sizes and correct to achieve depth ratio of ½ joint width with minimum

width and depth of 6mm and maximum width of 20mm. .4 Commence caulking or sealing work only after joint surfaces have been inspected

and approved by the Consultant. For projects with unusual or complicated caulking conditions, the Consultant may require the sealant manufacturers representative to visit site to discuss installation procedures with the contractor.

3.3 Preparation .1 Before starting caulking, test materials for indications of staining or poor adhesion. .2 Commence caulking on masonry only after mortar has cured. .3 Remove dust, dirt and other foreign matter. Allow joint surfaces to dry thoroughly. .4 Remove rust, mill scale and coatings from ferrous metals by wire brush, grinding or

sandblasting. .5 Remove oil, grease and other coatings from non-ferrous metals with joint cleaner. .6 Prepare concrete, masonry, glazed and vitreous surfaces to sealant manufacturers

instructions. .7 Install joint filler to achieve correct joint depth. .8 Where necessary to prevent staining, mask adjacent surfaces prior to priming and

caulking. .9 Apply bond breaker tape where required to manufacturers instructions. .10 Prime sides of joints in accordance with sealant manufacturers instructions

immediately prior to caulking.

SEALANTS Mary McCormick Recreation Centre 66 Sheridan Avenue, Toronto Section 07900 - Page 4 of 4 .11 Do not exceed shelf life and pot life of the materials and installation times as marked

on the containers. .12 For two part materials, mix sealants thoroughly with a mechanical mixer, capable of

mixing at 80-100 rpm without mixing air into materials. Continue mixing until the material is of uniform colour and free from streaks of unmixed components.

3.4 Application .1 Apply sealants to manufacturers instructions. Apply sealant using gun with proper

size nozzle. Use sufficient pressure to fill voids and joint solid. Superficial pointing with skin bead is not acceptable.

.2 From surface of caulking with full bead, smooth, free from ridges, wrinkles, sags, air

pockets, embedded impurities. Neatly tool surface to a slight concave profile. .3 In masonry cavity construction, vent caulked joints from cavity to 3mm beyond

external face of wall by inserting vent tubing at bottom of each joint and maximum of 1500mm o.c. vertically. Position tube to drain to exterior.

.4 In precast concrete panel facing, vent space behind panels by inserting vent tubing

at bottom of each vertical caulked joint and at every second intersection of horizontal and vertical joints. Position tube to drain to exterior.

.5 Cut out damaged caulking unacceptable to the Consultant; reprepare and prime

joints and install new materials as directed. 3.5 Protection .1 Provide wood planks or other approved, non-staining means of protection for the

completed caulking and sealant installations where required to protect work from mechanical, thermal, chemical and other damage by other construction operations and traffic.

.2 Maintain protection securely in place until project completion. Remove protection

when directed by the Consultant. 3.6 Clean-up .1 Clean adjacent surfaces immediately. .2 Remove excess caulking and droppings using recommended cleaners as work

progresses. .3 Remove masking after tooling of joints. Remove materials installed for protection.

Wash and leave work neat and clean. End of Section

STANDARD STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES



PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

.1 Rated steel doors.

.2 Rated steel frames.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

.1 Reserved.

.2 Reserved.

.3 Section 07900 - Sealants.

.4 Section 09900 - Painting.

1.3 REFERENCES

.1 ANSI A117.1 - Specifications for Making Buildings and Facilities Accessible to and Usable by Physically Handicapped People.

.2 ASTM A653/A653M - Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process.

.3 CSDFMA (Canadian Steel Door and Frame Manufacturers Association).

.4 SDI-100 - Standard Steel Doors and Frames.

1.4 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW

.1 Section 01300: Submission procedures.

.2 Product Data: Indicate door and frame configuration and finishes.

.3 Shop Drawings: Indicate door and frame elevations, reinforcement, anchor types and spacings, location of cut-outs for hardware, and finish.

.4 Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special installation instructions.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

.1 Conform to requirements of CSDFMA and ANSI A117.1.

.2 Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum three years experience.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION

.1 Refer to City’s Front End.

.2 Accept on site in manufacturer's packaging. Inspect for damage.




1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS

.1 Coordinate the work with frame opening, and hardware installation.

1.8 WARRANTY:

.1 Refer to City’s Front End.

.2 Hardware:

.1 Locks: Seven years.

.2 Closers: Ten years.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

.1 Artek Door Ltd.

.2 Baron Metal Industries.

.3 Daybar.

.4 S. W. Fleming.

.5 Metal Door Ltd.

.6 Substitutions: Refer to City’s Front End.

2.2 MATERIALS

.1 Standard Steel: 1.6 mm thick, cold-rolled commercial quality steel, galvannealed finish.

.2 Interior Door core: Impregnated Kraft honey comb.

.3 Reinforcements: galvannealed steel, thickness as follows:

.1 Flush Bolt, Lock and Strike: 1.5 mm.

.2 Hinge: 3.5 mm.

.3 Door Closer and Holder: 2.8 mm.

.4 Door edges: Channel reinforcing tack welded between faces and door edges. Bevel stiles minimum 3 mm.

2.3 ACCESSORIES

.1 Bumpers: Resilient rubbers.

.2 Jamb spreaders: galvannealed steel, 1.0 mm thick.

.3 Wire anchors as per manufacturers requirements.




.4 Hardware to match existing.

.5 Louver: To match existing.

2.4 FABRICATION

.1 Fabricate with continuous faces free from joints, tool markings and abrasions and conform to CSDFMA.

.2 Fabricate frames as welded unit.

.3 Welding: to CSA W59. Grind exposed welds smooth and flush. Fill open joints, seams and depressions with filler or by continuous brazing or welding. Grind smooth to true sharp profiles. Sand to a smooth, true, uniform finish.

.4 Fabricate with hardware reinforcement plates welded in place.

.5 Prepare frames for silencers. Provide three single silencers for single doors on strike side.

.6 Fabricate to match existing.

2.5 FINISH

.1 Steel Sheet: Galvanized to streak free matte grey appearance, to ASTM A653/A653M, ZF75 coating designation, minimum 75 g/sq.m. zinc-iron coating.

.2 Primer: to CAN/GGSB-1.40.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

.1 Verification of existing conditions before starting work.

.2 Verify that opening sizes and tolerances are acceptable.

3.2 INSTALLATION

.1 Install in accordance with CSDFMA.

.2 Coordinate with masonry construction for anchor placement.

.3 Coordinate installation with installation of hardware.

3.3 ERECTION TOLERANCES

.1 Maximum Diagonal Distortion: 1.5 mm measured with straight edges, crossed corner to corner.

End of Section

DOOR HARDWARE Mary McCormick Recreation Centre 66 Sheridan Avenue, Toronto Section 08711 - Page 1 of 2 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 Scope .1 Read and conform to Division 00 and Division 1 which both apply to and form part of

the work. .2 Provide all materials, labour and equipment to complete the installation of rated,

labelled and unrated finishing hardware complete, as shown on the drawings, described herein, or as necessary to complete the work. This includes coordination with the installation of Section- Steel Doors and Frames.

1.2 Standards .1 Door Hardware Standards CAN/CGSB 69-GP series CAN/CSA 0132.2.4-90. .2 Rated hardware must bear the required ULC fire rating label. 1.3 Shop Drawings

.1 Submit 6 copies of hardware list clearly indicating material, fire rating, location of exposed fasteners and arrangement of hardware.

.2 Include schedule identifying each unit with door marks and number relating to

numbering on drawings and in door schedule. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 Materials .1 Hinges - ball bearing type, butt, 115mm x 100mm (4-1/2" x 4") by Stanley Works or

approved equivalent. .2 Door closer - #4115 cushion type by LCN Canada or approved equivalent. Install

on inside. .3 Wall stop - #250-32D by Ferrum Metal or approved equivalent. .4 Threshold - 127mm (5") wide extruded aluminum by Pemko Manufacturing Co. Ltd.,

or approved alternate. .5 Panic bar - DL88EO by Von Duprin Ltd., or approved equivalent. .6 Lockset - To match existing - Master Keyed to existing - To be Grand Master,

Service Master and Individual Lock Keyed. .7 Reserved.

DOOR HARDWARE Mary McCormick Recreation Centre 66 Sheridan Avenue, Toronto Section 08711 - Page 2 of 2 .8 Washroom Grab Bar and Associated Hardware shall be chrome or stainless steel

and shall match details on drawings and in particular City of Toronto Accessibility Design Guidelines 2.1.3 Door Hardware, Locks and Closers and 2.3.1.4 Washroom Accessories.

.9 Door Pulls/Pushes – 19.05mm (3/4”) O.D. x 304.8mm (12”), stainless steel, GSH

#4012-1 by Gallery Specialty Hardware or approved equivalent. 10. Push Plates – Stainless steel, Style 81 by Gallery Specialty Hardware or approved

equivalent. 11. Kick Plates – High Kydex Armor Plate, 2mm (0.080”) thick, 305 (12”) high x door

width. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 Preliminary Work .1 Give at least 3 days notice to the Owner before starting work. 3.2 Door Installation .1 Install hardware in accordance with templates and manufacturer's instructions. .2 Install and adjust hardware to ensure that components operate smoothly with light

manual exertion. Use fasteners as supplied and/or recommended by the hardware manufacturer. Lubricate hardware as required.

3.3 Finishing .1 After inspection and acceptance, remove labels, clean and polish, ready for use. End of Section

CERAMIC TILE Mary McCormick Recreation Centre 66 Sheridan Avenue, Toronto Section 09310 - Page 1 of 4 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 Scope .1 Read and conform to Division 00 and Division 1 which both apply to and form part of

the work. .2 Provide all materials, labour and equipment to complete the installation of ceramic

tile as shown on the drawings, described herein, or as necessary to complete the work.

.3 Ceramic tile shall be placed on the floors and shower walls as specified on the

drawings. 1.2 Standards .1 Do ceramic tile work in accordance with the Terrazzo, Tile and Marble Association

of Canada [TTMAC] Manual including the TTMAC Expansion Joint requirements. Tradesmen to have minimum 5 years experience in this type of work.

1.3 Samples .1 Provide a manufacturers technical manual clearly showing the project name, tile

types, accessories and colours, together with installation, cleaning and maintenance requirements.

1.4 Maintenance Materials .1 Provide a 2 percent extra supply of each tile type and colour from the same

production runs as the materials for installation. Store where directed for future maintenance use.

1.5 Examination .1 Visit site, determine existing conditions and limitations and requirements for

protection of adjacent areas; verify dimensions. 1.6 Delivery and Storage .1 Deliver in original packages and containers. Handle materials carefully to avoid

damage to new and existing work. Store materials under suitable protective coverings on skids clear of ground or floor. Keep dry and free from foreign matter.

1.7 Environmental Conditions .1 Maintain air and structural base temperatures at 12°C minimum or 20°C maximum

for 24 hours before, during and after installation.

CERAMIC TILE Mary McCormick Recreation Centre 66 Sheridan Avenue, Toronto Section 09310 - Page 2 of 4 1.8 Warranty .1 Provide a signed certificate warranting materials and installation against cracking,

splitting, discolouration or loosening for a period of two years from the date of the certificate of final acceptance.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1.1 Porcelain Floor Tile for Showers - Rooms 118, 120, 123, 125 .1 Unglazed Porcelain Tile: To CAN/CGSB-75.1-M88, 25.4mm x 25.4mm size, non-slip finish

complete with integral ceramic tile bases 100mm high. The Mosaic tile must not have a fabric backer as this composition is not suitable for wet areas (either a glue dot or paper face is acceptable). Acceptable Manufacturer:

Refer to Drawings * Owner to select two colours from samples provided by contractor. 2.1.2 Porcelain Wall Tile for Showers - Rooms 118, 120, 123, 125 .1 Glazed Porcelain Tile, gloss finish: To CAN/CGSB-75.1-M88, 100mm x400mm size.

The wall tile must not have a fabric backer as this composition is not suitable for wet areas (either a glue dot or paper face is acceptable). Acceptable Manufacturer:

Refer to Drawings * Owner to select two colours from samples provided by contractor. 2.1.3 Porcelain Floor Tile for Rooms 100, 101, 102, 104, 105, 106, 109, 113 .1 Glazed Porcelain Tile, gloss finish: To CAN/CGSB-75.1-M88, 305mm x610mm size.

The floor tile must not have a fabric backer as this composition is not suitable for wet areas (either a glue dot or paper face is acceptable). Acceptable Manufacturer:

Refer to Drawings * Owner to select two colours from samples provided by contractor. 2.2 Reserved

CERAMIC TILE Mary McCormick Recreation Centre 66 Sheridan Avenue, Toronto Section 09310 - Page 3 of 4 2.3 Mortar .1 Mortar: Thin-set latex mortar, suitable for use with non-absorptive tile. Acceptable Products: Flextile '#52 Polymar Thin Set' multi-purpose floor '#54 Walls'

or as recommended by contractor 2.4 Grout .1 Grout to be Epoxy Grout by Flextile (Flex-epoxy 100, 100% epoxy grout), colour to

be determined 2.5 Grout Sealer .1 Grout Sealer: To CAN/CGSB 25-20-M88, Type 1, white. Acceptable Products: Sternson 'Sterncrete Liquid' 2.6 Sealant .1 Sealant: To Can/CGSB-19.24-M88 for wet conditions, movement range to 25

percent, traffic bearing joints to Table 1, white. 2.7 Filler/Leveller .1 Filler/Leveller: Purpose-made, premixed latex-cement underlayment.

Acceptable Products Flextile 'Latex Underlayment' PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 Preliminary Work .1 Give at least 3 days notice to the Owner before starting work. .2 Provide temporary protection to all areas during operations. .3 Coordinate tile installation with elevator equipment installation. 3.2 Preparation for Existing Surfaces .1 Remove wall plates and lay aside for re-use. .2 Remove existing tile, grout and mortar down to a sound base. Apply filler/leveller to

manufacturers directions and cure ready for installation of replacement materials. Maximum surface tolerance 1:400.

CERAMIC TILE Mary McCormick Recreation Centre 66 Sheridan Avenue, Toronto Section 09310 - Page 4 of 4 .3 Provide control joints at 5 m O/C. both ways, around perimeter of room, around

columns and over expansion joints in structural slabs. .4 Provide threshold strips at doors or where any other level differential occurs. 3.3 Installation .1 Apply thin-set mortar to clean, sound, frost free and dry surfaces only. .2 Fit tile around corner, fitments, fixtures, drains and other built-in objects. Maintain

uniform joint size, particularly between sheet-mounted panels. Machine cut edges smooth and even.

.3 Do not use tile with chipped surfaces, split edges or damaged corners. .4 Lay out tiles to ensure perimeter tiles are ½ size or larger. Lay tile plumb, straight,

true, even and flush with adjacent tile, to manufacturers directions. Ensure full embedment for tile. Align patterns and textures.

.5 Tap tile after setting and replace hollow sounding units to obtain full bond. .6 Apply gout and grout sealer evenly, working well into each joint. Wipe surfaces as

work proceeds. .7 Keep control and expansion joints free of mortar and grout. Fill these joints with

sealant to manufacturer's directions. 3.4 Clean-up .1 Remove debris; clean tile and leave ready for occupancy. End of Section

RESILIENT TILE FLOORING Mary McCormick Recreation Centre 66 Sheridan Avenue, Toronto Section 09650 - Page 1 of 4 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 Scope .1 Read and conform to Division 00 and Division 1 which both apply to and form part of

the work. .2 Provide all materials, labour and equipment to complete the installation of resilient

tile floorings as shown on the drawings, described herein, or as necessary to complete the work.

.3 This includes co-ordination with: .1 Final cleaning and second coat of wax. .2 Metal moulding between tile and carpet. 1.2 Standards .1 CAN/CGSB 51.33-M89 Vapour Barrier Sheet, Excluding Polyethelyne for Use in Building Construction .2 ASTM F 1066-99 Vinyl Composition Floor Tile .3 CAN/ULC-S102.2-M88 Surface Burning Characteristics of Flooring, Floor Covering and Miscellaneous Material and Assemblies 1.3 Shop Drawings (Submittals) .1 Samples: Submit for Owner approval, duplicate 300 mm x 300 mm (12” x 12”)

samples of tile material and in accordance with Section 01330: Submittal Procedures before ordering.

1.4 Maintenance Data .1 Supply to Section 01330: Submittal Procedures, 3 copies of detailed instructions for

maintaining, preserving and keeping resilient tile clean and give adequate warning of maintenance practices or materials detrimental to resilient flooring.

1.5 Quality Assurance .1 Surface Burning Characteristics: CAN/ULC-S102.2-M. .2 Work shall be executed by company approved by manufacturer and experienced in

this type of installation, having successful history of similar installations. 1.6 Delivery, Storage and Handling .1 Deliver products in accordance with manufacturers’ written recommendations.

Label containers to clearly identify contents by product description, manufacturer, lot number, size, colour and pattern.

.2 Prevent freezing of product.

RESILIENT TILE FLOORING Mary McCormick Recreation Centre 66 Sheridan Avenue, Toronto Section 09650 - Page 2 of 4 .3 Deliver product to area of work minimum 24 hours prior to installation. Remove

them from containers to allow them to become fully acclimatized. 1.7 Project Conditions .1 Environmental Requirements .1 Ensure temperature of room floor surface and materials is not less than 21°C

(70°F) for 24 hours before, during and for 7 days minimum after installation. 1.8 Warranty .1 Warrant work of this Section against defects and deficiencies in accordance with

General Conditions of the Contract. Promptly correct any defects or deficiencies which become evident during warranty period including, but not be limited to, buckling, opening of seams, bond failure and extensive colour fading, to satisfaction of Consultant and at no expense to City.

1.9 Maintenance .1 Extra Materials: Supply 5% tiles for future repairs in suitable boxes properly

identified. Colour selection to be in proportion to amounts supplied. Store where directed on Site.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 Materials

.1 Rubber Flooring Tile: Each tile is 686mm x 686mm x 10mm thick .2 Acceptable Product Mondo Ramflex (10mm thick) OR approved equal. Samples to be provided to owner. Owner must approve product and colour.

Refer to manufacturer’s website for further information: http://www.mondoindoorsportusa.com/Ramflex.cfm

.3 Synthetic Rubber Composition Cove Base: ASTM F 1344-93, Class I, B, ASTM F

1066-95a, Class 2, Through Pattern, minimum 2.36 mm (3/32”) thick x 100 mm (4”) high in coil lengths, complete with pre-moulded corners.

.4 Rubber wall base CD-22 Pearl and DC-28 Medium Grey by Jonsonite or approved

equal. .5 Thresholds, Adapters to Tile, Cove Caps, Reducer Strips: 1 piece PVC, colour

selected from manufacturer’s standard range. .6 Primers and Adhesives: Those recommended by applicable tile and base

manufactures which will produce good and permanent bond between subfloor and tile, and between wall surface and base.

http://www.mondoindoorsportusa.com/Ramflex.cfm

RESILIENT TILE FLOORING Mary McCormick Recreation Centre 66 Sheridan Avenue, Toronto Section 09650 - Page 3 of 4 .7 Levelling Materials: Latax filler, as recommended by product manufacturer. Acceptable Products Armstrong World Industries S-180 Mapei Ultra/Plan Gemite Sureflo (hydraulic cement base self- levelling floor underlayment, if acceptable to manufacturer) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 Inspection .1 Ensure that substrate is dry and smooth. Report to Consultant any irregularities

detrimental to flooring application. 3.2 Preparation .1 Clean and vacuum floor free of dirt, grease or other deleterious matter that will affect

adhesion of flooring. .2 Remove irregularities and fill depressions with non-shrinking latex compound. .3 Where existing tile floor occurs, remove tile. If sub-surface is satisfactory sand and

prepare it to receive new tile floor. If not, apply cement based levelling underlay as specified hereinafter.

.4 Clean concrete slab of any substance deleterious to bond before applying tile. 3.3 Installation Installation to be in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations and instructions. .1 Apply levelling coat over existing floors receiving new tile floors where required.

Prepare and prime existing surfaces, mix levelling compound, apply and finish levelling compound in strict accordance with manufacture’s printed instructions.

.2 Adhesive and Tile. .3 Commence by laying tiles loosely on floor. Cut and fit snugly before applying

adhesive. Reject tiles having undue variations in colour, shade or texture. .1 Apply adhesive uniformly with approved notch-tooth spreader at

manufacturer’s recommend rate. Use waterproof adhesive on concrete slabs on grade/subgrade.

.2 Lay out each area to be tile symmetrically from its axis. Adjust starting line

so width of border tile will be a lease ½ tile. Distribute tiles having varying tones or texture evenly over entire floor area to avoid patches or streaks and to produce homogeneous blend. Reject tiles having undue variations, in colour, shade or texture.

RESILIENT TILE FLOORING Mary McCormick Recreation Centre 66 Sheridan Avenue, Toronto Section 09650 - Page 4 of 4 .3 Lay tile with flush, uniform, in moderate contact, in straight lines and as

inconspicuous as possible. Lay tile patterns of adjacent tiles parallel. .4 Roll tile with 68 kg (150 lb) roller in both directions immediately after laying. .5 Cut tile around excessively heavy or fixed objects. .6 Install approved edging where floor tile terminates adjacent to dissimilar

flooring material or at different finished floor height. Install thresholds at door ways.

.4 Bases .1 Fill cracks and level irregularities of surface to which base is applied with

filler approved by adhesive manufacturer to provide solid backing over entire area behind base.

.2 Cement cove base to vertical surfaces so that gaps do not occur behind

base, so that front lip of base cove bears firmly and uniformly on floor surfaces and so that good and permanent bond is produced between base and surface to which it is applied.

.3 Apply bases as shown complete with stops. Use premoulded external and

internal corners; mitre internal corners. .4 Use full length pieces where practicable, accumulated short lengths not

permitted. .5 Butt joints and keep flush without gaps. 3.4 Cleaning .1 Remove surplus adhesive from face of tiles and base as work progresses. .2 As soon as possible after adhesive has set, clean tile and base surfaces in

accordance with manufacturer’s directions. .3 After installation, clean tile flooring in accordance with manufacturer’s directions

using cleaners recommended by manufacturer. .4 Do not allow traffic in area for at least 24 hours after flooring installation. Protect

laid flooring from construction traffic for at least 4 to 7 days. End of Section

PAINTING Mary McCormick Recreation Centre 66 Sheridan Avenue, Toronto Section 09900 - Page 1 of 4 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 Scope .1 Read and conform to Division 00 and Division 1 which both apply to and form part of

the work. .2 Provide materials, labour and equipment for painting and finishing new materials

used in upgrading, renovating, adding to or demolishing shown on the drawings, described herein, or as necessary to complete the work.

.3 Priming wood work on arrival to Site. .4 Interior painted finishes. .5 Exterior painted finishes. 1.2 Work Under Other Sections .1 Shop coat of paint - under respective Sections. 1.3 Standards .1 Paint Materials: To CAN/CGSB Standards listed in Finishes, 1-GP series. Provide

signed certificate stating materials comply with the standards and that paint materials for each coating are products of one manufacturer only. Use only odourless solvent products in all interior locations. Do not mix or thin. Use materials and colours directly from the manufacturers containers.

.2 Workmanship standards: Apply finishes to CAN/CGSB 85-GP series as applicable

with sufficient coats to provide full coverage, colour match and uniform sheen, but using minimum number of coats specified. Conform to regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.

1.4 Samples .1 Submit the successful manufacturers colour system with the approved colours

marked and related to those used on the approved colour schedule. Submit the colours to [the Owner] for approval and retention in the project file. Ensure finished work matches manufacturer's colour sample.

1.5 Environmental Requirements .1 Do not apply paint finish in areas where dust is being generated. .2 Spray painting is not allowed. Use only new clean brushes or rollers. .3 Do not clean equipment, brushes, rollers, etc. on the premises. .4 During paint operations, provide sufficient fresh air circulation. .5 In cold weather, use temporary exhaust fans or ozone air purifier.

PAINTING Mary McCormick Recreation Centre 66 Sheridan Avenue, Toronto Section 09900 - Page 2 of 4 1.6 Delivery and Storage .1 Deliver materials in original containers with labels intact and seals unbroken. .2 Store materials under covers and protect from fire at all times. Housing Authority

will not provide material storage space. 1.7 Protection .1 Protect floor surfaces and built in furnishings with clean drop cloths. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 Colours .1 Colours: to match adjacent wall surfaces. .2 Contractor to provide colour samples to Owner for Owner’s Approval. 2.2 Interior Finish Materials .1 For Concrete Block CAN/CGSB Standard One coat Block Filler 1-GP-188M Latex One coat Primer Sealer Benjamin Moore 23-00, 100% Acrylic Two coats Latex Pearl Finish F310-1B, F310-2B or F310-3B Colour to be determined .2 For Gypsum Board Walls and Ceilings One coat Primer Sealer Benjamin Moore 23-00. 100% Acrylic Two coats Latex Pearl Finish Benjamin Moore F310-1B,F310-2B or F310-3B Colour to be determined .3 For Wood Trim One coat Primer Sealer Benjamin Moore 23-00, 100% Acrylic Two coats Latex Pearl Finish F310-1B, F310-2B or F310-3B Colour to be determined .4 For Primed Ferrous Metal Surfaces One coat Spot Priming Benjamin Moore 23-00, 100% Acrylic Two coats Latex Pearl Finish F310-1B, F310-2B or F310-3B Colour to be determined 2.3 Exterior Finish Materials .1 For Primed Ferrous Metal Surfaces One coat Spot Priming 1.40-M87 Oil Alkyd Two coats Exterior Enamel 1.59-M88 Alkyd

PAINTING Mary McCormick Recreation Centre 66 Sheridan Avenue, Toronto Section 09900 - Page 3 of 4 .2 For Galvanized and Zinc Coated Metal One coat Galvanized Metal Primer 1-GM-198M Oil Base Two coats Exterior Enamel 1.59-M88 Alkyd .3 For Masonry, Concrete and Stucco Surfaces Two coats Exterior Masonry Coating 1.GP-138M Latex PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 Preliminary Work .1 Give at least 3 days notice to the Owner before starting work. .2 Provide temporary protection to all areas during operations. 3.2 Preliminary Repairs .1 Cut away the cracked or fissured finish to expose the primary substrate for a

minimum of 300mm on both sides of the cracks or fissures. .2 Examine substrate surface and where cracks or fissures are due to normal

settlement or acceptable building movement, fill with compatible materials to material manufacturers directions and the Owner's approval.

.3 Fill and neatly join repairs to existing work for both substrate and finish; trowel to an

even, level and matching texture; cure and sand as required. .4 Reprime entire repair to ensure colour and texture matches the surrounding finished

surfaces prior to normal repainting operations. 3.3 Preparation of Surfaces .1 Touch up shop primer on steel with CAN/CGSB 1-GP-40M applied to CAN/CGSB

85-GP-14M. .2 Prepare masonry, stucco and concrete surfaces to CAN.CGSB 85-GP-31M. .3 Prepare concrete floors to CAN/CGSB 85-GP-32M. .4 Prepare new and repaired plaster and wallboard surfaces to CAN/CGSB 85-GP-

33M. Fill cracks with plaster patching compound. 3.4 Application .1 Sand and dust between each coat to remove defects visible from a distance up to

1.5 m. .2 Finish bottoms, edges, tops and cut-outs of doors after fitting as specified for door

surfaces.

PAINTING Mary McCormick Recreation Centre 66 Sheridan Avenue, Toronto Section 09900 - Page 4 of 4 .3 Finish tops of cabinets and projecting ledges, above and below sight lines as

specified for surrounding surfaces. .4 Finish closets and alcoves as specified for adjoining rooms. .5 Repainted surfaces within already painted areas must colour match existing. .6 After painting; drawers, window sashes and doors must operate freely. 3.5 Mechanical and Electrical Equipment .1 Paint exposed conduits, pipes, hangers and other mechanical and electrical

equipment occurring in finished areas. Colour and texture to match adjacent surfaces, except where noted otherwise.

.2 Keep sprinkler heads free of paint. .3 Paint disconnect switches for fire alarm system and exit light systems in 'Fire Safety'

yellow enamel. 3.6 Completion .1 Remove protection; make good damage to this and adjacent work. .2 Remove materials, debris, tools, plant and equipment from the premises. 3.7 Clean-up .1 Remove rubbish, rags and oily waste from the site daily and at final completion and

keep areas clean. .2 Upon completion, clean blemished surfaces to Housing Authority satisfaction.

Repair any damage. Replace hardware plates, drapes, pulls, etc. .3 Leave building and painted site equipment in a 'cleaned and polished' condition.

PHENOLIC TOILET PARTITIONS Mary McCormick Recreation Centre 66 Sheridan Avenue, Toronto Section 10170 - Page 1 of 2 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 Scope

.1 Read and conform to Division 00 and Division 1 which both apply to and form part of the work.

.2 Provide materials, labour and equipment for toilet partitions, described herein, or as

necessary to complete the work. 1.2 Standards

.1 Perform work in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions for preparation of surfaces and material installation.

1.3 Submittals

.1 Section 01330 – Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures. .2 Shop Drawings: Indicate partition plan, elevation views, dimensions, details of wall,

and floor supports, and door swings. .3 Product Data: Submit data on panel construction, hardware, standard colors and

accessories. .4 Samples: Submit two samples 6 x 6 inch in size illustrating panel finish, colour, and

sheen. 1.4 Quality Assurance

.1 Accessibility Requirements: Conform to Ontario Building Code, Section 3.8 1.5 Coordination

.1 Coordinate the work with placement of support framing and anchors in wall. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 Plastic Toilet Compartments

.1 Manufacturers: Bobrick Washroom Equipment Company (http://www.bobrick.com), AMPCO (http://www.ampco.com/contact.html), OR Approved Equivalent

.2 Product Description: Phenolic floor mounted overhead braced toilet partitions. 2.2 Components

.1 Toilet Partitions to be: Phenolic Headrail Braced Toilet Partitions. Urinal Screen to be: Phenolic.

Hardware to be standard hardware. Include one (1) collapsible coat hook for each washroom stall. Colour to be determined by owner from standard colour chart.

http://www.bobrick.com/

http://www.ampco.com/contact.html

PHENOLIC TOILET PARTITIONS Mary McCormick Recreation Centre 66 Sheridan Avenue, Toronto Section 10170 - Page 2 of 2 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 Examination

.1 Coordination and project conditions. .2 Verify field measurements are as indicated on Drawings and shop drawings. .3 Very correct spacing of and between plumbing fixtures. .4 Verify correct location of built-in framing, anchorage, and bracing. 3.2 Installation

.1 Installation to be in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. .2 Maintain 1/8 inch space (maximum) between wall and panels and between wall and

end pilasters. .3 Attach panel brackets securely to walls using anchor devices. .4 Attach panels and pilasters to brackets. Locate head rail joints at pilaster center

lines. .5 Field touch-up of scratches or damaged finish will not be permitted. Replace

damaged or scratched materials with new materials. .6 As this is a public facility, line-of-sight is an important concern. Installation is

to be such that there are no line-of-sight issues. 3.3 Erection

.1 Quality Requirements: Tolerances. .2 Maximum Variation From True Position: 1/8 inch. .3 Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/8 inch. 3.4 Adjusting

.1 Erection Requirements: Testing, adjusting and balancing. .2 Adjust and align hardware to uniform clearance at vertical edge of doors, not

exceeding 3/16 inch. .3 Adjust hinges to position doors in partial opened position when unlatched. Return

out swinging doors to closed position. .4 Adjust adjacent components for consistency of line or plane. End of Section

TOILET, BATH AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES Mary McCormick Recreation Centre 66 Sheridan Avenue, Toronto Section 10800 - Page 1 of 3 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 Scope .1 Read and conform to Division 00 and Division 1 which both apply to and form part of

the work. .2 Provide materials, labour and equipment for accessories for men’s and women’s

washrooms. 1.2 Standards & References .1 Perform work in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions for preparation

of surfaces and material installation. .2 ASTM A 123/A 123M – Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized)

Coatings on Iron and Steel Products; 2002. .3 ASTM B 456 – Standard Specification for Electrodeposited Coatings of Copper Plus

Nickel Plus Chromium and Nickel Plus Chromium; 2003. .4 ASTM C 1036 – Standard Specification for Flat Glass; 2001. .5 GSA CID A-A-3002 – Mirrors, Glass; U.S. General Services Administration 1.3 Submittals .1 Section 01330 – Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures. .2 Product Data: Submit data on accessories describing size, finish, details of

function, attachment methods. .4 Manufacturer’s Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures and conditions

requiring special attention. 1.4 Quality Assurance .1 Accessibility Requirements: Conform to Ontario Building Code, Section 3.8 .2 Conform to the current edition of the City of Toronto Accessibility Design Guidelines 1.5 Coordination .1 Coordinate the work with placement of internal wall reinforcement, concealed ceiling

supports and reinforcement of toilet partitions to receive anchor attachments. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 Manufacturers

.1 Refer to contract drawings or approved equivalent.

TOILET, BATH AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES Mary McCormick Recreation Centre 66 Sheridan Avenue, Toronto Section 10800 - Page 2 of 3 2.2 Materials .1 Accessories – General: Shop assembled, free of dents and scratches and

packaged complete with anchors and fittings, steel anchor plates, adapters, and anchor components for installation.

.2 Glass: 6mm plate glass electrolytically copper plated with 15 year spoilage

guarantee. .3 Adhesive: Two component epoxy type, waterproof. .4 Fasteners, Screws and Bolts: Hot dip galvanized, tamper-proof, security type. 2.3 Finishes .1 Chrome/Nickel Plating: ASTM B 456, SC 2, satin finish, unless otherwise noted. .2 Baked Enamel: Pre-treat to clean condition, apply one coat primer and minimum

two coats epoxy baked enamel. .3 Shop Primed Ferrous Metals: Pre-treat and clean, spray apply one coat primer and

bake. .4 Back paint components where contact is made with building finishes to prevent

electrolysis. 2.4 Accessories

.1 Men’s Changeroom (Rooms 137, 136, 135) Women’s Changeroom (Room 133, 132, 131) Universal Barrier-Free Changeroom (Rooms 142, 141, 140)

.1 Toilet Paper Dispenser: refer to contract drawings.

.2 Hand Dryer: refer to contract drawings.

.3 Soap Dispenser: refer to contract drawings. .4 Washroom Signage: Durable Engraved Plastic Signage by FROST (or

approved equivalent).

.5 Mirror: refer to contract drawings.

.6 Grab Bars: refer to contract drawings

.7 Surface Mounted Napkin Disposal: refer to contract drawings.

.8 Waste Receptacle: refer to contract drawings.

.9 Baby and Adult Change Tables: refer to contract drawings. Also, include durable engraved plastic signage to indicate that change tables are located within the washrooms.

TOILET, BATH AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES Mary McCormick Recreation Centre 66 Sheridan Avenue, Toronto Section 10800 - Page 3 of 3 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 Examination .1 Verify existing conditions before starting work. .2 Verify field measurements are as indicated on Drawings and shop drawings. .3 Verify exact location of accessories for installation. 3.2 Preparation .1 Deliver inserts and rough-in frames to site for timely installation. .2 Provide templates and rough-in measurements as required. 3.3 Installation .1 Install accessories in accordance with manufactures’ instruction. .2 Install plumb and level, securely and rigidly anchored to substrate. .3 Mounting Heights and Locations: As required by accessibility regulations and as

indicated on the drawings.

End of Section

REFURBISHMENT OF EXISTING ELEVATOR Mary McCormick Recreation Centre 66 Sheridan Avenue, Toronto Section 14241 - Page 1 of 2 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 Scope .1 Read and conform to Division 00 and Division 1 which both apply to and form part of

the work. .2 This specification is to be read in conjunction with the drawings & other specification

sections for complete details.

.3 The existing elevator is a hydraulic elevator. The existing elevator is to be refurbished.

1.2 Requirements

.1 Refurbishment of the existing elevator is to be undertaken by KONE or approved equal. The KONE products/materials specified herein are to be used as the minimum standard for expected product quality/performance.

.2 All preparation and installation (including structural work) to be carried out by

qualified/certified personnel and to be in strict accordance with the manufacturer’s requirements.

.3 Contractor responsible for obtaining TSSA approval and elevator device license.

.4 The contractor is responsible for the design of the elevator refurbishment and for

submitting certified shop drawings (stamped by an engineer licensed to practice in the province of Ontario).

.5 Scope of work is to include upgrade of the cab interiors which are showing signs of wear and tear.

.6 It is herein clarified that the general contractor is responsible for providing all scope of work items. It is the general contractor’s responsibility to ensure that they include for any work that is required for this elevator refurbishment, but is not being provided directly by the elevator manufacturer/installer. The general contractor should check with the elevator manufacturer/installer to see if any special deposits are required for the work and include for the same appropriately.

1.3 Testing and Inspections

.1 Perform recommended and required testing in accordance with authority having jurisdiction.

.2 Obtain required permits and provide originals to Owner’s Representative.

1.4 Demonstration

.1 Prior to substantial completion, instruct Owner’s Representative on the proper function and required daily maintenance of elevators. Instruct personnel on emergency procedures.

REFURBISHMENT OF EXISTING ELEVATOR Mary McCormick Recreation Centre 66 Sheridan Avenue, Toronto Section 14241 - Page 2 of 2 1.5 Engineering Notes

.1 The elevator refurbishments are to be designed by the elevator manufacturer.

.2 The elevator manufacturer is to prepare and submit certified shop drawings that are stamped by an engineer, licensed to practice in the province of Ontario.

.3 The elevator manufacturer is responsible for obtaining TSSA (Technical Standards & Safety Authority) approval and elevator device license. They are also responsible for all associated costs.

* refer to the drawings for scope of work for the Elevator Refurbishment

MECHANICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Mary McCormick Recreation Centre 66 Sheridan Avenue, Toronto Section 15010 - Page 1 of 16

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1.1 General Requirements 1.1.2 Conform to Sections of Division 1 as applicable.

1.1.3 Section 15010 applies to and governs work of all Sections of Division 15. 1.1.4 Conform to Electrical General Requirements, Section 16010. 1.1.5 Conform to Division 16 requirements for Motors, Starters and Wiring. 1.2 References 1.2.1 CAN/CGSB-1.40-M89: Primer, Structural Steel, Oil Alkyd Type. 1.2.2 ANSI B31.1 to B31.9 inclusive: Piping. 1.3 Description 1.3.1 Provide work in accordance with full intent and meaning of Drawings and

Specifications as required to result in complete operating systems.

1.3.2 Drawings show arrangement and general design. Work is suitably outlined on Drawings with regard to sizes, locations, general arrangements and installation details. Mains and connections thereto are indicated more or less in diagram except where in certain cases Drawings may include details giving exact locations and arrangements required.

1.3.3 Classify and apportion materials and performance of labour to several trades

involved in accordance with local customs, rules, regulations, jurisdictional awards, decisions, insofar as they may apply and as required to efficiently execute work involved in this Contract.

1.4 Electrical Requirements 1.4.1 General: 1.4.1.1 Comply with requirements of Ontario Hydro Electrical Safety Code. 1.4.1.2 All equipment specified in Division 15 or shown on Mechanical Drawings to be

supplied and installed by Division 15 and wired by Division 16 unless specifically indicated otherwise.

1.4.1.3 The nominal electrical service available for mechanical equipment is 575 volts,

3 ph, 60 Hz, and 120 volts, 1 ph, 60 Hz, unless specifically stated otherwise on Drawings.

1.4.1.4 Provide motors with all electrically driven equipment furnished under this

Contract.


1.4.1.5 If Consultant gives approval of substitution of any item of mechanical equipment, include and pay for all necessary electrical changes (labour, materials, overhead, etc.) due to substitution of equipment.

1.4.2 Starters, Disconnects, Motor Control Centres, etc.: 1.4.2.1 As specified in Division 16, Electrical. Division 15 is responsible for coordinating

electrical equipment requirements with Division 16, prior to procuring Division 15 equipment.

1.4.3 Wiring: 1.4.3.1 Provide power and control wiring as defined under respective Sections of

Divisions 15 and 16. Refer to and conform with Division 16 for details of raceways, boxes, wiring, colour coding, etc.

1.5 ELECTRIC MOTORS 1.5.1 Unless specified otherwise, use CSA approved motors with the following

characteristics: 1.5.2 Motors 250 watts (1/3 hp) and under: Use continuously rated squirrel cage

induction type with capacitor start, CEMA "N" starting characteristics and a minimum of Class "A" insulation, unless specified otherwise.

1.5.3 Motors 370 watts (1/2 hp) and over: Use continuously rated squirrel cage

induction type with CEMA "B" starting characteristics and a minimum of Class "B" insulation.

1.5.4 Use drip-proof type motor with a 1.15 service factor, unless specified or

required otherwise by the motor location. Totally enclosed motors must be fan cooled and have a 1.0 service factor.

1.5.5 Provide motors of adequate size and type for intended service. Unless stated

otherwise, use ambient temperature of 40ºC (104ºF). 1.5.6 Unless specified otherwise, starters for electric motors will be provided by

Division 16. 1.5.7 All motors exposed to the outdoors to be TEFC. 1.6 Submittals 1.6.1 General: 1.6.1.1 See Controls, Section 15900, for additional requirements.


1.6.2 Shop Drawings: 1.6.2.1 Submit shop drawings for equipment supplied by Division 15 and as herein

listed. Supplement shop drawings with brochures where necessary or as required. The initial submission of shop drawings for any one trade shall include a checklist of all related specified items for that trade to ensure complete submittal and review.

1.6.2.2 Submit seven copies of such drawings or brochures to Consultant for review. If

items are not as specified, resubmit seven corrected copies. 1.6.2.3 Prepare shop drawings, specifically for this work, in sufficient detail to avoid

decisions being made in shop or field. 1.6.2.4 General shop drawings showing more than one size or model will not be

considered unless properly marked up. 1.6.2.5 Include performance data and characteristic curves with all pump shop

drawings. 1.6.2.6 Include wiring diagrams and schematics for equipment which has electrical

controls or devices furnished with equipment. Wiring diagrams alone are not sufficient; schematic and interconnecting drawings, and written sequence of operation of equipment are required for review.

1.6.2.7 Clearly indicate materials and/or equipment being supplied, all details of

construction, finish, accurate dimensions, capacities and performance on shop drawings and brochures. Identify equipment shop drawings with designations as indicated on Drawings or in Specifications. If not complied with, shop drawings will not be reviewed and will be returned to Contractor.

1.6.2.8 Each shop drawing and/or brochure must bear stamp and signature of

responsible official in Contractor's and Subcontractor's organization, for each submission, as evidence that drawing has been checked against requirements as called for in Specifications and Drawings. Also, in cases where equipment attaches to and/or where there is external wiring connecting to other equipment, check that it has been properly coordinated with this equipment, whether supplied under this or other contracts.

1.6.2.9 Revisions to shop drawings will not be allowed, after they are reviewed, unless

further review and submission is required. 1.6.3 Record Drawings: 1.6.3.1 Maintain an accurate dimensional record of underground piping and deviations

and changes in above ground piping, ductwork and equipment from Contract Drawings. Transfer this information to two sets of record drawings filed at project site and submit to Consultant at completion of project.


1.6.4 Installation and Start-up Instructions: 1.6.4.1 Furnish three copies of installation instructions and three copies of start-up

instructions for any equipment requested by Consultant. 1.6.5 Operation and Maintenance Instruction Manuals: 1.6.5.1 Provide three copies of complete operation and maintenance instructions for

equipment furnished under this Contract. 1.6.5.2 Bind instructions in loose-leaf 3-ring binders. When only one volume is

required, provide a complete index. When more than one volume is required, include in first book a complete index of all volumes and an individual index in each succeeding volume. Include following manuals:

▪ Schematic diagram of electrical systems. ▪ Control shop drawings and operating sequence, including wiring of

components. ▪ Wiring diagram of control panels. ▪ Operating instructions, including start-up and shut-down procedure. ▪ Maintenance instructions, including preventive maintenance instructions

for components of equipment. ▪ Lubricating instructions and recommended cycle of lubrication for each

item of equipment, including various types of lubricants. ▪ Complete parts list of assemblies and their component parts, showing

manufacturer's name, catalogue number, and nearest replacement source.

▪ List of recommended spare parts and quantity of each item to be stocked.

▪ Manufacturers' warranties and guarantees. Above applies to component parts of equipment, whether they are

manufactured by supplier of equipment or are supplied as a component part of item of equipment.

1.7 Quality Assurance 1.7.1 Regulatory Requirements: 1.7.1.1 Conform to governing Municipal and Provincial Codes, Rules and Regulations

and/or Authorities having jurisdiction. 1.7.1.2 Codes and Standards referred to hereinafter are by inference, in each case,

latest issue of the Specified Code or Standard, including all revisions and amendments thereto as adopted and published at date of bid closing.


1.7.1.3 Do all work and supply all equipment in accordance with requirements and recommendations of latest issue of applicable standards and codes of:

▪ National Standards of Canada (NSC) ▪ Canadian General Standards Board(CGSB) ▪ Canadian Standards Association (CSA) ▪ American National Standards Institute (ANSI) ▪ American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) ▪ American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME) ▪ Ontario Regulation 403/97 (Ontario Building Code) (OBC) ▪ Ministry of Housing Ontario Regulation 189/94 and 190/94 ▪ Ontario Fire Code(OFC) ▪ Ontario Ministry of Labour ▪ Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association

(SMACNA) 1.7.2 Permits and Fees: 1.7.2.1 Obtain all permits required for installation of mechanical trades work, arrange

for inspections tests therewith and pay all costs for permits, inspections, and associated fees. Obtain permits immediately after notification of award of Contract.

1.7.2.2 Obtain copies of Drawings, from the Consultant, for submission with application

for permits. 1.8 Site Conditions 1.8.1 Existing Service: 1.8.2 Do not shut down or make connections to any existing service without written

permission of the Consultant. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 Materials and Equipment 2.1.1 Use materials and equipment as specified herein, or specified equivalent.

Design of mechanical systems has been based on first listed supplier and model number/size stated in Equipment Schedules.

2.1.2 Where an item of material or any equipment is specifically identified by a

manufacturer's trade name and/or catalogue number, make no substitution except as provided for in the City’s Front-End Documentation.

2.1.3 In the case of some items of equipment, one or more additional names of

acceptable equal manufacturers are listed in the Clause describing an item or a group of items. The design, layout, space allocation, connection details, etc., are based on the products named first in the description of each item. The products named first in the description of each item establish the quality of


manufacture, and design standards, for all other manufacturers of that item. The general approval indicated by listing the names of other manufacturers is to establish the quality of manufacture and design standards only and is subject to final review of shop drawings, performance data, test reports, production samples (if required) by Consultant, and equipment shipped to site. Ensure that the products used meet the requirements specified as shown on the Contract Drawings.

2.1.4 Suppliers wishing to submit other items of equipment for approval as an equal

to those specified must follow the procedures as listed in the City’s Front-End Documentation. Approval for substitution of equipment will only be given on the understanding that all details, accessories, features and performance meet the Specifications unless otherwise stated. Deviations from the Specifications must be stated in writing at time of application for approval.

2.1.5 Reserved. 2.1.6 Reserved. 2.1.7 After execution of the Contract, substitution of equipment will be considered

only if equipment accepted cannot be delivered in time to complete the work in proper sequence, or if the manufacturer has stopped production of the accepted item. In such cases, requests for substitution must be accompanied by proof of equality and difference in price and delivery, in the form of Certified Quotations from suppliers of both specified and proposed equipment. Credit any decrease in price, involved in substitution, to the Owner by reduction of the Contract Price. The Contractor will not be reimbursed for any such increase in price.

2.1.8 Where equipment other than the equipment used as a basis for design, layout

and space allocation is used, produce and submit revised layouts of equipment, pipes, ducts, etc., in the areas affected. Submit these Drawings with the Shop Drawings. Failure to produce these Drawings is an indication by the Contractor that they are not required and the original space allocations are adequate for the substituted equipment.

2.2 Pipe Sleeve Seal 1. "Link-Seal" 2.3 Motors, Starters, Disconnects, Motor Control Centres 1. Refer to Division 16. 2.4 Pipe Hangers 1. Grinnell 2. Myatt 3. Carpenter & Paterson


2.5 Firestopping 2.5.1 Use only service penetration firestop components and assemblies certified by

ULC in accordance with ULC-S115-M95 "Standard Method of Fire Tests of Firestop Systems".

2.6 Isolating Unions 1. Epco 2. Marpac "Petro" 3. Corrosion Service 2.7 Caulking Compounds 1. Denso-Plast 2. Execution PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 Protection 3.1.1 Protect all work and materials, before and after erection, from weather and

other hazards, and keep in a clean and orderly manner. 3.1.2 Protect pipe ends, valves, and parts of equipment left unconnected to prevent

damage or intrusion of foreign matter. Provide pipe caps for threaded male connections, and plugs for threaded female connections.

3.2 General Installation Requirements 3.2.1 General: 3.2.1.1 Conform with applicable requirements of Occupational Health and Safety Act

and Regulations for Construction Projects. 3.2.2 Measurements and Deviations: 3.2.2.1 Before installing piping, review existing architectural, structural, and electrical

conditions against mechanical drawings. Where interference may occur, and departures from arrangements as shown are required, consult with other trade sections involved, come to agreement as to changed locations or elevations, and obtain approval of Consultant for proposed changes, before proceeding with work.

3.2.2.2 Examine work of other trade sections and contractors, prior to commencement

of mechanical installations. Report in writing, to Consultant, any discrepancies which will affect mechanical installations. Failure to do so shall be considered acceptance of conditions.


3.2.2.3 Where Site conditions require minor deviations from indicated arrangements or locations, make such changes on approval of Consultant without additional cost to Owner.

3.2.2.4 Should any discrepancies occur during installation of mechanical work, which

will necessitate major revisions to mechanical trades work or work of other trade sections or contractors, notify Consultant immediately and obtain his written authorization before proceeding with the work.

3.2.3 Scaffolding and Hoisting Equipment: 3.2.3.1 Refer to and comply with Section 01001, General Requirements. 3.2.3.2 Do not drill, cut or weld building steel, or building structure, for erection of

materials or equipment, without prior written approval of Consultant. 3.2.4 Overloading: 3.2.4.1 During installation of mechanical work, do not load any part of building structure

with load greater than it is capable of bearing. Bear full responsibility should any accident occur or damage result through violation of this requirement.

3.2.4.2 Any temporary supports, used during installation, must be as strong as

permanent supports. 3.2.5 Cutting and Patching: 3.2.5.1 Should cutting, repairing, and patching of previously finished work, of other

trades, be required to allow installation of mechanical work, pay all costs for trade section concerned to perform work.

3.2.5.2 Do not cut or drill holes through floors, roof or structural members before

obtaining permission from the Consultant. 3.2.5.3 For penetrations through walls, not required to have a fire rating, seal all spaces

between pipe or pipe and surrounding wall construction with a fire-rated foam sealant. Use 3M Fire Barrier or Dow Fire Stop UL Classified fire rated foam sealant. Do this as the work progresses to avoid leaving inaccessible holes at completion of the job.

3.3 Equipment Installation 3.3.1 General: 3.3.1.1 Erect equipment in a compact, neat and workmanlike manner. Align level and

adjust for satisfactory operation. Install in such a manner that connecting and disconnecting of piping and accessories can be made readily and that all parts are easily accessible for inspection, operation, maintenance and repair.


3.3.1.2 Install and start up items of equipment in complete accordance with the manufacturer's printed installation and operating instructions.

3.3.2 Noise and Vibration: 3.3.2.1 Select noise and vibration levels of equipment and systems to conform to

design intent. If unnecessary noise or vibration should be created by any mechanical equipment and systems, and transmitted to occupied portions of building or other mechanical work, make all necessary changes and additions as approved by Consultant without additional cost.

3.3.3 Lubrication: 3.3.3.1 Lubricate all equipment prior to start up, in accordance with manufacturer's

printed instructions. 3.4 Piping Construction Methods 3.4.1 General: 3.4.1.1 Unless specified otherwise herein, construct and install all piping in accordance

with ANSI Sections B31.1 to B31.9 as applicable to service, except that soldered joints will not be permitted in compressed gas piping.

3.4.1.2 Inspect pipe and fittings for soundness and clean of all dirt and other foreign

matter immediately prior to installation. Reject all damaged items. 3.4.1.3 Install piping in most direct, straight, and functional manner possible. Except

where otherwise shown, install all vertical lines plumb, and run horizontal lines parallel to building walls. Install piping close to walls, partitions and ceilings. On multiple runs of piping, space piping to allow for installation of insulation and for proper operation and servicing of valves.

3.4.1.4 Ensure that trenches for piping, below grade, are dry and firm when laying pipe. 3.4.2 Expansion and Contraction: 3.4.2.1 Install all piping so as to be free from strain and distortion due to expansion and

contraction and governed by requirements of ANSI B31.1, except as hereinafter modified. Allow for expansion and contraction by offsets, expansion U-bends or loops. Do not use expansion joints of any type unless specifically indicated on Drawings or specified under another Section of Division 15 for a particular installation.

3.4.2.2 Base provision for expansion and contraction on 25 mm (1") movement per 30

m (100 feet) of steel pipe and 38 mm (1-1/2") movement per 30 m (100 feet) of

copper or brass pipe for each 55C (100F) temperature difference from 21C

pipe for each 55C (100F) temperature difference from 21C (70F) ambient. Fabricate expansion bends in steel pipe from pipe sections and long radius welding elbows.


3.4.3 Lines, Grades and Slopes: 3.4.3.1 Install liquid and air lines free of pockets and pitch to drain, at low points in line,

with valves or traps installed as required for drainage of the lines. 3.4.3.2 When slope is not indicated on Drawings, install piping to following minimum

slopes: 1. Drainage piping: 1:50 on drains of NPS 3 size and less and 1:100 on

drains of NPS 4 and larger. In special circumstances as provided for under the Codes and Regulations and express approval of Consultant, drains of NPS4 size and larger may be laid at a lesser slope.

2. Domestic water lines: pitch to low points so that all lines may be

completely drained. 3. Compressed gas and natural gas: slope down 1:1000 in direction of

flow. 3.4.4 Immersion Wells and Sensing Bulbs: 3.4.4.1 Where a temperature sensing bulb or immersion well is installed in piping of

NPS 2-1/2 size and less, increase the tee fitting and piping in which bulb or well is inserted, a minimum of one pipe size larger than adjoining pipe, to prevent restriction of flow of liquid.

3.4.4.2 To improve heat transfer, pack all immersion wells in piping for liquids up to a

temperature of 150C (300F), with a mineral type grease, prior to installation of sensing bulb.

3.4.5 Pipe Joints: 3.4.5.1 Ream all pipe ends and thoroughly clean all dirt, cuttings, and foreign matter

from pipe after cutting and threading. Thoroughly clean all fittings, valves and equipment before connections are made. Cut copper tubing with a tube cutter and clean the joining surfaces of the tubing and fitting with fine emery cloth. Wipe clean with a dry cloth.

3.4.5.2 Make screwed joints with Teflon tape or Masters metallic compound. Apply

compound to the male threads only. Take particular care to prevent the compound from reaching the interior of the pipe or fittings.

3.4.5.3 Make soldered joints, on copper tubing, in accordance with the following usage: Service Solder Type Dom. Hot and Cold water lead free w’ matching flux 3.4.5.4 Do not use core type solder. Use solder conforming to ASTM requirements.


3.4.6 Unions: 3.4.6.1 Provide unions where indicated on Drawings and as noted herein. 3.4.6.2 Do not conceal unions in walls, partitions or ceilings unless access thereto is

provided. 3.4.6.3 Provide dielectric unions at all connections between copper tubing and ferrous

piping. 3.4.7 Fittings: 3.4.7.1 Use of couplings between fittings, valves, and equipment, will not be permitted

except on long runs in pipe sizes NPS 2 or smaller. Where length of pipe between fittings requires a connection, make the joint by welding. Do not use running couplings in any pipeline.

3.4.7.2 Fittings, and ancillary items installed in systems operating at pressures in

excess of 103 kPa (15 psig), must be registered in accordance with CSA B51-97.

3.4.7.3 Use eccentric reducing fittings in locations where piping changes size, and at

connections to equipment, to provide proper drainage or venting of lines. Do not use bushings.

3.4.7.4 Use standard pipe fittings for changing direction of piping. Mitred joints, or field

fabricated pipe bends, are not permitted. Use long radius welded steel elbows unless short radius elbows are specifically authorized by the Consultant.

3.4.8 Piping Connections to Mains: 3.4.8.1 Make branch connections of gas, and compressed air lines, to respective

horizontal piping of larger diameter, to upper quadrant of larger pipe. 3.4.9 Sleeves: 3.4.9.1 Install sleeves where piping passes through foundations, above grade floors,

and walls. Fabricate sleeves of Schedule 40 black steel pipe or type "K" copper tubing for installation in foundations or floors, and of 1 mm (20 ga.) galvanized sheet steel where installed in above grade walls.

3.4.9.2 Terminate sleeves flush with finished ceilings, walls and floors on grade. For

piping passing through floors above grade extend sleeve a minimum of 75 mm (3") above the floor.

3.4.9.3 For pipes entering structures from below grade, seal annular space between

sleeve and pipe with prefabricated seals. 3.4.9.4 Coat exterior surface, of all ferrous material sleeves, with a heavy asphalt

emulsion.


3.4.10 Valves: 3.4.10.1 Supply and install valves in all locations indicated on Drawings, at all piping

connections to equipment and where required for sectionalizing a system or floor.

3.4.10.2 Use gate, butterfly, or ball valves, as indicated on Drawings, for shut-off

purposes. 3.4.10.3 Install check valves as indicated on Drawings, and wherever required to ensure

flow of liquid in one direction. 3.4.10.4 Provide drain valves with hose thread outlet connection, or valve with long

nipple on outlet, at all low points of each water system, and above all riser or branch stop valves, for proper drainage of lines.

3.5 Pipe Hangers and Supports 3.5.1 General: 3.5.1.1 Support or suspend all piping with necessary hangers, structural supports

and/or brackets as shown on Drawings and/or as required, to prevent sagging, warping and vibration and to allow for movement due to expansion and contraction. Place hangers and supports close to fittings, valves and/or other heavy parts.

3.5.1.2 Do not allow loads, of any nature, to be transmitted through piping connections

to equipment not specifically designed for such loads. Where flexible connections are not called for at connections to equipment, support pipe by stands attached to both pipe and supporting structure so that force in any direction is not transmitted to the equipment.

3.5.1.3 Use trapeze type hangers, where pipes are grouped together, unless

specifically indicated otherwise on Drawings. Suspend horizontal member by adjustable rods with locking feature for maintaining level and slope. Space trapeze type hangers based on closest interval required by any pipe supported thereon. Provide any auxiliary steel required to support trapeze between building steel.

3.5.1.4 Do not hang any pipe, from another pipe, unless specifically indicated on

Drawings. 3.5.2 Hangers: 3.5.2.1 Use standard weight clevis hangers with level adjustment and locknut. 3.5.2.2 Use clevis type hangars of wrought steel construction with adjustable rod, level

locking feature and backnuts. 3.5.2.3 For copper tubing provide copper coated hangers. Regulations of some

municipalities require that copper tubing be taped with a plastic tape at hanger


location, or hanger be provided with a plastic insert. Meet these requirements when required, in which case the copper coating may be omitted on the hanger.

3.5.3 Hanger Spacing: 3.5.3.1 For horizontal runs of black or galvanized steel pipe, other than for plumbing

service, do not exceed maximum distances between supports and with minimum diameter rods as follows:

Distance Dia. of Rod Pipe Size(NPS) (m) (ft) (mm) (in) Up thru 1¼ 1.8 (6) 10 (3/8) 1½ 1.8 (6) 10 (3/8) 2 3.05 (10) 10 (3/8) 3.5.3.2 Provide additional hangers in locations where there are concentrated loads

such as valves, specialties, etc. 3.5.3.3 For horizontal runs of copper tubing for services other than plumbing, do not

exceed 1.8 m (6 ft.) between hangers for lines up to and including NPS 3/4 and 2.4 m (8 ft.) for lines of NPS 1 and larger.

3.5.3.4 For horizontal runs of piping fabricated of PVC, use hanger spacing as

recommended by manufacturer. 3.6 Excavating, Backfilling and Rough Grading 3.6.1 Section 02315, Excavating, Trenching, and Backfilling to provide excavating,

backfilling and rough grading for Mechanical Work including trenches. 3.7 Miscellaneous Steel 3.7.1 Supply and install miscellaneous structural supports, platforms, and braces, as

required to hang or support all equipment, piping and similar items, unless 3.8 Painting 3.8.1 Painting and Cleaning: 3.8.1.1 Touch up minor damage to finish on equipment with standard factory applied

baked enamel finish. If, in the Consultant's opinion, the damage is too extensive to be remedied by touch up, replace damaged equipment.

3.8.1.2 Clean steel by scraping, wire brushing or other effective means to remove base

scale, rust, oil, dirt or other foreign matter. 3.8.1.3 Apply 1 coat of zinc chromate iron oxide primer, conforming to CAN/CGSB-

1.40-M89, to all miscellaneous steel. 3.8.1.4 In field touch up all bolt heads and nuts, and previously unpainted connections

and surfaces, damaged during erection, with primer as hereinbefore specified.


3.8.1.5 Give two coats of primer to all surfaces which will be inaccessible after erection. 3.8.1.6 Thoroughly remove all foreign matter, from steelwork, on completion of

installation. 3.9 Disconnection and Demolition of Existing Work 3.9.1 Disconnect and seal off mechanical equipment and services as required on

Site. 3.9.2 Be responsible for demolition and removal of mechanical equipment and

services designated for removal on Drawings and as required by work. 3.10 Pressure Tests 3.10.1 Make specified pressure tests on all piping included in this Contract. Furnish all

pumps, compressors, gauges and connectors necessary for tests. 3.10.2 Conduct tests in presence of the Consultant and all other personnel of

governing authorities having jurisdiction. Notify all parties in ample time to permit them to be present. Conduct tests before piping is painted, covered or concealed.

3.10.3 Conduct hydrostatic tests for a minimum period of 2 hours, or longer when

requested by Consultant or governing authority, at test pressure specified under respective Sections of Specifications.

3.10.4 During this time the pressure shall remain constant and the exterior surfaces of

pipe or fittings shall not show any cracks or other form of leak. 3.10.5 For pneumatic tests, first pressurize system with air to approximately one-half

specified pressure, but not to exceed 345 kPa (50 psig), and examine all joints for leaks with a soapsuds solution. After required repairs have been made and the soap test has been met satisfactorily, pressure system with air to test pressure specified under respective Section of Specifications.

3.10.6 Conduct final tests on natural gas piping in accordance with requirements of

local Utility or governing authority. If feasible, make tests when ambient air temperature is approximately constant. Take into account corrections for pressure change, due to temperature differential, as approved by Consultant.

3.10.7 Disconnect pumps or compressors, used for applying test pressure, during test

period. 3.10.8 Disconnect and/or remove equipment or specialties not designed to withstand

test pressure during test. Reconnect same after completion of test. 3.10.9 Promptly correct any defects that develop through tests and re-test to complete

satisfaction of Consultant and other parties involved.


3.10.10 Forward copies of all final tests on all pressure and drainage piping, and a copy of governing authority approvals, to Consultant immediately on acceptance of tests and/or approvals.

3.10.11 Final payment for work will not be made until above has been received. 3.11 Cleaning, Testing and Approval Records 3.11.1 Maintain records of all pressure tests and approvals by Plumbing Inspector, and

similar items and forward these to the Owner on completion of work. Provide Consultant with copy of records on completion of each test, cleaning operation, and similar items.

3.12 Adjustment and Operation of Systems 3.12.1 When work is complete, adjust all equipment items, of various systems, for

proper operation within framework of design intent, and operating characteristics as published by equipment manufacturer.

3.12.2 Additional instructions are specified under respective Sections of this Division. 3.12.3 Consultant reserves right to require services of an authorized representative of

manufacturer in the event that any item of equipment is not adjusted properly. Arrange for such services and bear all incurred costs thereof. After completion of adjustments, place the systems in full operating condition and advise Consultant that work is ready for acceptance.

3.13 Performance Testing and Balancing 3.13.1 Assume responsibility for testing, balancing, and placing all heating water and

pool re-circulation systems in operation. 3.13.2 Retain independent Balancing Firm to balance heating water and pool re-

circulation systems. 3.13.3 Provide all instruments required to test and balance systems. Balance systems

in accordance with design requirements indicated on Drawings. Report to Consultant immediately any deficiencies in systems or equipment performance resulting in design requirements being unobtainable.

3.13.4 On completion of testing and balancing of all systems, submit to Consultant a

typewritten report (3 copies) of findings, including complete data of pump performance, static pressures, water flow rates, and ampere readings of all motors, taken at motor terminals when equipment is operating under full load conditions.

3.13.5 Submit with each copy of report, complete sets of piping layout prints neatly

marked in red, showing all locations at which test readings were taken, and flow measurement. Show differential pressure across pumps. Obtain piping layout prints from Consultant.


3.14 Acceptance 3.14.1 After all equipment has been installed and adjusted and all systems balanced,

conduct performance tests in presence of Consultant. Arrange time for these tests at convenience of Consultant and Owner. Conduct tests under climatic circumstances to ensure complete and comprehensive tests and of such a manner and duration as Consultant may deem necessary.

3.14.2 During these tests, demonstrate correct performance of all equipment items

and of systems they comprise. Should any system or any equipment item fail to function as required, make such changes, adjustments or replacements necessary to meet performance requirements. Repeat tests until these requirements have been fully satisfied and all systems accepted by Consultant.

End of Section

THERMAL INSULATION



1.0 GENERAL

1.1 QUALIFICATIONS

.1 Shall be undertaken by a Contractor whose principal business and specialization is in the commercial and industrial insulating.

1.2 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

.1 Deliver materials to site in original factory packaging, labeled with manufacturer's name and address.

.2 Protect from weather, construction traffic.

.3 Protect against damage from any source.

.4 Store at temperatures and conditions required by manufacturer.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

.1 For purposes of this section: .1 "CONCEALED" - insulated mechanical services in suspended ceilings and

non-accessible chases and furred-in spaces. .2 "EXPOSED" - will mean "not concealed" as defined herein.

1.4 FIRE AND SMOKE RATING

.1 Insulation and all components of insulation system to have maximum flame spread rating of 25 and maximum smoke developed classification of 50 in accordance with CAN/ULC-S102.

1.5 SERVICES TO BE INSULATED .1 Pipework

.1 Domestic cold, hot water and hot water recirculation systems shall be insulated throughout concealed and exposed ceiling areas.

.2 Condensate drain lines.

.2 Ductwork

.1 Exhaust ductwork 2 m from exterior wall and roof. .2 Supply and return ducts located inside the building in unheated spaces and in

none airconditioned spaces or bulkheads.

2.0 PRODUCTS

2.1 PREFORMED MINERAL FIBRE WITH VAPOUR BARRIER FOR -18°C TO 454°C

.1 Application: for piping, valves and fittings on domestic cold and hot water systems piping.

THERMAL INSULATION



.2 Material: preformed sectional fibreglass rigid with factory applied vapour barrier jacket.

.3 Thermal conductivity and thickness as per following: .1 Domestic water lines, conductivity range 0.035-0.041 W/M∙°C at 38 deg. Mean

temperature, 25 mm thickness. .4 Fastenings:

.1 Self adhesive aluminum tape ULC labelled.

.2 Lap seal adhesive, quick setting for joints and lap sealing of vapour barriers.

.3 Lagging adhesive fire retardant coating.

2.2 MINERAL FIBRE GLASS FLEXIBLE WITH VAPOUR BARRIER FROM 4°C TO 121°C

.1 Application: on hot or cold ducting.

.2 Material: mineral fibreglass blanket with factory applied FSK reinforced foil with vapour barrier jacket. Density 12 kg/m³, nominal R-value of 0.9 (m² ∙°C)/W at 24°C mean temperature.

.3 Thickness:

.1 Exhaust ductwork 2m from exterior wall and roof, plenum for exterior louvres: One 50 mm layer.

.2 Supply and return ducts located inside the building in unheated or not airconditioned spaces: One 40 mm layer.

.4 Fastenings:

.1 Self adhesive aluminum tape ULC labelled.

.2 Lap seal adhesive, quick setting for joints and lap sealing of vapour barriers.

.3 Contact adhesive quick setting.

3.0 EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL

.1 Apply insulation after required tests have been completed and approved by Engineer. Surfaces shall be clean and dry during application of insulation and finishes.

.2 Apply insulation materials, accessories and finishes in accordance with

manufacturer's recommendations and as specified.

.3 Vapour barriers and insulation to be unbroken over full length of pipe, duct or equipment surface, without penetration for hangers, standing duct seams and without interruption at sleeves, pipe and fittings and supports.

.4 Install insulation with smooth and even surfaces.

THERMAL INSULATION



.5 On piping and ducting with insulation and vapour barrier, install high density insulation under hanger shield. Maintain integrity of vapour barrier over full length of pipe and duct without interruption at sleeves, fittings and supports.

3.2 PIPE INSULATION

.1 Seal and finish exposed ends and other terminations with insulating cement. .2 Flanges and unions at equipment valves and other components requiring regular

maintenance, install insulation and finish to permit easy disassembly and replacement without damage to adjacent insulation and finishes.

.3 Secure pipe insulation by tape at each end and centre of each section, but not

greater than 900 mm on centres.

3.3 DUCT INSULATION .1 Maintain uninterrupted continuity and integrity of vapour retarder jacket and finishes.

.1 Hangers and supports to be outside vapour retarder jacket.

.2 Apply high compressive strength insulation where insulation may be compressed by weight of ductwork.

.3 Stagger longitudinal and horizontal joints on multi-layered insulation.

.4 Delete external thermal insulation where equivalent R-value of acoustic insulation is

provided.

End of Section

PLUMBING



1.0 GENERAL

1.1 SHOP DRAWINGS AND PRODUCT DATA

.1 Submit shop drawings on plumbing fixtures, equipment and accessories.

1.2 FIXTURES AND TRIM

.1 Architectural drawings shall govern in determination of number and location of fixtures.

.2 Fixtures and trim in any one washroom or location to be the product of one

manufacturer and of the same type.

1.3 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

.1 Provide operation and maintenance data for incorporation into manual.

2.0 PRODUCTS

2.1 DRAINAGE WASTE AND VENT PIPING AND FITTINGS

.1 Buried sanitary drain and vent piping: .1 ABS-DWV to CSA-B181.1 with solvent weld fittings. .2 PVC-DWV to CSA-B181.2 with solvent weld fittings. .3 Plastic to CSA-B182.1 with solvent weld fittings.

.2 Above ground sanitary drain and vent piping:

.1 Piping up to 65 mm: .1 PVC-DWV to CSA-B181.2 with solvent weld fittings. .2 Copper DWV to ASTM B306 with wrought copper fittings to ANSI B16.29.

Solder, tin-lead 50:50 to ASTM B32 type 50A. .2 Piping 75 mm and larger:

.1 PVC-DWV to CSA-B181.2 with solvent weld fittings. .2 Cast iron to CSA-B70 with one layer of protective coating, mechanical

joints, neoprene or butyl rubber compression gaskets and stainless steel clamps.

2.2 DOMESTIC WATER SUPPLY COPPER PIPING AND FITTINGS

.1 Domestic water system within building. .1 Above ground: copper tube, hard drawn, type L: to ASTM B88M.

.2 Fittings

.1 Bronze pipe flanges and flanged fittings, Class 150 and 300: to ANSI B16.24.

.2 Cast bronze threaded fittings, Class 125 and 250: to ANSI/ASME B16.15.

.3 Cast copper, solder type: to ANSI B16.18.

.4 Wrought copper and copper alloy, solder type: to ANSI/ASME B16.22.

.5 NPS 2 and larger: roll grooved to CSA B242.

PLUMBING



.3 Joints

.1 Rubber gaskets, 16mm thick: to ANSI/AWWA , C111/A21.11.

.2 Bolts, nuts, hex head and washers: to ASTM A307, heavy series.

.3 Solder: Solder: 95/5 antimonial tin “Lead Free” solder.

.4 Teflon tape: for threaded joints.

.5 Grooved couplings: designed with angle bolt pads to provide rigid joint, complete with EPDM flush seal gasket.

.6 Dielectric connections between dissimilar metals: dielectric fitting to ASTM F492, complete with thermoplastic liner.

2.3 VALVES

.1 Gate valves

.1 NPS 2 and under, soldered: to MSS SP-80, rising stem, Class 125, 862 kPa, bronze body, screw-in bonnet, solid wedge disc.

.2 NPS 2-1/2 and over, flanged: to MSS SP-70, non-rising stem, Class 125, 862 kPa, flat flange faces, cast-iron body, bronze trim, bolted bonnet.

.2 Ball Valves

.1 NPS 2 and under, soldered: to ANSI B16.18, Class 150, bronze body, stainless steel ball, PTFE Teflon adjustable packing, brass gland and PTFE seat, steel lever handle, with NPT to copper adaptors.

2.4 FLOOR DRAINS

.1 Floor drains to CAN3-B79.

.2 Ref. FD: refer to plumbing fixture schedule on drawings .1 Standard of acceptance: Ancon, Zurn, J.R. Smith and Mifab will be accepted

as equal.

2.5 CLEANOUTS

.1 Ref: stack cleanout. .1 Lacquered cast iron with large access area and bolted gasketted cover. For

tiled areas unit shall be complete with stainless steel round access cover. .1 Standard of acceptance: Ancon CO-460. Zurn, Jay R. Smith and Mifab

will be accepted as equal. .2 Ref: line cleanout for wall access.

.1 Cleanout plug with expandable gasket, complete stainless steel round access cover and 90 mm long anchor screw. .1 Standard of acceptance: Ancon CO-440. Zurn, Jay R. Smith and Mifab

will be accepted as equal.

2.6 WATER HAMMER ARRESTORS

.1 Type: bellows to PDI-WH-201.

.1 Stainless steel construction with welded nestled bellows with precharged air. .1 Standard of acceptance: Ancon SG. Zurn, Jay R. Smith and Mifab will be

accepted as equal.

PLUMBING



2.7 TRAP SEAL PRIMERS

.1 All brass, with integral vacuum breaker, NPS 1/2 solder ends, NPS 1/2 drip line connection. .1 Standard of acceptance: Ancon MS-810. Zurn, Jay R. Smith and Mifab will be

accepted as equal.

2.8 PLUMBING FIXTURES

.1 Refer to plumbing fixture specification Section 15600.

2.9 NATURAL GAS PIPE, FITTINGS AND VALVES .1 Pipe: black steel, schedule 40, to ASTM A53.

.2 Pipe joints: threaded with Rectoseal A5 pipe dope or welded joints.

.3 Fittings size NPS 2 and smaller: Class 150, malleable iron threaded, to ANSI B16.3.

.4 Fittings size NPS 2 1/2 and larger: schedule 40, steel buttwelding to ANSI/ASME B16.9.

.5 Valves: code approved lubricated plug valves or ball valves.

.6 Pressure regulators: local utility gas code approved suitable for the pressure

indicated on drawings.

3.0 EXECUTION

3.1 DRAIN, WASTE AND DOMESTIC PIPING WATER PIPING VALVES AND FITTINGS

.1 Install in accordance with Ontario Building Code and Local Authorities having jurisdiction.

.2 Support all piping as per manufacturer's recommendations. Shall be installed with

individual supports of sufficient strength, quality and spaced adequately to prevent any sagging. Pipe hangers shall consist of clevis hangers with threaded rods and suitable clamping device at top end. Where supporting copper pipe, the pipe shall be isolated from the hanger with electrolytic action tape or equivalent.

.3 Piping which does not bear certification markings will be rejected by Engineer and

shall be replaced with an approved material at the contractor's expense.

.4 Cut square, ream and clean tubing and tube ends, clean recesses of fittings and assemble without binding.

.5 Where possible install piping close to building structure to minimize furring, conserve

headroom and space. Group exposed piping.

.6 Make connections to fixtures and equipment in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

PLUMBING



.7 PVC-DWV PIPE SHALL NOT BE INSTALLED IN CEILING SPACES USED AS A

RETURN AIR PLENUM. WHERE PLASTIC PIPE PENETRATES A FIRE

SEPARATION, IT SHALL BE INSTALLED WITH A ULC LISTED AND APPROVED

FIRE STOP DEVICE(S) AT THE PLANE OF FIRE SEPARATION. REFER TO

MECHANICAL DRAWINGS TO CLARIFY WHICH CEILING SPACES ARE USED

AS A RETURN AIR PLENUM AND TO ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS FOR FIRE

SEPARATION WALLS.

IN A CEILING SPACE USED AS A RETURN AIR PLENUM ONLY COPPER PIPE,

CAST IRON PIPE AND SYSTEM XFR 15-50 PVC-DWV PIPING AS

MANUFACTURED BY IPEX WILL BE ACCEPTABLE.

3.2 PRESSURE TESTS

.1 Conform to requirements of Section 15010 - General Requirements.

3.3 FLUSHING, CLEANING AND DISINFECTION

.1 After pressure tests have been completed and approved as per section 15010, flush domestic water piping with a sufficient flow until all foreign materials have been removed and the flushed water is clear.

.2 When flushing has been completed, introduce chemicals into the piping to disinfect

the system piping in accordance with the Ontario Building Code and authority having jurisdiction. Flush and sanitize with chemical cleaning agents to remove all traces of solvents and fluxes used in installation. When disinfection is complete, flush and fill the system with clean water.

.3 Ensure that when new piping is installed to an already cleaned and disinfected

system, this new piping shall be completely isolated from the existing system.

3.4 VALVES

.1 Isolate equipment, plumbing fixtures and branches with gate or ball valves or as indicated.

.2 Balance hot water recirculation system using lockshield ball valves.

3.5 FLOOR DRAINS

.1 Install floor drains with finished floor. Confirm floor elevations with General Contractor prior to commencement of work.

.2 All floor drains shall be individually trapped primed and vented.

3.6 CLEANOUTS

.1 In addition to those required by code and as indicated, install at base of all soil and waste stacks.

.2 Bring cleanouts to wall or finished floor unless serviceable form below floor.

PLUMBING



3.7 ACCESS DOORS .1 Install at wall to service stack cleanouts and isolation valves for accessibility.

3.8 WATER HAMMER ARRESTORS .1 Install on branch lines to each fixture or group of fixtures having a quick closing

device such as flush valves.

3.9 TRAP SEAL PRIMERS

.1 Install as per manufacturer’ recommendations.

.2 For floor drains, install trap seal primer on cold water supply to nearest frequently used plumbing fixture, in concealed space. Install soft copper tubing to floor drain.

3.10 FIXTURE TRAPS

.1 Provide p-traps for all plumbing fixtures without built-in traps. Exposed p-traps shall be chrome plated, for all other areas shall be brass.

.2 Shall be sized and located in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendation.

3.11 FIXTURE INSTALLATION

.1 Connect fixtures complete with chrome plated rigid of flexible supplies with screwdriver stops, reducers and escutcheons. Each fixture shall be piped drained and separately trapped. Hot water faucets shall be on left.

.2 Mount and support fixtures level and square and in accordance with manufacturer's

roughing-in details.

.3 For barrier free basins, insulate sanitary and hot water supply lines with 25mm thickness of fibreglass insulation.

3.12 GAS PIPING

.1 Install in accordance with local gas utility requirements and CAN/CSA-B149.1.

.2 Assemble piping using fittings manufactured to ANSI standards.

.3 Connect to equipment in accordance with manufacturer's instruction unless otherwise indicated.

.4 Slope piping down in direction of flow to low points.

.5 Install drip points:

.1 At low points in piping system.

.2 At each connection to equipment.

.6 Use eccentric reducers at pipe size change installed to provide positive drainage.

.7 Provide clearance for access and for maintenance.

PLUMBING



.8 Ream pipes, clean scale and dirt, inside and out.

.9 Install piping to minimize pipe dismantling for equipment removal.

.10 Install valves with stems upright or horizontal unless otherwise approved by

Engineer.

.11 Install valves at branch take-offs to isolate each piece of equipment and as indicated.

.12 Install exterior pressure regulator as per manufacturer’s installation instructions for

applicable gas service pressure.

.13 Test system in accordance with CAN/CSA-B149.1 and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

.14 Purge after pressure test in accordance with CAN/CSA-B149.1.

.15 Provide Engineer with signed inspection certificate of approval as provided by local

gas utility. Installer’s certificate will not be acceptable.

End of Section

AIR DISTRIBUTION Mary McCormick Recreation Centre 66 Sheridan Avenue, Toronto Section 15700 - Page 1 of 5

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 General Requirements 1.1.1 Conform to Mechanical General Requirements, Section 15010. 1.1.2 Conform to Electrical General Requirements, Section 16010 1.2 Systems Description 1.2.1 Provide systems of heating, ventilating and air conditioning in accordance with

Contract Documents including but not limited to following: - Grilles, registers and diffusers - Ductwork systems - package HVAC Unit - Cleaning, testing, balancing and adjusting of mechanical systems 1.3 Information Requirement 1.3.1 Advise appropriate trade sections of actual size requirements for products provided

under this Section, taken from certified shop drawings, prior to construction. Bear costs for modifications resulting from delay of this information.

1.4 Quality Assurance 1.4.1 Regulatory Requirements: 1.4.1.1 Conform to requirements of local by-laws, Ministry of Labour Regulations, and

authorities having jurisdiction. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 Sheet Metal Work 2.1.1.1 General: 2.1.1.2 Furnish sheet metal work in accordance with material specifications and construction

details specified herein, and conforming to standard and recommended practices as defined by SMACNA Duct Construction Standards.

2.1.1.3 Furnish ductwork constructed to SMACNA 765 pa (3” W.G.) pressure classification. 2.1.1.4 Furnish ductwork and accessories from galvanized steel sheet. 2.1.1.5 Furnish ducts of sizes indicated on Drawings. Where ducts are to be furnished with

internal acoustical liner, adjust duct size to accommodate acoustic liner thickness, with clear inside dimensions as indicated on Drawings.


2.1.1.6 Fabricate ductwork free from vibration, rattle or drumming under operating conditions. Furnish necessary reinforcements, bracing, framing, gasketting, to comply with performance criteria.

2.1.2 Rectangular Ductwork Type: 2.1.2.1 Furnish elbows of standard radius design with inner radius equal to width of elbow,

unless shown otherwise, with ends to match transverse joints of duct. 2.1.2.2 Where elbows are indicated as square type, provide air turning vanes of double blade

construction. 2.1.2.3 Cross-break flat surfaces between joints, or between joints and intermediate

reinforcements, to prevent vibration or buckling. 2.1.2.4 Seal joints on rectangular ductwork with high velocity duct sealer, 3M EC800, Foster

#30-02, Hardcast Iron Grip #601, Duro-Dyne S-2 or Transcontinental Equipment "MP". Do not use duct tape.

2.1.3 Supports and Hangers – Rectangular Ductwork 2.1.3.1 Except where indicated otherwise on Drawings, furnish 3 mm x 25 mm (1/16" x 1")

strap metal hangars for ducts up through 760 mm (30") width. Bend strap hanger around bottom of duct for minimum of 38 mm (1-1/2") and attach to sides and bottom of duct.

2.1.4 Turning Vanes: 2.1.4.1 Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Hart and Cooley “Ducturns” 2. Duro-Dyne “Duro Vane RV-2” 2.1.4.2 Provide hollow air foil type turning vanes in ductwork where indicated on Drawings

and in 90 square duct elbows, fabricated of same material as duct in which they are installed.

2.1.5 Balancing Dampers: 2.1.5.1 Furnish balancing dampers, manually operated opposed blade type, or butterfly blade

type. 2.1.6 Fire Dampers: 2.1.6.1 Furnish fire dampers of hinged, fusible link type with channel frames, blades and

housing, ULC labelled and conforming to ANSI/NFPA 90A-1996 requirements. Furnish "Type B" fire dampers for rectangular or square ductwork and "Type C" fire dampers for round ductwork.

2.1.6.2 Furnish fire dampers and frame constructed of same material as duct in which they

are installed.


2.1.6.3 Flexible Duct Connections: 2.1.6.4 Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Duro-Dyne “Grip-Loc Type SMFN” 2. Ventfabrics “Ventglas” 2.1.6.5 Furnish flexible duct connections between fans and/or air handling units and

connecting ductwork, between unit components, in ducts at building expansion joints, and in other locations indicated on Drawings.

2.1.6.6 Furnish flexible connectors of heavy glass fabric double coated with neoprene and

attached to 0.6 mm (24 ga) metal strips 75 mm (3") wide. Furnish flexible connectors with length of fabric between metal strips of minimum 75 mm (3") for ducts of maximum size in either dimension or diameter of 750 mm (30") or less, and 150 mm (6") for ducts of 775 mm (31") size and larger.

2.2 Diffusers, Registers and Grilles 2.2.1 Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. E.H. Price 2. Titus 3. Nailor 2.2.2 General: 2.2.2.1 Refer to Drawings for neck size, dimensions, capacity, of grilles, registers and

diffusers. 2.2.2.2 Furnish supply diffusers and registers to deliver indicated air quantities indicated with

throw to reach intended space limits without increasing sound level of room. Furnish blank-off baffles where required. Furnish equalizing deflectors on diffusers and in other locations as indicated or required.

2.2.2.3 Coordinate placing of diffusers, registers and grilles in ceilings with electrical and

ceiling installation trades and exact location to final approval of Consultant. 2.3 Acoustic Duct Insulation 2.3.1 Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Fiberglas 2. Manson 3. Partek 2.3.2 General: 2.3.2.1 Furnish rigid coated duct liner conforming to ANSI/NFPA 90A-1996 and 90B, of 25

mm (1") thickness and 72 kg/m3 (4.5 lb/cu.ft) density.


2.3.2.2 In high velocity ductwork furnish perforated or expanded metal inner liner over

acoustic insulation. 2.3.3 Mechanical Insulation Clips: 2.3.3.1 Fasten duct liner with plate type impaling pins and self-locking washers, "Stic-Klips"

as manufactured by Eckels Industries, or "Tactoo" Series T; or furnish weld pins and self locking washers as manufactured by Continental Stud Welding Ltd. Furnish fasteners for securing pins of size and length as required by insulation weight, thickness, fastener spacing and design.

2.3.4 Adhesives and Sealants: 2.3.4.1 Furnish Foster No. 81-99 or Bakor No. 230-04 fire retardant adhesive for adhering

insulation to sheet metal work. Seal joints with Foster No. 30-36 or Bakor No. 120-09 mastic sealant.

2.4 Package HVAC Units 2.4.1 Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Lennox 2. Trane 3. McQuay 2.4.2 General: 2.4.2.1 Furnish package rooftop unit of type, model, size and capacity indicated on Drawings

and as specified herein. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 Sheet Metal Work 3.1.1 General: 3.1.1.1 Install ductwork in arrangement indicated on Drawings in accordance with standards

and recommended practices off ASHRAE and SMACNA. Provide required offsets and transitions, whether specifically indicated or not, to facilitate duct arrangement and to avoid interference with building structure, piping, equipment and services.

3.1.1.2 Install ductwork in locations and at elevations appropriate to ceiling height indicated

on Drawings. Where it is required to be concealed, install ductwork in furred spaces provided in walls and ceilings. Where there is no provision for concealed ductwork, install as close as possible to walls, partitions and overhead structures to attain maximum headroom and clearance.


3.1.1.3 Where shape of duct changes, install a transition piece so that angle of side of

transition piece does not exceed 15 from straight run of duct being connected, unless indicated otherwise on Drawings.

3.1.2 Supports and Hangars – Rectangular Ductwork: 3.1.2.1 Install supports and hangers at intervals not over 2400mm (8'-0") centres for ducts up

to 1500 mm (5'-0") in width. 3.1.3 Flexible Duct Connections: 3.1.3.1 Install flexible connectors with fabric in folds, not drawn tight. 3.1.3.2 Install flexible connectors between fan coil units and mating ductwork. Provide

connectors suitable for connecting to flanges of casings where so provided. 3.1.4 Fire Dampers: 3.1.4.1 Install fire dampers in accordance with supplier’s instructions, complete with retaining

angles on both sides of wall or floor and fastened to damper collars. 3.1.4.2 Install fire dampers complete with adjacent access door as required to permit

re-opening of damper and replacement of fusible link. 3.1.5 Refer to Details M1 and M2 attached to Section 15010, General Mechanical

Requirements. 3.1.6 Balancing Dampers: 3.1.6.1 Provide balancing damper on all branch connections to individual air diffusers and as

indicated on Drawings. Do not use splitter dampers. 3.1.7 Acoustic Duct Insulation: 3.1.7.1 Install internal acoustic insulation in specific sections of ductwork and/or plenums as

indicated on Drawings. 3.1.7.2 Adhere insulation to ductwork or plenums by bedding in strips of adhesive

supplemented by impaling clips or weld pins spaced at 300 mm (12") oc with self-locking washers. Apply adhesive at 50% coverage, in 150 mm (6") strips. Cut off ends of welded impaling pins after application of self-locking washers. Seal butt joints of insulation with mastic sealant applied to edges of insulation. Coat joints and self-locking washers after installation with 2 coat application of mastic sealant, and with open mesh glass fabric embedded in mastic between first and second coat.

3.2 Balancing of Air Handling Systems 3.2.1 Balance air handling systems in accordance with Section 15010, General Mechanical

Requirements and as specified herein. End of Section

HEATING VENTILATION AND AIR CONDITIONING - AIR SYSTEMS



1.0 GENERAL

1.1 SHOP DRAWINGS AND PRODUCT DATA

.1 Submit shop drawings and product data for all equipment.

2.0 PRODUCTS

2.1 RIGID DUCTWORK METALLIC LOW PRESSURE TO 500 Pa

.1 Galvanized steel lock forming quality to ASTM A525M, Z90 zinc coating.

.1 Fabrication, thickness, reinforcement and joints to SMACNA.

.2 Fittings fabrication to SMACNA. .1 Standard radius or short radius elbows with single thickness turning vanes

(centreline radius 1.5 times width of duct). .2 Square elbows shall be with double thickness turning vanes. .3 For rectangular main duct branch with radius 1.5 times width of branch duct or

45° entry on branch. .4 Offsets shall be full, short, square, radiused elbows or as indicated. .5 For obstruction deflectors maintain full cross-sectional area.

.3 Hangers, supports and configuration to SMACNA.

.1 For maximum duct size 500 mm, use strap hangers of same material as duct but next sheet metal thickness heavier than duct. For duct size over 500 mm, use black steel angle with black or galvanized steel rods complete with locking nuts and washers. Angle and rod size, hanger spacing and installation shall be in accordance to SMACNA.

.2 Upper hanger attachments shall be compatible with structure. For concrete shall be manufactured concrete inserts. For steel joists shall be manufactured joist clamp or steel plate washer and for steel beams shall be manufactured beam clamps.

.4 Duct sealing:

.1 For all supply and return ducts located in spaces not used as a return air plenum, transverse joints and connections shall be sealed, longitudinal seams shall be unsealed. Shall be made air tight with duct sealant, oil resistant, polymer type flame resistant, temperature range of minus 35°C to plus 94°C.

.2 For all exhaust ductwork transverse joints and connections shall be sealed, longitudinal seams shall be unsealed. Shall be made air tight with duct sealant, oil resistant, polymer type flame resistant, temperature range of minus 35°C to plus 94°C.

.3 Plenum at exterior louvres shall be watertight.

2.2 DUCT ACCESSORIES

.1 Single Blade Balancing Dampers .1 Round:

.1 Blade and frame shall be of galvanized steel and one gauge of higher thickness of duct to be installed.




.2 Shall be complete with axle, wingnut locking device and position indicator.

.2 Square and Rectangular

.1 Blade and frame shall be of galvanized steel and one gauge of higher thickness of duct to be installed. Frame complete with angle stop and blade V-groove stiffened.

.2 Size and configuration to recommendations of SMACNA, except maximum height of 200 mm.

.3 Locking quadrant with shaft extension to accommodate insulation thickness.

.4 Inside and outside nylon or bronze oilite end bearings.

.5 Channel frame of same material as adjacent duct, complete with angle stop.

.2 Flexible Connections

.1 Galvanized sheet metal frame 24 gauge with fabric clenched by means of double locked seams. Dimensions 75 mm metal, 75 mm fabric, 75 mm metal. Neoprene double coated glass fabric, non-combustible, self-extinguishing, airtight and waterproof, temperature rated at -40°C to plus 94°C, mass of 1.32kg/m² and thickness of 0.76 mm.

.3 Access doors in ducts

.1 Non-insulated ducts: sandwich construction of same material as duct, one sheet metal thickness heavier, minimum 22 gauge thick complete with sheet metal angle frame.

.2 Insulated ducts: sandwich construction of same material as duct, one sheet metal thickness heavier, minimum 22 gauge thick complete with sheet metal angle frame and 25 mm thick rigid glass fibre insulation.

.3 Gaskets: neoprene or foam rubber.

.4 Hardware: .1 Up to 300 x 300 mm: 2 sash locks. .2 300 mm to 450 mm : 4 sash locks.

2.3 FLEXIBLE DUCTWORK

.1 Shall be factory fabricated to CAN/ULC S110 with flame spread rating not to exceed 25 and smoke developed rating not to exceed 50.

.2 Non-metallic, non-collapsible type, inner material of aluminized polyamide

mechanically bonded to and helically supported by external steel wire.

.3 Where ductwork is required to be insulated, use insulated flexible ductwork with factory applied of 25 mm thickness of flexible glass fibre thermal insulation with vapour barrier and vinyl reinforced jacket.

.4 Performance:

.1 Operating pressure: Low/medium, 750 Pa static.

.2 Bend radius: 1 x diameter.

.3 Thermal R-value: 0.6 m²∙°C/W.

.4 Listing: UL 181, Class 1 air duct.

.5 Temperature range -29°C to 121°C.




2.4 GRILLES, REGISTERS AND DIFFUSERS

.1 Shall meet capacity, pressure drop, terminal velocity, throw, noise level and neck velocity. Finish shall be finalized by architect.

.2 Refer to equipment schedule on drawings. E.H. Price has been specified. Nailor

Ind., Titus and Krueger will be accepted as equal.

2.5 ACOUSTIC DUCT LINING

.1 All insulation, coverings, linings, adhesives and other materials used with insulation shall have a maximum flame spread rating of 25 and a maximum smoke developed rating of 50, in accordance with CAN/ULC S102.

.2 Duct liner: Use on flat surfaces, rigid board fibrous glass duct liner, 25 mm thick,

density 32 kg/m³ minimum and minimum thermal resistance nominal R-value 0.7 m²∙°C/W. at 24 deg. C mean temperature. Fibrous glass duct liner, air stream side faced with bonded dark thermosetting resin.

.3 Adhesive: Shall meet requirements of ANSI/NFPA 90A and ANSI/NFPA 90B.

Temperature range minus 29 deg. C to plus 94 deg. C.

.4 Fasteners: Weld pins 2 mm diameter, length to suit thickness of insulation. Metal retaining clips, 32 mm square.

.5 Joint tape: Poly-Vinyl treated open weave fiberglass membrane 50 mm wide.

.6 Sealer: Meet requirements of ANSI/NFPA 90A and ANSI/NFPA 90B. Temperature

range minus 68 deg. C to plus 94 deg. C.

2.6 EXHAUST FANS

.1 Ref. EF: all fans Shall be CSA certified, comply to AMCA Standard 210 and bear the AMCA certified ratings.

.2 Cabinet Fan-Ceiling Mounted

.1 Centrifugal direct drive, suitable for ceiling installation, zinc coated rectangular acoustically lined metal housing and backdraft damper.

.2 Blower resiliently mounted, polymeric or metal and balanced.

.3 Motor plug-in type, permanently lubricated and thermally protected.

.4 Integral metal or plastic grille aesthetically designed.

.5 For acceptable standard, performance data and accessories, refer to equipment schedule on drawings. Broan, Reversomatic, Greenheck, Acme, Carnes and Loren Cook will be accepted as equal.

2.7 PACKAGED HVAC UNITS

.1 Refer to the Tender Drawings




.2 CSA approved and UL listed and labelled packaged roof-top HVAC units, natural gas fired type and downflow configuration as indicated on drawings.

.3 Units shall consist of cabinet, fans, coils, air filters, compressors, operating controls, economizer and shall be factory-assembled, charged with refrigerant R-22, tested and designed for mounting on fabricated roof curb.

.4 Cabinet: weatherproof construction, galvanized steel with baked enamel finish.

Insulation: coated rigid fibrous glass on surfaces where conditioned air to be handled, 12 mm thick.

.5 Fans: .1 Supply fan: centrifugal forward-curved wheel, rubber-mounted, statically and

dynamically balanced. V-belt drive with adjustable pitch motor pulley, rubber isolated hinge-mounted motor.

.2 Outdoor fans: propeller type with single-piece, spun venturi outlets and zinc-plated guards. Motors shall be sequenced for head pressure control.

.6 Coils: evaporator and condenser coils to be seamless copper tubes mechanically

bonded to aluminum plate fins. Evaporator drain pan to be insulated and piped to drain. Provide deep seal trap on drain.

.7 Compressors: vibration isolated direct drive hermetic compressors and sound

muffing. .8 Heat exchanger and burners: gas fired, drum and tube section constructed of

corrosion resistant steel components. Gas burners shall be of the in-shot type with induced draft fan and direct spark ignition system.

.9 Operating controls shall include high and low pressure controls, anti-cycle timers,

motor overload protection, contactors, relays and 24 volt control circuit. .10 Air filters: throwaway 50 mm thick glass fibre media with adhesive enclosed in

permanent metal filter frames. Air filters shall meet ANSI/NFPA 90A air filter requirements type Class I.

.11 Integrated type economizer capable of simultaneous economizer and compressor

operation. Shall be equipped with outside, return, relief air dampers and all hardware and controls to introduce up to 100% outside air for free cooling.

.12 Standard roof curb for downflow discharge mounting.

.13 Thermostat shall be electronic programmable with 5-2day programming, with

Heat-Off-Cool-Auto mode, fan selection On-Auto control, and night setback.

.14 For acceptable standard, performance data and accessories, refer to equipment schedule on drawings. Lennox has been specified.




3.0 EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL

.1 Do work in accordance with ANSI/NFPA 90A, ANSI/NFPA 90B and SMACNA. .2 Install material and equipment in accordance with referenced standards and

manufacturer's written instructions.

.3 All control dampers, actuators, thermostats, sensors and other control devices to be mounted in ductwork or air systems equipment, to be supplied by controls contractor and shall be installed by sheet metal contractor.

3.2 RIGID DUCTWORK LOW PRESSURE .1 Do work in accordance with ANSI/NFPA 90A, ANSI/NFPA 90B, ASHRAE and

SMACNA and as indicated. .2 Do not break continuity of insulation vapour barrier with hangers or rods. Insulate

strap hangers 100 mm beyond insulated duct. .3 Support risers in accordance with SMACNA. .4 For all supply and return ducts located in spaces not used as a return air plenum,

transverse joints and connections shall be sealed, longitudinal seams shall be unsealed.

.5 For all exhaust ductwork transverse joints and connections shall be sealed,

longitudinal seams shall be unsealed.

.6 Duct installed exterior to building and exposed shall be watertight. .7 For black steel angle supports and hanger rods, apply at least one coat of corrosion

resistant primer paint. .8 Apply sealant to outside of seams, joints and connections, to manufacturer's

recommendations. .9 Provide retaining ring at all penetrations of vapour barrier and air seals. .10 Secure vapour barrier to structure with retaining ring and caulk in place.

3.3 HANGERS

.1 Strap hangers: install in accordance with SMACNA.

.2 Angle hangers: complete with locking nuts and washers.

.3 Hanger spacing: in accordance with SMACNA.




3.4 SEALING

.1 Apply sealant to outside of joint to manufacturer's recommendations.

3.5 BALANCING DAMPERS

.1 Install where indicated.

.2 Install in accordance with recommendations of SMACNA and manufacturer's instructions.

.3 For supply main duct, locate balancing dampers in each branch duct.

.4 Runouts to registers and diffusers: install single blade damper located as close as

possible to main ducts.

.5 All dampers to be vibration free.

3.6 ACCESS DOORS IN DUCTS

.1 Size shall be suitable for servicing and hand entry.

.2 Locate at fire dampers and at devices requiring maintenance.

3.7 FLEXIBLE DUCTWORK

.1 Install in accordance with SMACNA.

.2 Maximum length of flexible duct: 1500 mm. .3 Support flexible ducts at 1200 mm centres. Do not lay ducts across any lighting

fixtures or hot surfaces. .4 Make connections between flexible duct and terminal devices, seal with duct sealant.

3.8 GRILLES, REGISTERS AND DIFFUSERS

.1 Install in accordance with manufacturers instructions.

.2 Install with cadmium plated screws in countersunk holes where fastenings are visible.

3.9 ACOUSTIC DUCT LINING

.1 General .1 Do work in accordance with recommendations of SMACNA duct liner

standards as indicated in SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible, except as specified otherwise.

.2 Line inside of ducts where indicated on drawings and as specified.

.3 For ducts to be lined with acoustic insulation, the duct size dimensions indicated on the drawings, is the internal dimension of the of the assembled duct with acoustic liner.




.2 Duct liner

.1 Install in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and as follows: .1 Fasten to interior sheet metal surface with 100% coverage of adhesive. .2 In addition to adhesive, install weld pins not less than 2 rows per surface

and not more than 400 mm on centres. .3 Joints

.1 Seal all butt joints, exposed edges, weld pin and clip penetrations and all damaged areas of liner with joint tape and sealer. Install joint tape in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations, and as follows: .1 Bed tape in sealer. .2 Apply 2 coats of sealer over tape.

.2 Replace badly damaged areas of liner at discretion of Engineer.

.3 Protect leading and trailing edges of each duct section with sheet metal nosing

having 25 mm overlap and fastened to duct.

3.10 EXHAUST FANS

.1 Install fans where indicated, to manufacturer’s instructions and complete with accessories.

3.11 PACKAGED ROOFTOP HVAC UNIT .1 Coordinate roofcurb location with all other trades. .2 Install level on roof curb. .3 Where unit does not have a built-in trap, provide external p-trap with drain-off for

condensate drain.

.4 Install 100 mm thick batt insulation under HVAC unit on roof deck.

.5 Space between ducts and at roof penetration, pack with insulation and seal all joints and voids.

End of Section

Controls & Instrumentation



PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE OF WORK

A. The Building Automation System (BAS) manufacturer shall furnish and install a fully integrated building automation system, incorporating direct digital control (DDC) for energy management, equipment monitoring and control. The existing Mary McCormick Recreation Centre is presently controlled by two existing systems. The old system is provided by Optimira Controls (year of 2002), and the new one is provided by Direct Energy (year of 2012). There are some connections between these two system. The intent is that the existing systems be fully upgraded to one new system.

B. The installation of the control system shall be performed under the direct

supervision of the controls manufacturer with the shop drawings, flow diagrams, bill of materials, component designation or identification number and sequence of operation all bearing the name of the manufacturer. The installing manufacturer shall certify in writing, that the shop drawings have been prepared by the equipment manufacturer and that the equipment manufacturer has supervised their installation. In addition, the equipment manufacturer shall certify, in writing, that the shop drawings were prepared by their company and that all temperature control equipment was installed under their direct supervision.

C. All materials and equipment used shall be standard components, regularly

manufactured for this and/or other systems and not custom designed specially for this project. All systems and components shall have been thoroughly tested and proven in actual use for at least two years.

C. BAS manufacturer shall be responsible for all BAS and Temperature Control

wiring for a complete and operable system. All wiring shall be done in accordance with all local and national codes.

D. All components of the new BAS system to be in accordance with the City of Toronto Standard Building Automation System (BAS) Specification, dated September 2018

1. 2 WORK BY OTHERS

A. Mechanical contractor installs all wells, valves, taps, dampers, flow stations, etc. furnished by BAS manufacturer.

B. Electrical Contractor provides:

1. 120V power to all BAS an/or Temperature control panels 2. Wiring of all power feeds through all disconnect starters to electrical motor. 3. Wiring of any remote start/stop switches and manual or automatic motor speed control devices not furnished by BAS manufacturer 4. Wiring of any electrical sub-metering devices furnished by BAS manufacturer.




C. Products furnished but not installed under this section 1. Hydronic Piping:

a. Control Valves b. Flow Switches c. Temperature Sensor Wells and Sockets

1.3 RELATED WORK

A. Division 01000 General and Special Conditions B. Division 15000 Mechanical C. Division 16000 Electrical


A. The BAS system shall be designed and installed, commissioned and serviced by

manufacturer employed, factory trained personnel. Manufacturer shall have an in-place support facility within 50 km of the site with technical staff, spare parts inventory and necessary test and diagnostic equipment. Distributors or licensed installing contractors are not acceptable.

The manufacturer shall provide full time, on site, experienced project manager for this work, responsible for direct supervision of the design, installation, start up and commissioning of the BAS

The Bidder shall be regularly engaged in the manufacturing, installation and maintenance of BAS systems and shall have a minimum of ten (10) years of demonstrated technical expertise and experience in the manufacture, installation and maintenance of BAS systems similar in size and complexity to this project. A maintained service organization consisting of at least ten (10) competent servicemen for a period of not less than ten years and provide a list of 10 projects, similar in size and scope to this project, completed within the last five years.

B. Materials and equipment shall be the catalogued products of manufacturers

regularly engaged in production and installation of automatic temperature control systems and shall be manufacturer's latest standard design that complies with the specification requirements.

C. All BAS peer-to-peer network controllers, central system controllers and local

user displays shall be UL Listed under Standard UL 916, category PAZX; Standard ULC C100, category UUKL7; and under Standard UL 864, categories UUKL, UDTZ, and QVAX. and be so listed at the time of bid. All floor level controllers shall comply, at a minimum, with UL Standard UL 91 6category PAZX; Standard UL 864, categories UDTZ, and QVAX. and be so listed at the time of Bid.

D. Provide electric and electronic equipment that is CSA or Ontario Hydro approved

where the regulatory authorities require such approvals.

E. The manufacturer of the building automation system shall provide documentation supporting compliance with ISO-9002 (Model for Quality Assurance in Production, Installation, and Servicing) and ISO-140001 (The application of well-accepted business management principles to the environment). The intent of this




specification requirement is to ensure that the products from the manufacturer are delivered through a Quality System and Framework that will assure consistency in the products delivered for this project.

F. This system shall have a documented history of compatibility by design for a

minimum of 15 years. Future compatibility shall be supported for no less than 10 years. Compatibility shall be defined as the ability to upgrade existing field panels to current level of technology, and extend new field panels on a previously installed network.

Compatibility shall be defined as the ability for any existing field panel microprocessor to be connected and directly communicate with new field panels without bridges, routers or protocol converters.

G. The building automation system (BAS) shall conform to the following standard for

Year 2000 Compliance:

1. The system shall not produce errors when processing date data (including calculating, sorting or displaying) from, into and between the years 1999 and 2000 and leap year calculations in the year 2000, to the extent that date information provided from other systems, is accurate.

2. The BAS supplier shall provide documentation to support the individual device(s) Year 2000 Compliance. This document shall include a listing of compliance by device and any exceptions to the above definition.

1. 5 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit 10 complete sets of documentation in the following phased delivery schedule:

1. Valve and damper schedules 2. Equipment data cut sheets 3. System schematics, including:

• Sequence of operations

• Point names

• Point addresses

• Interface wiring diagrams

• Panel layouts

• System riser diagrams 4. Auto-CAD compatible as-built drawings

B. Upon project completion, submit operation and maintenance manuals, consisting

of the following:

• Index sheet, listing contents in alphabetical order

• Manufacturer's equipment parts list of all functional components of the system

• Auto-CAD disk of system schematics, including wiring diagrams

• Description of sequence of operations

• As-Built interconnection wiring diagrams

• Operator's Manual

• Trunk cable schematic showing remote electronic panel locations and all trunk data




• List of connected data points, including panels to which they are

connected and input device (ionization detector, sensors, etc.)

• Conduit routing diagrams 1.6 WARRANTY

A. Provide all services, materials and equipment necessary for the successful operation of the entire BAS system for a period of two years after beneficial use (i.e. date of certificate of substantial performance).

B. The adjustment, required testing, and repair of the system includes all computer

equipment, transmission equipment and all sensors and control devices.

C. The on-line support services shall allow the local BAS subcontractor to dial out over telephone lines to monitor and control the facility's building automation system. This remote connection to the facility shall be within 2 hours of the time that the problem is reported. This coverage shall be extended to include normal business hours, after business hours, weekends and holidays.

If the problem cannot be resolved on-line by the local office, the national office of the building automation system manufacturer shall have the same capabilities for remote connection to the facility. If the problem cannot be resolved with on-line support services, the BAS manufacturer shall dispatch the appropriate personnel to the job site to resolve the problem within 3 hours of the time that the problem is reported.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Siemens Building Technologies OR approved equal 2.2 NETWORKING COMMUNICATIONS

A. The design of the BAS shall network operator workstations and stand-alone DDC Controllers. The network architecture shall consist of multiple levels for communication efficiency and DDC Controller floor level local area networks with access being totally transparent to the user when accessing data or developing control programs.

B. The design of BAS shall allow the co-existence of new DDC Controllers with existing

DDC Controllers in the same network without the use of gateways or protocol converters.

C. Peer-to-Peer Building Level Network:

1. All operator devices either network resident or connected via dial-up modems shall have the ability to access all point status and application report data or execute control functions for any and all other devices via the peer-to-peer network. No hardware or software limits shall be imposed on the number of devices with global access to the network data at any time.




2. The peer-to-peer network shall support a minimum of 100 DDC controllers

and PC workstations

3. Each PC workstation shall support a minimum of 4 peer-to-peer networks hardwired or dial up.

4. The system shall support integration of third party systems (fire alarm,

security, lighting, PCL, chiller, boiler) via panel mounted open protocol processor. This processor shall exchange data between the two systems for interprocess control. All exchange points shall have full system functionality as specified herein for hardwired points.

5. The peer-to-peer Building Level Network shall connect to the existing Apogee

BLN. 2.3 DDC & HVAC MECHANlCAL EQUIPMENT CONTROLLERS

A. The DDC & HVAC Mechanical Equipment Controllers shall reside on the Building Level Network.

B. DDC & HVAC Mechanical Equipment Controllers shall use the same

programming language and tools. DDC & HVAC Mechanical Equipment Controllers which require different programming language or tools on a network are not acceptable.

C. The existing controllers at this site shall have their firmware upgraded to the most

recent version to enhance their functionality.

2.4 DDC & HVAC MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT CONTROLLER RESIDENT SOFTWARE

FEATURES

A. General:

1. The software programs specified in this Section shall be provided as an integral part of DDC and HVAC Mechanical Equipment Controllers and shall not be dependent upon any higher level computer for execution.

2. All points shall be identified by up to 30 character point name and 16 character point descriptor. The same names shall be used at the PC workstation.

3. All digital points shall have user defined two-state status indication (descriptors with minimum of 8 characters allowed per state (i.e. summer/winter)).

B. Control Software Description:

1. The DDC and HVAC Mechanical Equipment Controllers shall have the ability to perform the following pre-tested control algorithms:




a. Two-position control

b. Proportional control c. Proportional plus integral control d. Proportional, integral, plus derivative control

e. Automatic tuning of control loops

C. DDC and HVAC Mechanical Equipment Controllers shall provide the following energy management routines for the purpose of optimizing energy consumption while maintaining occupant comfort.

1. Start-Stop Time Optimization (SSTO) shall automatically be coordinated

with event scheduling. The SSTO program shall start HVAC equipment at the latest possible time that will allow the equipment to achieve the desired zone condition by time of occupancy. The SSTO program shall also shut down HVAC equipment at the earliest possible time before the end of the occupancy period, and still maintain desired comfort conditions. a) The SSTO program shall operate in both the heating and cooling

seasons. 1) It shall be possible to apply the SSTO program to

individual fan systems. 2) The SSTO program shall operate on both outside

weather conditions as well as inside zone conditions and empirical factors.

b) The SSTO program shall meet the local code requirements for

minimum outside air while the building is occupied.

2. Event Scheduling: Provide a comprehensive menu driven program to automatically start and stop designated points or groups of points according to a stored time.

a) It shall be possible to individually command a point or group of

points.

b) For points assigned to one common load group, it shall be possible to assign variable time delays between each successive start or stop within that group.

c) The operator shall be able to define the following information:

1. Time, day 2. Commands such as on, off, auto, and so forth. 3. Time delays between successive commands. 4. There shall be provisions for manual overriding of each

schedule by an appropriate operator.

d) It shall be possible to schedule events up to one year in advance.




1. Scheduling shall be calendar based. 2. Holidays shall allow for different schedules.

3. Enthalpy switchover (economizer). The Energy Management Control

Software (EMCS) will control the position of the air handler relief, return, and outside air dampers. If the outside air dry bulb temperature falls below changeover set point the EMCS will modulate the dampers to provide 100 percent outside air. The user will be able to quickly changeover to an economizer system based on dry bulb temperature and will be able to override the economizer cycle and return to minimum outside air operation at any time.

4. Temperature-compensated duty cycling.

a) The DCCP (Duty Cycle Control Program) shall periodically stop

and start loads according to various patterns.

b) The loads shall be cycled such that there is a net reduction in both the electrical demands and the energy consumed.

5. Automatic Daylight Savings Time Switchover: The system shall provide

automatic time adjustment for switching to/from Daylight Savings Time. 6. Night setback control: The system shall provide the ability to

automatically adjust setpoints for night control. 7. The Peak Demand Limiting (PDL) program shall limit the consumption of

electricity to prevent electrical peak demand charges.

a) PDL shall continuously track the amount of electricity being consumed, by monitoring one or more electrical kilowatt-hour/demand meters. These meters may measure the electrical consumption (kWh), electrical demand (kW), or both.

b) PDL shall sample the meter data to continuously forecast the

demand likely to be used during successive time intervals. c) If the PDL forecasted demand indicates that electricity usage is

likely to exceed a user preset maximum allowable level, then PDL shall automatically shed electrical loads.

d) Once the demand peak has passed, loads that have been shed

shall be restored and returned to normal control.

D. DDC and HVAC Mechanical Equipment Controllers shall be able to execute

custom, job-specific processes defined by the user, to automatically perform calculations and special control routines.

1. A single process shall be able to incorporate measured or calculated data

from any and all other DDC and HVAC Mechanical Equipment Controllers on the network. In addition, a single process shall be able to issue commands to points in any and all other DDC and HVAC Mechanical Equipment Controllers on the network. Database shall




support 30 character, English language point names, structured for searching and logs.

2. Processes shall be able to generate operator messages and advisories

to operator I/O devices. A process shall be able to directly send a message to a specified device or cause the execution of a dial-up connection to a remote device such as a printer or pager.

3. DDC and HVAC Mechanical Equipment Controller shall provide a HELP

function key, providing enhanced context sensitive on-line help with task orientated information from the user manual.

4. DDC and HVAC Mechanical Equipment Controller shall be capable of

comment lines for sequence of operation explanation.

E. Alarm management shall be provided to monitor and direct alarm information to

operator devices. Each DDC and HVAC Mechanical Equipment Controller shall perform distributed, independent alarm analysis and filtering to minimize operator interruptions due to non-critical alarms, minimize network traffic and prevent alarms from being lost. At no time shall the DDC and HVAC Mechanical Equipment Controllers ability to report alarms be affected by either operator or activity at a PC workstation, local I/O device or communications with other panels on the network.

1. All alarm or point change reports shall include the point's English

language description and the time and date of occurrence.

2. The user shall be able to define the specific system reaction for each point. Alarms shall be prioritized to minimize nuisance reporting and to speed operator response to critical alarms. A minimum of six priority levels shall be provided for each point. Point priority levels shall be combined with user definable destination categories (PC, printer, DDC Controller, etc.) to provide full flexibility in defining the handling of system alarms. Each DDC and HVAC Mechanical Equipment Controller shall automatically inhibit the reporting of selected alarms during system shutdown and start-up. Users shall have the ability to manually inhibit alarm reporting for each point.

3. Alarm reports and messages will be directed to a user-defined list of

operator devices or PCs based on time (after hours destinations) or based on priority.

4. In addition to the point's descriptor and the time and date, the user shall

be able to print, display or store a 200 character alarm message to more fully describe the alarm condition or direct operator response.

5. In dial-up applications, operator-selected alarms shall initiate a call to a

remote operator device.

F. A variety of historical data collection utilities shall be provided to manually or

automatically sample, store and display system data for points as specified in the I/O summary. The entire collection process shall be automated so that the data collection definition, amount of data to be collected, collection report and




scheduling take the form a wizard, or online assist utility, in order to complete this process within a short amount of time for a large group of points. Ability to produce a summary of changes in a log file.

1. Any point, physical or calculated may be designated for trending. Any

point, regardless of physical location in the network, may be collected and stored in each DDC and HVAC Mechanical Equipment Controllers point group. Two methods of collection shall be allowed: either by a pre-defined time interval or upon a pre-defined change of value. Sample intervals of 1 minute to 7 days shall be provided. Each DDC and HVAC Mechanical Equipment Controller shall have a dedicated RAM-based buffer for trend data and shall be capable of storing data samples. All trend data shall be available for transfer to a Workstation without manual intervention.

a. Time-interval based trending shall have the capability of

synchronizing the trend sampling of discrete points. This allows for the comparison of values of several different points at the same moment in time.

b. Trended points shall have the option of sampling data values based on the condition of a “trigger” point. (i.e., conditional trending). Options for sampling shall include: always sampling as defined, only sampling when the trended point is in the alarm condition, or not sampling.

2. DDC and HVAC Mechanical Equipment Controllers shall also provide high resolution sampling capability for verification of control loop performance. Operator-initiated automatic and manual loop tuning algorithms shall be provided for operator-selected PID control loops as identified in the point I/O summary.

a. Loop tuning shall be capable of being initiated either locally at the

DDC and HVAC Mechanical Equipment Controller, from a network workstation or remotely using dial-in modems. For all loop tuning functions, access shall be limited to authorized personnel through password protection.

G. DDC and HVAC Mechanical Equipment Controllers shall be capable of

automatically accumulating and storing run-time hours for digital input and output points and automatically sample, calculate and store consumption totals for analog and digital pulse input type points, as specified in the point I/O schedule.

H. The peer to peer network shall allow the DDC and HVAC Mechanical Equipment

Controllers to access any data from or send control commands and alarm reports directly to any other DDC and HVAC Mechanical Equipment Controller or combination of controllers on the network without dependence upon a central or intermediate processing device. DDC and HVAC Mechanical Equipment Controllers shall send alarm reports to multiple workstations without dependence upon a central or intermediate processing device. The peer to peer network shall also allow any DDC and HVAC Mechanical Equipment Controller to access, edit, modify, add, delete, back up, and restore all system point database and all programs.




I. The peer-to-peer network shall allow the DDC and HVAC Mechanical Equipment

Controllers to assign a minimum of 50 passwords access and control priorities to each operator individually. The logon password (at any PC workstation or portable operator terminal) shall enable the operator to monitor, adjust and control the points that the operator is authorized for. All other points shall not be displayed on the PC workstation or portable terminal (e.g. all base building and all tenant points shall be accessible to any base building operators, but only tenant points shall be accessible to tenant building operators). Passwords and priorities for every point shall be fully programmable and adjustable.

1. Passwords shall have the option to be configured to expire within a

selected timeframe (1-365 days). a. Configuring the password expiration shall also enable the

functionality to lock-out a user account after three failed log-on attempts.

2.5 FLOOR LEVEL NETWORK APPLICATION SPECIFIC CONTROLLERS (ASC)

A. Each DDC Controller shall be able to extend its performance and capacity through the use of remote application specific controllers (ASCs) through Floor Level LAN Device Networks.

B. Each ASC shall operate as a stand-alone controller capable of performing its

specified control responsibilities independently of other controllers in the network. Each ASC shall be a microprocessor-based, multi-tasking, real-time digital control processor. Provide the following types of ASCs as a minimum:

1. Central System Controllers

2. Terminal Equipment Controllers

Each ASC shall be capable of control of the terminal device independent of the manufacturer of the terminal device.

C. Terminal Equipment Controllers:

1. Provide for control of each piece of equipment, including, but not limited to, the following:

a. Existing Pneumatic Variable Air Volume (VAV) boxes:

The existing pneumatic volume regulators, actuators and thermostats will be removed and replaced with new DDC controllers with built-in electric actuators. Existing reheat and radiation control valves will be retrofitted with new electric actuators and will be wired to the new Terminal Equipment Controllers associated with their respective zones.

b. New Variable Air Volume (VAV) boxes:

New VAV boxes will be provided with new DDC controllers with built-in electric actuators. New reheat and radiation control valves will be complete with new electric actuators and will be




wired to the new Terminal Equipment Controllers associated with their respective zones.

2. Controllers shall include all point inputs and outputs necessary to perform the specified control sequences. Analog outputs shall be industry standard signals such as 24V floating control, 3-15 psi pneumatic, 0-10v, allowing for interface to a variety of modulating actuators.

3. Space Temperature Sensors. Each controller performing space temperature control shall be provided with a matching room temperature sensor.

4. Wired Sensor specifications. The sensor may be either RTD or thermistor type providing the following.

5. Accuracy: + .5 F

6. Operating Range: 35 to 115 F

7. Set Point Adjustment Range: 55 to 95 F

8. Calibration Adjustments: None required

9. Installation: Up to 100 ft. from controller

10. Auxiliary Communications Port: as required

11. Local LCD Temperature Display: as required

12. Set Point Adjustment Dial as required

13. Occupancy Override Switch as required

14. Set Point Modes:

15. Independent Heating, Cooling

16. Night Setback-Heating

17. Night Setback-Cooling

18. Auxiliary Communication Port. Each room temperature sensor shall include a terminal jack integral to the sensor assembly. The terminal jack shall be used to connect a portable operator's terminal to control and monitor all hardware and software points associated with the controller. RS-232 communications port shall allow the operator to query and modify operating parameters of the local room terminal unit from the portable operator’s terminal.

2.6 PERSONAL COMPUTER OPERATOR WORKSTATION HARDWARE




A. The existing personal computer operator workstation is presently utilized for

command entry, information management, system monitor, alarm management and database management functions. All real-time control functions are resident in the DDC Controllers to facilitate greater distribution, fault tolerance and reliability of the building automation control.

B. The existing PC workstation is in need of replacement and shall be replaced with the following: Server hardware:

1. The Server hardware shall be equipped as follows.

a. Locate server in the same room as the existing PC workstation. b. Provide a minimum 4GB RAM, with two SCSI hard drives of 300

GB available space each at 10,000 rpm minimum, with a RAID controller, a video card with 64 MB RAM capable of supporting a minimum of 1280 × 1024 resolution with a minimum of 32 Bit color, DVD+/-RW+BD-ROM Dual Optical Drives, mouse and 101-key enhanced keyboard. Server shall be a Windows 2003 or comparable operating system, and shall include a minimum dual-core 3.0 GHz Pentium D processor.

c. Provide a monitor of flat panel type and shall support a minimum

display resolution of no less than 1280 × 1024 pixels. The display shall have a minimum of 19” visible area in diagonal measurement. Separate controls shall be provided for color, contrasts and brightness. The screen shall be non-reflective.

d. Provide a printer at server location for recording alarms, operator transactions and systems reports.

e. Alarm Display shall list the alarms with highest priority at the top

of the display. The alarm display shall provide selector buttons for display of the associated point graphic and message. The alarm display shall provide a mechanism for the operator to sort alarms.

2.7 PERSONAL COMPUTER OPERATOR WORKSTATION SOFTWARE

A. Operator Interface Software:

1. Basic Interface Description

a. Operator interface software shall minimize operator training through the use of user-friendly and interactive graphical applications, 30-character English language point identification, on-line help, and industry standard Windows application software. Interface software shall simultaneously communicate with and share data between Ethernet-connected building level networks.




b. Provide a graphical user interface that shall minimize the use of

keyboard through the use of a mouse or similar pointing device, with a "point and click" approach to menu selection and a “drag and drop” approach to inter-application navigation.

c. The navigation shall be user friendly by utilizing “forward & back”

capability between screens and embedded hyperlinks to open graphics, documents, drawings, etc.

d. Selection of applications within the operator interface software

shall be via a graphical toolbar menu – the application toolbar menu shall have the option to be located in a docked position on any of the four sides of the visible desktop space on the workstation display monitor, and the option to automatically hide itself from the visible monitor workspace when not being actively manipulated by the user.

e. The software shall provide a multi-tasking type environment that

allows the user to run several applications simultaneously. BMS software shall run on a Windows XP, 2000, or comparable 32 bit operating system. System database parameters shall be stored within an object-oriented database. Standard Windows applications shall run simultaneously with the BMS software. The mouse or Alt-Tab keys shall be used to quickly select and switch between multiple applications. The operator shall be able to work in Microsoft Word, Excel, and other Windows based software packages, while concurrently annunciating on-line BMS alarms and monitoring information

f. The software shall provide, as a minimum, the following functionality:

1) Real-time graphical viewing and control of the BMS

environment 2) Reporting 3) Scheduling and override of building operations 4) Collection and analysis of historical data 5) Point database editing, storage and downloading of

controller databases. 6) Utility for combining points into logical Point Groups. The

Point Groups shall then be manipulated in Graphics, trend graphs and reports in order to streamline the navigation and usability of the system.

7) Alarm reporting, routing, messaging, and

acknowledgment 8) “Collapsible tree,” dynamic system architecture diagram

application:




a) Showing the real-time status and definition

details of all workstations and devices on a management level network

b) Showing the real-time status and definition

details of all Building Controllers at the Primary Network.

c) Showing the definition details of all application

specific controllers

9) Definition and construction of dynamic color graphic displays.

10) Online, context-sensitive help, including an index,

glossary of terms, and the capability to search help via keyword or phrase.

11) On-screen access to User Documentation, via online

help or PDF-format electronic file. 12) Automatic database backup at the operator interface for

database changes initiated at Building Controllers. 13) Display dynamic trend data graphical plot.

a) Must be able to run multiple plots simultaneously b) Each plot must be capable of supporting 10

pts/plot minimum c) Must be able to command points directly off

dynamic trend plot application. d) Must be able to plot both real-time and historical

trend data

14) Program editing 15) Transfer trend data to 3rd party spreadsheet software

a) Scheduling reports b) Operator Activity Log c) Open communications via BACnet Client &

Server

g. Enhanced Functionality:

1) Provide functionality such that any of the following may be performed simultaneously on-line, and in any combination, via adjustable user-sized windows. Operator shall be able to drag and drop information between the following applications, reducing the number




of steps to perform a desired function (e.g., Click on a point on the alarm screen and drag it to the dynamic trend graph application to initiate a dynamic trend on the desired point):

a) Dynamic color graphics application b) Alarm management application c) Scheduling application d) Dynamic trend graph data plotter application e) Dynamic system architecture diagram

application f) Control Program and Point database editing

applications g) Reporting applications

2) Report and alarm printing shall be accomplished via

Windows Print Manager, allowing use of network printers.

h. Security: Operator-specific password access protection shall be

provided to allow the administrator/manager to limit users’ workstation control, display and data base manipulation capabilities as deemed appropriate for each user, based upon an assigned password. Operator privileges shall "follow" the operator to any workstation logged onto (up to 999 user accounts shall be supported). The administrator or manager shall be able to grant discrete levels of access and privileges, per user, for each point, graphic, report, schedule, and BMS workstation application. And each BMS workstation user account shall use a Windows Operating System user account as a foundation.

i. The operator interface software shall also include an application

to track the actions of each individual operator, such as alarm acknowledgement, point commanding, schedule overriding, database editing, and logon/logoff. The application shall list each of the actions in a tabular format, and shall have sorting capabilities based on parameters such as ascending or descending time of the action, or name of the object on which the action was performed. The application shall also allow querying based on object name, operator, action, or time range.

j. Dynamic Color Graphics application shall include the following:

1) Must include graphic editing and modifying capabilities 2) A library of standard control application graphics and

symbols must be included




3) Must be able to command points directly off graphics

application 4) Graphic display shall include the ability to depict real-time

point values dynamically with animation, picture/frame control, symbol association, or dynamic informational text-blocks

5) Navigation through various graphic screens shall be

optionally achieved through a hierarchical “tree” structure 6) Graphics viewing shall include zoom capabilities 7) Graphics shall be capable of displaying the status of

points that have been overridden by a field HAND switch, for points that have been designed to provide a field HAND override capability.

8) Advanced linking within the Graphics application shall

provide the ability to navigate to outside documents (e.g., .doc, .pdf, .xls, etc.), Internet web addresses, e-mail, external programs, and other workstation applications, directly from the Graphics application window with a mouse-click on a customizable link symbol.

k. Reports shall be generated on demand or via pre-defined

schedule, and directed to CRT displays, printers or file. As a minimum, the system shall allow the user to easily obtain the following types of reports:

1) A general listing of all or selected points in the network 2) List of all points currently in alarm 3) List of all points currently in override status 4) List of all disabled points 5) List of all points currently locked out 6) List of user accounts and access levels 7) List all weekly schedules and events 8) List of holiday programming 9) List of control limits and deadbands 10) Custom reports from 3rd party software 11) System diagnostic reports including, list of Building

panels on line and communicating, status of all Building terminal unit device points

12) List of programs




13) List of point definitions 14) List of logical point groups 15) List of alarm strategy definitions 16) List of Building Control panels 17) Point totalization report 18) Point Trend data listings 19) Initial Values report

20) User activity report

l. Scheduling and override

1) Provide a calendar type format for simplification of time

and date scheduling and overrides of building operations. Schedule definitions reside in the PC workstation and in the Building Controller to ensure time equipment scheduling when PC is off-line, PC is not required to execute time scheduling. Provide override access through menu selection, graphical mouse action or function key. Provide the following capabilities as a minimum:

a) Weekly schedules b) Zone schedules c) Event schedules – an event consists of logical

combinations of equipment and/or zones d) Report schedules e) Ability to schedule for a minimum of up to ten

(10) years in advance.

2) Additionally, the scheduling application shall:

a) Provide filtering capabilities of schedules, based on name, time, frequency, and schedule type (event, zone, report)

b) Provide sorting capabilities of schedules, based

on name, time and type of schedule (zone, event, report)




c) Provide searching capabilities of schedules

based on name – with wildcarding options

m. Collection and Analysis of Historical Data

1) Provide trending capabilities that allow the user to easily monitor and preserve records of system activity over an extended period of time. Any system point may be trended automatically at time-based intervals (up to four time-based definitions per point) or change of value, both of which shall be user-definable. Trend data shall be collected stored on hard disk for future diagnostics and reporting. Automatic Trend collection may be scheduled at regular intervals through the same scheduling interface as used for scheduling of zones, events, and reports. Additionally, trend data may be archived to network drives or removable disk media for future retrieval.

2) Trend data reports shall be provided to allow the user to

view all trended point data. Reports may be customized to include individual points or predefined groups of selected points. Provide additional functionality to allow predefined groups of up to 250 trended points to be easily transferred on-line to Microsoft Excel. BMS contractor shall provide custom designed spreadsheet reports for use by the owner to track energy usage and cost, equipment run times, equipment efficiency, and/or building environmental conditions. BMS contractor shall provide setup of custom reports including creation of data format templates for monthly or weekly reports.

3) Provide additional functionality that allows the user to

view real-time trend data on trend graphical plot displays. A minimum of ten points may be plotted, of either real-time or historical data. The dynamic graphs shall continuously update point values. At any time the user may redefine sampling times or range scales for any point. In addition, the user may pause the display and take "snapshots" of plot screens to be stored on the workstation disk for future recall and analysis. Exact point values may be viewed and the graphs may be printed. A minimum of ten (10) dynamic graphs shall run simultaneously. Operator shall be able to command points directly on the trend plot by double clicking on the point. Operator shall be able to zoom in on a specific time range within a plot. The dynamic trend plotting application shall support the following types of graphs, with option to graph in 3D: line graph, area graph, curve graph, area-curve graph, step graph, and scatter graph. Each graph may be customized by the user, for graph type, graph text, titles, line styles and weight, colors, and configurable x- and y-axes.

n. Dynamic Color Graphic Displays




1) Capability to create color graphic floor plan displays and system schematics for each piece of mechanical equipment, including, but not limited to, air handling units, chilled water systems, hot water boiler systems, and room level terminal units.

2) The operator interface shall allow users to access the

various system schematics and floor plans via a graphical penetration scheme, menu selection, point alarm association, or text-based commands. Graphics software shall permit the importing of Autocad or scanned pictures for use in the system.

3) Dynamic temperature values, humidity values, flow

values and status indication shall be shown in their actual respective locations within the system schematics or graphic floor plan displays, and shall automatically update to represent current conditions without operator intervention and without pre-defined screen refresh rates.

a) Provide the user the ability to display real-time

point values by animated motion or custom picture control visual representation. Animation shall depict movement of mechanical equipment, or air or fluid flow. Picture Control shall depict various positions in relation to assigned point values or ranges. A library (set) of animation and picture control symbols shall be included within the operator interface software’s graphics application. Animation shall reflect, ON or OFF conditions, and shall also be optionally configurable for up to five rates of animation speed.

b) Sizable analog bars shall be available for

monitor and control of analog values; high and low alarm limit settings shall be displayed on the analog scale. The user shall be able to "click and drag" the pointer to change the setpoint.

c) Provide the user the ability to display blocks of

point data by defined point groups; alarm conditions shall be displayed by flashing point blocks.

d) Equipment state or values can be changed by

clicking on the associated point block or graphic symbol and selecting the new state (on/off) or setpoint.

e) State text for digital points can be user-defined

up to eight characters.




4) Colors shall be used to indicate status and change as

the status of the equipment changes. The state colors shall be user definable.

5) Advanced linking within the Graphics application shall

provide the ability to navigate to outside documents (e.g., .doc, .pdf, .xls, etc.), Internet web addresses, e-mail, external programs, and other workstation applications, directly from the Graphics application window with a mouse-click on a customizable link symbol.

6) The Windows environment of the PC operator

workstation shall allow the user to simultaneously view several applications at a time to analyze total building operation or to allow the display of a graphic associated with an alarm to be viewed without interrupting work in progress.

7) Off the shelf graphic software shall be provided to allow

the user to add, modify or delete system graphic background displays.

8) A clipart library of HVAC application and automation

symbols shall be provided including fans, valves, motors, chillers, AHU systems, standard ductwork diagrams and laboratory symbols. The user shall have the ability to add custom symbols to the clipart library. The clipart library shall include a minimum of 400 application symbols. In addition, a library consisting of a minimum of 700 graphic background templates shall be provided.

9) The Graphics application shall include a set of standard

Terminal Equipment controller application-specific background graphic templates. Templates shall provide the automatic display of a selected Terminal Equipment controller’s control values and parameters, without the need to create separate and individual graphic files for each controller.

o. System Configuration & Definition

1) A “Collapsible tree,” dynamic system architecture

diagram/display application of the site-specific BMS architecture showing status of controllers, PC workstations and networks shall be provided. This application shall include the ability to add and configure workstations, Building Controllers, as well as 3rd-party integrated components. Symbols/Icons representing the system architecture components shall be user-configurable and customizable, and a library of customized icons representing 3rd-party integration solutions shall be included. This application shall also include the functionality for real-time display, configuration and diagnostics connections to Building Controllers.




2) Network wide control strategies shall not be restricted to

a single Building Controller, but shall be able to include data from any and all other network panels to allow the development of Global control strategies.

3) Provide automatic backup and restore of all Building

controller databases on the workstation hard disk. In addition, all database changes shall be performed while the workstation is on-line without disrupting other system operations. Changes shall be automatically recorded and downloaded to the appropriate Building Controller. Changes made at the user-interface of Building Controllers shall be automatically uploaded to the workstation, ensuring system continuity.

4) System configuration, programming, editing, graphics

generation shall be performed on-line.

5) Point database configuration shall be available to the user within a dedicated point database editor application included in the operator interface software. The editor shall allow the user to create, view existing, modify, copy, and delete points from the database.

6) The point editor shall have the capability to assign

“informational text” to points as necessary to provide critical information about the equipment.

7) The point editor shall also allow the user to configure the

alarm management strategy for each point. The editor shall provide the option for editing the point database in an online or offline mode with the Building Controllers.

8) The operator interface software shall also provide the

capability to perform bulk modification of point definition attributes to a single or multiple user-selected points. This function shall allow the user to choose the properties to copy from a selected point to another point or set of points. The selectable attributes shall include, but are not limited to, Alarm management definitions and Trend definitions.

9) Control program configuration shall be available to the

user within a dedicated control program editor application included in the operator interface software. The editor shall allow for creation, modification and deletion of control programs. The editor shall include a programming assistance feature that interactively guides the user through parameters required to generate a control program. The editor shall also include the ability to automatically compile the program to ensure its compatibility with the Building Controllers. The editor shall provide the option for editing the control programs in an online or offline mode, and also the ability to




selectively enable or disable the live program execution within the Building Controllers.

p. Alarm Management

1) Alarm Routing shall allow the user to send alarm notification to selected printers or workstation location(s) based on time of day, alarm severity, or point type.

2) Alarm Notification shall be presented to each workstation

in a tabular format application, and shall include the following information for each alarm point: name, value, alarm time & date, alarm status, priority, acknowledgement information, and alarm count. Each alarm point or priority shall have the ability to sound a discrete audible notification.

3) Alarm Display shall have the ability to list & sort the

alarms based on alarm status, point name, ascending or descending alarm time.

4) Directly from the Alarm Display, the user shall have the

ability to acknowledge, silence the alarm sound, print, or erase each alarm. The interface shall also have the option to inhibit the erasing of active acknowledged alarms, until they have returned to normal status. The user shall also have the ability to command, launch an associated graphic or trended graphical plot, or run a report on a selected alarm point directly on the Alarm Display.

5) Each alarm point shall have a direct link from the Alarm

Display to further user-defined point informational data. The user shall have the ability to also associate real-time electronic annotations or notes to each alarm.

6) Alarm messages shall be customizable for each point, or

each alarm priority level, to display detailed instructions to the user regarding actions to take in the event of an alarm. Alarm messages shall also have the optional ability to individually enunciate on the workstation display via a separate pop-up window, automatically being generated as the associated alarm condition occurs. The system shall have the ability to modify the priority text based on operator preference.

7) Alarm Display application shall allow workstation

operators to send and receive real-time messages to each other, for purposes of coordinating Alarm and BMS system management.

2.8 FIELD DEVICES




A. AIR GAUGES

1. Air pressure indicating gauges shall be at least 40mm diameter. Install gauges to show main supply air pressures and branch line pressure to valves and damper motors, except for space thermostats.

B. PRESSURE ELECTRIC SWITCHES 1. Switch shall be SPDT snap acting and rated for 16 amperes at 120V. 2. The pressure range shall be 0 to 130 kPa.

3. The set point shall be adjustable from 20.6 and 130 kPa and the differential adjustable between 13.7 and 41.1 kPa.

4. The pressure switch shall be CSA approved. C. ELECTRIC PNEUMATIC RELAYS

1. Electric pneumatic relays shall have a diaphragm operated SPDT snap acting electrical switch with voltage and current rating suitable for specified electrical control. Provide auxiliary relays as required.

2. Relays shall have a 3 pipe body. Internal operating ports shall be of

corrosion resistant metal.

3. Mount relays adjacent to the motor starter. D. TEMPERATURE SENSORS

1. All supply air sensors and mixed air sensors shall be 1000 OHM

platinum, resistance temperature detector (RTD) type with a twenty-five foot averaging element. Accuracy of the RTD and transmitter shall be ± 0.3°C over a range of -40°C to 116°C.

2. All return air sensors shall be RTD type temperature detectors. The

sensor probe shall have a minimum length of 450mm. The accuracy of the sensor shall be ± 0.3°C over a range of -40°C to 116°C.

3. All space sensors shall be RTD or thermistor type temperature detectors. Sensors shall be provided with vented protective covers, mounted 1500mm from floor level. Space sensors shall be the sensing-only type with no local override, display or adjust features. These sensors shall connect to their respective controllers via a preformed cable with RJ-11 type connectors at each end. The sensor shall also contain an RJ-11 jack for connection of a laptop PC for commissioning purposes.

4. All liquid immersed sensors shall be RTD type temperature detectors.

Each sensor shall be provided with a well, suitable for the working temperature and pressure of the fluid. The accuracy of the sensor shall be ± 0.3 °C over a range of -40°C to 116°C.




5. Outdoor air sensor shall be the RTD type. The RTD shall be mounted in

a weatherproof enclosure. The accuracy of the sensor shall be ± 0.3°C over a range of -40°C to 116°C.

E. STEAM PRESSURE SENSORS 1. Pressure sensors shall be provided for steam pressure applications. The

differential pressure range shall be selected to match the application. Select materials suitable for the measured variable, i.e. water and air, and to withstand a minimum of twice the normal pressure.

2. Each sensor shall be provided with an industry standard 4-20mA

transmitter, mounted at the sensor. The transmitter and sensor shall have a combined accuracy of 0.5% of the differential pressure range. Provide Setra model C-206.

F. PANELS 1. Control panels shall be fully enclosed cabinets. Cabinets shall have

hinged door with locking latch or bolt on cover plate. All cabinet locks shall be common keyed.

2. Panels shall be wall mounted or free standing and shall be as located on

the mechanical drawings. 3. All relays, transducers etc., shall be located within the control panels. 4. Each DDC Controller enclosure shall have a standard duplex AC power

receptacle located within the enclosure to provide power for test equipment, operation communication devices.

G. NAMEPLATES

1. Duct and pipe mounted sensors and panels shall be provided with lamacoid nameplates, clearly identifying the equipment and the zone in which it is controlling. Refer to Division 15 Specifications for detail.

H. AUTOMATIC CONTROL VALVES AND OPERATORS 1. All characteristics of control valves shall be suitable for the required

operation. 2. Straight through water valves shall be single seated with equal

percentage flow characteristics. 3. Three way mixing valves or combined butterfly valves shall be linear for

each port giving constant total flow. 4. All valves shall have stainless steel stems and spring-loaded teflon cone

packing.




5. Valves 2" and smaller shall have screwed 150lbs bronze bodies. Valves

2½" and larger shall have flanged 125lbs. cast iron bodies.

6. Control valves shall be sized based on the following pressure drops:

Valve Application Sizing Pressure Drop 2-way and 3-way modulating type 5 psi (35 kPa) steam (inlet pressure below 15psig) 50% of absolute inlet pressure steam (inlet pressure below 15 psig) inlet gauge pressure (i.e. full pressure

drop) radiation and reheat 2 or 3-way 1 psi (7 kPa) butterfly valves (two position) line size butterfly valves (modulating) 5 psi (35 kPa) at 70 degree sizing angle

Electric valve actuators shall respond to modulating 0-10 vdc control signals and shall spring return to their fail-safe positions upon power failure. Electric actuators for reheat or radiation terminal valves shall accept a 3-wire floating control signal input and may be the fail-in-place type. Retrofit existing pneumatic reheat and radiation control valves associated with office area VAV boxes with new electric actuators as described above.

I. CURRENT SENSING RELAYS

1. Provide solid-state, adjustable, current operated relay. Provide a relay,

which changes switch contact state in response to an adjustable set point value of current in the monitored AC circuit.

2. Adjust the relay switch point so that the relay responds to motor operation under load as an “on” state and so that the relay responds to an unloaded running motor as an “off” state. A motor with a broken belt is considered an unloaded motor.

3. Provide for status device for all fans and pumps.

J. CONTROL AIR PIPING AND TUBING

1. Control piping mains (high pressure) shall be type "M" hard drawn seamless copper with forged copper soldering type fittings and 50% lead/50% tin solder joints.

2. Low-pressure mains and branch tubing may be fire resistant type "FR" plastic

tubing if it meets the local building department regulations.

3. Control tubing in mechanical rooms shall be type "M" copper. FR plastic may be used if installed within aluminum tray with cover or EMT conduit.

PART 3 - EXECUTION




3.1 PROJECT MANAGEMENT

Provide a designated project manager who will be responsible for the following:

Construct and maintain project schedule On-site coordination with all applicable trades, subcontractors, and other integration vendors Authorized to accept and execute orders or instructions from owner/architect Attend project meetings as necessary to avoid conflicts and delays Make necessary field decisions relating to this scope of work Coordination/Single point of contact

3.2 SEQUENCE OF OPERATION Refer to sequences as described on the mechanical plans. 3.3 CONTROLS I/0 POINT SCHEDULE Refer to the control diagrams on the mechanical plans. 3.4 START-UP AND COMMISSIONING

A. When installation of the system is complete, calibrate equipment and verify transmission media operation before the system is placed on-line. All testing, calibrating, adjusting and final field tests shall be completed by the manufacturer. Verify that all systems are operable from local controls in the specified failure mode upon panel failure or loss of power.

B. Provide any recommendation for system modification in writing to owner. Do not

make any system modification, including operating parameters and control settings, without prior approval of owner.

C. After manufacturer has completed system start-up and commissioning. Joint

commissioning of integrated system segments shall be completed.

3.5 ELECTRICAL WIRING AND MATERIALS

A. Install, connect and wire the items included under this Section. This work includes providing required conduit, wire, fittings, and related wiring accessories. Unless indicated otherwise, all wiring shall be installed in conduit. Provide electrical material and installation in accordance with the appropriate sections of the current edition of the applicable local electrical codes. Install wiring in conduit or approved totally enclosed raceways. Do not use cable raceways or troughs. FT6 rated plenum wire may be used without conduit for sensor, 24-volt power and network communications wiring associated with Terminal Equipment Controllers provided that the installation complies with all relevant codes.

B. Provide wiring between thermostats, aquastats and unit heater motors, all control

and alarm wiring for all control and alarm devices for all Sections of Specifications.

C. Provide 120 volt, single phase, 60 hertz emergency power to every BAS DDC Controller panel, HVAC/Mechanical Equipment Controller, PC console, power supply, transformer, annunciator, modems, printers and to other devices as required. It is the intent that the entire building management system except terminal




equipment shall be operative under emergency power conditions in the building. The power supplies are to be extended in conduit and wire from emergency circuit breakers.

D. Provide status function conduit and wiring for equipment covered under this Section.

E. Provide conduit and wiring between the BAS panels and the temperature, humidity,

or pressure sensing elements, including low voltage control wiring in conduit. F. Provide conduit and control wiring for devices specified in this Section.

G. Provide conduit and signal wiring between motor starters in motor control centers

and high and/or low temperature relay contacts and remote relays in BAS panels located in the vicinity of motor control centers.

H. Provide conduit and wiring between the PC workstation, electrical panels, metering

instrumentation, indicating devices, miscellaneous alarm points, remotely operated contractors, and BAS panels, as shown on the drawings or as specified.

I. All wiring to be compliant to all relevant local building codes. J. Provide electrical wall box and conduit sleeve for all wall mounted devices.

3.6 CONTROL AIR LINES

1. Air lines cannot be hidden within duct insulation. All piping and tubing shall be

properly supported using straps, cleats, or hangers as approved. Use of wire will not be permitted.

2. Tubing passing through or buried in concrete shall be hard drawn copper in rigid steel conduit.

3. Air tubing run exposed in mechanical equipment rooms shall be hard drawn copper.

4. Air tubing in finished areas shall be run concealed.

3.7 COMMISSIONING, TESTING AND ACCEPTANCE

A. Perform a three-phase commissioning procedure consisting of field I/O calibration

and commissioning, system commissioning and integrated system program commissioning. Document all commissioning information on commissioning data sheets which shall be submitted prior to acceptance testing. Commissioning work which requires shutdown of system or deviation from normal function shall be performed when the operation of the system is not required. The commissioning must be coordinated with the owner and construction manager to ensure systems are available when needed. Notify the operating personal in writing of the testing schedule so that authorized personnel from the owner and construction manager are present throughout the commissioning procedure.

1. Prior to system program commissioning, verify that each control panel has

been installed according to plans, specifications and approved shop drawings.




Test, calibrate and bring on line each control sensor and device. Commissioning to include, but not be limited to:

a. Sensor accuracy at 10, 50 and 90% of range.

b. Sensor range.

c. Verify analog limit and binary alarm reporting.

d. Point value reporting.

e. Binary alarm and switch settings.

f. Actuator ranges.

g. Fail safe operation on loss of control signal, electric power, network

communications.

B. After control devices have been commissioned (i.e. calibrated, tested and signed off), each BAS program shall be put on line and commissioned. The contractor shall, in the presence of the owner and construction manager, demonstrate each programmed sequence of operation and compare the results in writing. In addition, each control loop shall be tested to verify proper response and stable control, within specified accuracy's. System program test results shall be recorded on commissioning data sheets and submitted for record. Any discrepancies between the specification and the actual performance will be immediately rectified and retested.

C. After all BAS programs have been commissioned, the contractor shall verify the

overall system performance as specified. Tests shall include, but not be limited to:

1. Data communication, both normal and failure modes. 2. Fully loaded system response time.

3. Impact of component failures on system performance and system operation.

4. Time/Date changes.

5. End of month/ end of year operation.

6. Season changeover.

7. Global application programs and point sharing.

8. System backup and reloading.

9. System status displays.

10. Diagnostic functions.

11. Power failure routines.

12. Battery backup.

13. Smoke Control, stair pressurization, stair, vents, in concert with Fire Alarm

System testing.




14. Testing of all electrical and HVAC systems with other division of work.

D. Submit for approval, a detailed acceptance test procedure designed to demonstrate

compliance with contractual requirements. This Acceptance test procedure will take place after the commissioning procedure but before final acceptance, to verify that sensors and control devices maintain specified accuracy's and the system performance does not degrade over time.

E. Using the commissioning test data sheets, the contractor shall demonstrate each

point. The contractor shall also demonstrate all system functions. The contractor shall demonstrate all points and system functions until all devices and functions meet specification.

F. The contractor shall supply all instruments for testing.

1. All test instruments shall be submitted for approval.

Test Instrument Accuracy:

Temperature: 1/4F or 1/2% full scale, whichever is less.

Pressure: High Pressure (psi): ½ psi or 1/2% full scale,

whichever is less.

Low Pressure: 1/2% of full scale (in w.c.)

Humidity: 2% RH

Electrical: 1/4% full scale

G. After the above tests are complete and the system is demonstrated to be functioning

as specified, a thirty-day performance test period shall begin. If the system performs as specified throughout the test period, requiring only routine maintenance, the system shall be accepted. If the system fails during the test, and cannot be fully corrected within eight hours, the owner may request that performance tests be repeated.

3.8 TRAINING

A. The manufacturer shall provide factory-trained instructor to give full instruction to designated personnel in the operation of the system installed. Instructors shall be thoroughly familiar with all aspects of the subject matter they are to teach. The manufacturer shall provide all students with a student binder containing product specific training modules for the system installed. All training shall be held during normal working hours of 8:00 am to 4:30 PM weekdays.

B. Provide 8 hours of training for Owner's designated operating personnel.

C. Since the Owner may require personnel to have more comprehensive

understanding of the hardware and software, additional training must be available from the Manufacturer. If such training is required by the Owner, it will be contracted at a later date.

End of Section

GENERAL ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS Mary McCormick Recreation Centre 66 Sheridan Avenue, Toronto Section 16010 - Page 1 of 16 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 Scope .1 Conform to Sections of Division 1 as applicable. .2 Section 16010 shall apply to and govern work of all Sections of Division 16. .3 Provide all materials, labour and equipment to complete the electrical work

as shown on the drawings, described herein, or as necessary to complete the work.

1.2 Codes and Standards .1 Do complete installation in accordance with the editions of the following codes and

standards in force at the time of construction as applicable: .1 Ontario Electrical Safety Code .2 Ontario Electrical Safety Code Bulletins .3 Ontario Building Code .4 Ontario Fire Code .5 Municipal Regulations .2 Electrical Terminology - CAN/CSA 2781-92. .3 Install all work for the approval and/or acceptance of the local Electrical Safety

Authority (ESA) Office and other Agencies having Jurisdiction. 1.3 Quality Assurance .1 Regulatory Requirements .1 Electrical Safety Authority Approval: Immediately upon award of the Contract,

submit complete set of electrical drawings, as prepared by the Consultant, to the ESA for approval. Prepare and submit any other documents required for approval, providing the Consultant with a copy of such documentation and proof of application.

.2 Materials and workmanship shall be in accordance with requirements and

recommendations of applicable rules, regulations, standards and codes as specified hereunder, or the requirements of these specifications and drawings whichever are the most stringent. All products shall bear certification label of the Canadian Standards Association (CSA), ESA, or other approved certification agency as applicable.

.3 Agency names and abbreviations: Ontario Electrical Safety Code (OESC)

GENERAL ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS Mary McCormick Recreation Centre 66 Sheridan Avenue, Toronto Section 16010 - Page 2 of 16 Canadian Standards Association (CSA) Electrical Safety Authority (ESA) Underwriter's Laboratories of Canada (ULC) Electrical and Electronic Manufacturers Association of Canada (EEMAC) Joint Industrial Council (JIC) Ontario Building Code (OBC) Ontario Fire Code (OFC) Boards, Service Companies or other Authorities having jurisdiction as

indicated. .4 Permits, Fees and Certificates: Except as provided in Division 1, give notices,

obtain permits, pay fees required for work of Division 16. Before the final certificate of payment is issued by the Owner, furnish Consultant with certificates as evidence that work installed conforms to laws and regulations of all governing authorities, including the ESA Certificate of Inspection. Determine detailed requirements of local authorities having jurisdiction and conform to those requirements.

.5 Prepare and provide any additional drawings or specifications required by the

Electrical Safety Authority, Municipal, Supply or other governing Authorities. Supply a copy of such documentation to the Consultant.

.6 Notify Consultant of any changes required by Electrical Safety Authority

Inspection Department prior to making changes. .2 Qualifications .1 Work shall be executed by Electrical Contractor or his designated sub-

contractor, holding a valid Contractors' license (Master’s License). .2 Work shall be performed by qualified Electricians holding valid Ontario

certificates of qualification. .3 The fire detection and signalling components shall be verified by technicians

qualified in accordance with the Ontario Fire Code and where the building has an existing fire alarm system be employed by the current building fire alarm system maintenance contractor.

.3 Work Site .1 Maintain a stamped set of permit documents at the project site.

GENERAL ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS Mary McCormick Recreation Centre 66 Sheridan Avenue, Toronto Section 16010 - Page 3 of 16 1.4 Project/Site Conditions .1 Existing Conditions .1 Examine Site and Contract Documents in accordance with Instructions to

Bidders and Clause 3.1 below. .2 Interruption of Services .1 Any interruption of electrical services to any part of existing building(s) shall

come at a time agreeable to Owner. Make all necessary arrangements with Owner and any outside monitoring agency or authority. Include in Contract Sum for any overtime required to ensure that interruption is held to a minimum. Refer to drawings for additional information.

.2 Any additional overtime work shall be carried out without additional cost to

Owner. .3 Work Clearances .1 Where any parts of the systems or equipment are located by dimensions on

the drawings verify the dimensions at the site. If any discrepancy or interference with other equipment is found which will constitute a major revision from the work indicated or specified, notify the Consultant before proceeding further. Alter without charge the location of conduit, raceways, wiring and other equipment, within a distance of 3 m, if so directed by the Consultant prior to installation. Provide accurate revised estimates of any additional materials or labour beyond 3 m, when directed by the Consultant.

1.5 Records and Documentation .1 Drawings and Specifications .1 The specifications are to be read in connection with the drawings. Do not use

either alone. Items included in one but omitted from the other are to be included in the work

.2 The drawings for this Division are diagrammatic only and show the general

arrangement of the work. The Contractor before undertaking the work shall prepare an integrated set of electrical interference drawings as necessary to identify and resolve any interference problems prior to the fabrication and installation of any conduit, wiring or equipment.

.3 The indicated location and elevation of existing services, equipment and

fittings are approximate. Verify them before construction. .4 Drawings show the general arrangement of receptacles, switches, devices,

equipment, etc. Follow them, as closely as actual building construction and other trades will permit. Allow for movement of indicated items of up to 3 m from position shown without additional cost. Conserve headroom. Ensure products will fit the space available. Make necessary field measurements prior to installation to assure products will fit. If changes in design are required notify

GENERAL ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS Mary McCormick Recreation Centre 66 Sheridan Avenue, Toronto Section 16010 - Page 4 of 16

the Consultant and provide products that suit the true intent and meaning of the contract documents.

.5 Where specifications, drawings or regulations conflict, comply with the most

severe unless otherwise approved in writing by the Consultant. .2 Shop Drawings .1 The Contractor shall submit 7 copies, or such number as specified in Division

1, of shop drawings as identified below to the Consultant for review. Contractor to ensure his name and address appear on all shop drawings.

.2 Provide shop drawings and specifications for: .1 Switchgear, switchboards, panelboards, circuit breakers, enclosed

switches, fused disconnects, transformers, transfer switches, splitters. .2 Motor starters, motor controllers, motor control assemblies, control

panels, or other electro-mechanical devices supplied by Division 16. .3 Electric heating appliances. .4 Light fixtures, emergency lighting components and exit signs. .5 Fire alarm system control panels, fire detectors, other alarm initiating

devices, signalling appliances, addressable modules. .6 Firestop materials. .7 Warning or hazard labels to be applied under this contract. .8 Any other electrical device or component which differs from that specified

in the drawings or these specifications. .3 Review of shop drawings by the Consultant is in reference to general design

only and shall not relieve the Contractor from furnishing equipment of proper dimensions, size, quantity or quality. Furthermore such review shall not relieve the Contractor from the responsibility for any error or omission of any sort in the shop drawings or other construction proposed or designed by him.

.4 This Contractor shall bear all costs or damages which may result from the

fabrication, supply, or installation of any equipment prior to the review of the shop drawings, and no work shall be done until the shop drawings have been reviewed.

.5 Drawings shall indicate or include the following as applicable and shall show

evidence of being checked by the Contractor: .1 Model selected, including full catalogue number .2 Full electrical ratings such as voltage, current, power, etc. .3 Dimensions or size .4 Total weight .5 Shipping sections .6 Bill of material .7 Mounting and installation details .8 Schematic and wiring diagrams .9 Nameplate diagrams .10 Colour .11 Delivery


.3 Record Drawings .1 Maintain an extra set of white prints on the project and clearly note, as the

project progresses, all the changes in location and/or the sizes of wiring, raceways, wiring devices, appliances, circuit connections, heating and lighting fixtures, thermostats, panelboards, enclosed switches, disconnects, motors, starters, protective and alarm initiation devices and signal appliances, disconnects and other equipment.

.2 Where wiring is buried or concealed, accurately dimension the actual location

related to the permanent building walls and finish floor levels. .3 Provide all such drawings to the Consultant as a complete set of "as-built"

record drawings. .4 The Final Certificate of Acceptance will not be issued until satisfactory "as-

built" record drawings are filed with the Owner. .4 Insert Drawings .1 Where penetrating structural members, concrete slabs and the like, prepare

and provide insert drawings, showing the location and size of all sleeves, anchor bolts, openings and miscellaneous inserts required for each of the electrical systems. Sleeves are to be Schedule 40 steel pipe sized for free passage of conduit. Supply copies of these drawings to the Consultant, and, together with the necessary inserts and instructions to each of the trades responsible for building-in these inserts well in advance of the construction work. Supervise and coordinate the installation of all such inserts.

.5 Operation and Maintenance Instructions .1 Provide five copies, or such other number as may be indicated in Division 1, of

operation and maintenance data in a manual format. .2 Ensure each manual includes, as applicable, the following: .1 Material list for all devices, appliances, control panels, modules and the

like used in this project. .2 Copies of all reviewed shop drawings. .3 All manufacturer’s operating and maintenance instructions for each

system and its components. .4 Copies of verification, test and start-up reports and check lists, test and

inspection certificates . .3 One manual shall contain the original copies of verification, test and start-up

reports and check lists, test and inspection certificates

GENERAL ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS Mary McCormick Recreation Centre 66 Sheridan Avenue, Toronto Section 16010 - Page 6 of 16 .4 Final completion will not be issued until these instructions have been reviewed

by the Consultant and submitted to the Owner. 1.6 Trial Usage .1 Trial usage by the Owner or his agents of any electrical device, machinery,

apparatus, equipment and other work supplied under this Division before final completion and written acceptance by Consultant is not to be construed as evidence of acceptance by Owner.

.2 Owner and his agents shall have privilege of such trial usage as soon as Contractor

claims that said work is completed, in accordance with Drawings and specifications for such reasonable length of time as Owner deems sufficient for making a complete test.

.3 No claim for damage shall be made for injury to or breaking of any parts of such

tested work, whether caused by weakness or inaccuracy of structural parts or by defective materials or workmanship of any kind whatsoever.

1.7 Instruction of Operating Staff .1 Arrange for fully qualified personnel to instruct the Owner’s operating staff on the

operation of each electrical system; on the maintenance and adjustment of the equipment and on the scope and coverage of all warranties.

.2 Use the Operating and Maintenance Manual for instructional purposes and ensure

that the Owner’s operating staff are made familiar with all its contents. 1.8 Maintenance Tools .1 The Contractor shall provide the Owner as part of this contract all necessary tools,

etc. to allow proper maintenance of the installed equipment. 1.9 Protection .1 Always protect personnel from exposed live electrical equipment, outlets or wiring.

Suitable personal protective equipment (PPE) to be used at all times. .2 Shield and provide temporary warning sign for all exposed live electrical equipment

or wiring. .3 Rooms without lockable doors containing exposed live electrical equipment or wiring

shall be provided with temporary lockable doors except when under the direct supervision of a qualified electrician.

1.10 Warranties .1 Provide a signed certificate warranting each electrical system covering labour and

material for a period of at least one year from the date of Final Acceptance by the Owner. Attach manufacturer's extended equipment warranties, each made out in the name of the Owner. File such warranties in the Operating and Maintenance Manuals to be delivered to the Owner.

GENERAL ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS Mary McCormick Recreation Centre 66 Sheridan Avenue, Toronto Section 16010 - Page 7 of 16 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 Voltage Ratings .1 Operating voltages: to CAN3-C235-83. .2 Motors, electric heating, lighting, control and distribution devices and equipment,

communications, security and fire alarm systems to operate satisfactorily from a 60 Hz source between 85% and 110% of rated voltage. Equipment to operate in extreme operating conditions established in above standard without damage to the equipment.

2.2 Materials and Equipment .1 Nameplates .1 Lamicoid 3 mm thick plastic engraving sheet, white face, black core,

mechanically attached with self-tapping screws. For fire alarm systems use the same material except red face with white core.

.2 Nameplate Sizes:

Size 1 10 x 50 mm 1 line 3 mm high letters Size 2 12 x 70 mm 1 line 5 mm high letters Size 3 12 x 70 mm 2 lines 3 mm high letters Size 4 20 x 90 mm 1 line 8 mm high letters Size 5 20 x 90 mm 2 lines 5 mm high letters Size 6 25 x 100 mm 1 line 12 mm high letters Size 7 25 x 100 mm 2 lines 6 mm high letters

.3 Wording on nameplates to be approved by Consultant prior to manufacture. .4 Lettering to be at least 3 mm high. .5 All identification to be in English and French, or as required by Owner. .6 On disconnects, switchboards, panelboards, control panels, transfer switches

and fire alarm panels: indicate equipment being controlled, voltage and phases. Mount on front, top outside cover. For fire alarm panels in finished areas mount inside.

.7 Terminal cabinets, splitters and pull boxes: indicate system and voltage. .8 To identify all conductors at panels, terminal strips and equipment. .9 Panelboards to have directory legibly updated, or branch circuit breakers to have

one (1) permanent label affixed on deadfront immediately adjacent to circuit breaker.

.10 Transformers indicated capacity, primary and secondary voltage.

GENERAL ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS Mary McCormick Recreation Centre 66 Sheridan Avenue, Toronto Section 16010 - Page 8 of 16 .11 Fire alarm panels, fire pumps, and supply circuit breakers, disconnect switches,

controllers and junction box covers for fire alarm systems to be coloured red. .2 Equipment .1 Refer also to Section 16100. .2 All equipment, fixtures and devices to be new, free from defects, manufactured

to the standard(s) quoted and to incorporate any additional specific requirements noted.

.3 All equipment to be certified by an agency listed in ESA Bulletin 2-7, latest

edition, as suitable for the application. Where there is no alternative to supplying material, which is certified by such an agency, obtain special approval from ESA, or other authority having jurisdiction.

.4 All equipment supplied under this contract shall not exceed the space

requirements allocated on the drawings unless approved by the Consultant. .5 Where material or apparatus of more than one manufacturer is specified, then

these are acceptable and any of those specified may be used. .6 In addition to the manufacturers specified, Division 16 may propose alternative

manufacturers of equipment and/or apparatus for acceptance; refer to the City’s front-end documentation for procedures on substitutions.

.7 Reserved. .3 Hazardous Materials .1 Ensure all equipment and materials are suitably labelled for hazards. Keep

material safety sheets on file at the job site and supply a set for the operation and maintenance information. Provide suitable labels on all containers holding hazardous materials.

.2 All equipment rated more than 240 Vac, or less if an arc flash hazard exists,

shall carry a suitable label warning of any potential arc flash or electric shock hazard.

.4 Conduit, Conduit Fastenings and Conduit Fittings .1 Refer to Section 16111. .5 Splitters, Junction, Pull Boxes and Cabinets .1 Refer to Section 16131. .6 Outlet Boxes, Conduit Boxes and Fittings .1 Refer to Section 16132. .7 Fire Alarm System

GENERAL ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS Mary McCormick Recreation Centre 66 Sheridan Avenue, Toronto Section 16010 - Page 9 of 16 .1 Refer to Section 16721. .8 Lighting Equipment .1 Lighting layout to conform to the drawings if required .2 Light fixtures to be as specified on the drawings complete with lamps .9 Fasteners .1 Provide permanent fastenings, anchors, adhesives and accessories required for

proper performance of the work. .2 Fasteners shall be protected from corrosion. Except where supplied by the

manufacturer specifically for the application, fasteners located in wet, damp, unheated or poorly heated areas shall be hot-dipped galvanized or stainless steel.

.3 Do not use impact driven (explosive, hammer, etc.) fastening devices except

where the Consultant has indicated acceptability .4 Do not use organic plugs in concrete or masonry .5 Prevent electrolytic action between dissimilar metals.. .10 Wire and Cable .1 All installed wire and cable shall use copper conductors. .2 Building wire: Size as per OESC, but not less than No. 12 AWG for power

circuits, No. 14 AWG for control circuits outside factory assembled control panels, with T90 Nylon for all above grade interior wiring, RW90XLPE for all above grade exterior wiring and RWU90 XLPE for all below grade wiring.

.3 Equipment wire: To be used only in manufacturers’ factory tested assemblies. .4 Non-metallic sheathed cable: Not to be used on this project. .5 Armoured Cables: Size as per OESC, and above, with insulation rated for a

maximum allowable temperature of 90 C. Armour to be of the interlocking type fabricated from aluminium strip, Type TECK90 copper. To be used only in concealed locations, from junction boxes to device boxes mounted in suspended ceilings or existing partitions finished on both sides and totally within service rooms. Must have integral copper bonding conductor.

.6 Surface mounted wireways to be used only where specified or approved in

advance by Owner and Consultant. .7 Wiring colour shall be as follows; 1. 600 and 208 Vac: Phase A - red, phase B - black, phase C - blue 2. 120 Vac: Live conductors - black

GENERAL ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS Mary McCormick Recreation Centre 66 Sheridan Avenue, Toronto Section 16010 - Page 10 of 16 3. All voltages: Neutral - white 4. All voltages: Ground - green or bare 5. All voltages: Isolated ground - green with yellow band 6. DC control wiring: Negative - blue. Positive - red Note: Where only black coloured conductors are available, use coloured

tape or other approved coloured markings to permanently identify phases in all junction and terminal boxes in accordance with the colour code above.

2.3 Grounding and Bonding .1 All equipment shall be grounded and bonded in accordance with the Ontario

Electrical Safety Code. .2 All bonding conductors shall be copper and, unless otherwise indicated, if less than

#4 AWG and not part of an approved cable assembly shall be insulated and green in colour.

.3 Grounding and bonding lugs and connectors shall be suitable for copper and

approved for the purpose.

GENERAL ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS Mary McCormick Recreation Centre 66 Sheridan Avenue, Toronto Section 16010 - Page 11 of 16 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 Examination .1 Verification of Conditions .1 Where any parts of systems and/or pieces of equipment are located by

dimensions on Drawings check and verify such dimensions at Site. .2 Notify Consultant before proceeding further if any discrepancy or interference

with other equipment is found which will necessitate revision in or deviation from Work as indicated or specified.

.3 Location of conduit, raceways, wiring and other equipment shall be altered

without charge to Owner if so directed by Consultant provided change is ordered before installation, and does not necessitate additional labour and material.

3.2 Preparation .1 Cutting and Patching .1 Cutting of holes up to 200 mm (8") in diameter and related patching shall be

done under Division 16 in accordance with the insert drawings. .2 For holes and other openings larger than 200 mm (8") in diameter contact

Consultant. .3 Be responsible for any additional cost incurred for patching as a result of

oversizing of openings, unless cut by others. 3.3 Installation .1 Instruct and supervise other Divisions, such as Mechanical, doing related work. .2 Electrical products and methods of installation shall be in accordance with the

relevant Sections of Division 16 in this Specification, and the applicable requirements of other Divisions.

.3 Correct installed work as directed by an authorized inspector of Authorities having

jurisdiction. .4 Finishes .1 Equipment to be finished in accordance with Manufacturer's standard paint finish

or as specified. .2 Clean and touch up surfaces of shop-painted equipment scratched or marred

during shipment or installation, with factory supplied touch-up paint to match


original paint. If the Owner deems the damage to be major or the touch up to be unsatisfactory replace the damaged part entirely.

.3 Clean and prime exposed non-galvanized hangers, racks and fastenings to

prevent rusting. .4 Isolation Painting: Apply one full bodied coat of bituminous base purpose-made

undercoating to all underground steel conduits and fittings prior to application of cover; back paint all raceways, hangers, racks, junctions, pull and outlet boxes being cast into concrete, masonry, or into contact with dissimilar materials.

.5 Customs Fashion: Where the finishes are specified to be executed by Section

09900: Painting, mask protect all necessary orifices, plates, switches, signs, manufacturers’ labels, approval, certification, warning, other information labels, or other fitments. Notify the painter. After finishes have cured remove maskings, test and ensure equipment is operating correctly.

.5 Wiring Identification .1 Maintain phase sequence and colour coding throughout. .2 Use colour coded wires in communication cables, matched throughout system. .6 Wiring Terminations .1 Lugs, terminals and screws used for mechanical termination of wiring to be

suitable for copper and aluminium conductors. .2 Terminations to equipment to be with manufacturer’s supplied mechanical

pressure wire connectors or compression connectors. .3 Wire splices to be made in junction boxes only. Wire nuts to be suitable for the

conductors being spliced and are not to be used for wire sizes exceeding #8 AWG. Wire over #8 AWG to be spliced only at suitable splitter blocks or with suitable compression connectors.

.4 Split bolt wire connectors are not to be used without specific written permission

from the Consultant, except where supplied as part of approved equipment. .7 Manufacturers' Nameplates, Rating and Instruction Labels, Approval and

Certification Labels .1 Visible and legible after equipment is installed. .8 Warning Signs .1 As specified or to meet the requirements of ESA. .9 Mounting Heights

GENERAL ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS Mary McCormick Recreation Centre 66 Sheridan Avenue, Toronto Section 16010 - Page 13 of 16 .1 Measure mounting height dimension from operator's working floor level (finish)

to centre-line of electrical device or enclosure, unless otherwise indicated or specified herein.

.2 Unless otherwise specified, detailed on drawings, or required by code, the

following heights shall be used: Item Height Local wall switches 1200 mm Wall receptacles: Minimum 460 mm Washrooms and above counters 1065 mm Service rooms 1400 mm Panelboards (top circuit breaker) 1500 mm Cradle telephone & TV/data outlets Same as receptacles Wall telephone/Interphones/thermostats 1200 mm Wall clocks 2100 mm Door access keypads, push buttons, etc. 1200 mm .3 Heights are subject to change to suit structural requirements, and other Site

conditions, and therefore as work progresses, and before installing equipment, obtain instructions or directions from Owner or Consultant for alternative heights or relocation.

.10 Existing Installations .1 Where connections are required to existing electrical equipment install

necessary raceways and wiring and connect as required for proper operation. .2 Provide new wiring for new and affected existing lighting fixtures, switches,

receptacles, outlets and other electrical equipment installed or moved during the Work.

.3 Repair damage caused by such works, including repainting required due to lack

of reasonable care. Bring discrepancies regarding installation to Consultant's attention for decision regarding procedure to be taken.

.4 Maintain and protect existing wiring during construction. Where interruption of

services cannot be avoided, coordinate interruption with Owner. .5 Provide temporary feeder connections to equipment where interruption of

services is not allowed. .6 Existing minor installations, such as conduits, boxes and wiring devices, which

interfere with new electrical equipment installation, may be rerouted or relocated on prior approval of Owner or Consultant.

.11 Grounding .1 Ground electrical equipment in accordance with requirements of Ontario

Electrical Safety Code and as indicated on the Drawings and elsewhere in these specifications.

GENERAL ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS Mary McCormick Recreation Centre 66 Sheridan Avenue, Toronto Section 16010 - Page 14 of 16 .2 Arrange grounds so that under normal operating conditions no injurious amount

of current will flow in any grounding conductor. Connect single-phase loads so that there is least possible unbalance of supply.

.3 Conduit and armour shall not be relied upon solely to provide grounding or

bonding connections. All wireways shall contain a suitably sized bonding conductor.

.4 The resistance of grounding electrodes shall be less than the maximum

permissible values for each type of installation or equipment concerned. .12 Firestopping and Weatherstopping .1 Where raceways, cables or other electrical equipment pass through fire

separations pack the space between the sleeve/opening and installed electrical materials with a firestopping material suitable and approved for the application in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions for the firestop material.

.2 Where raceways, cables or other electrical equipment pass through exterior

walls pack the space between the sleeve/opening and installed electrical materials with a suitable weatherstop material. Pack the interior of any conduit.

3.4 Field Quality Control .1 Tests .1 At completion of installation, or as required, conduct grounding resistance tests,

voltage tests, or other tests and inspections as are called for below or in other sections of this specification or on the drawings. Make corrections where necessary and as directed.

.2 Notify the Consultant at least two business days in advance of all tests and

inspections. Consultant reserves the right to witness all tests and inspections. .3 Voltage provided to equipment in installation shall not exceed minimum and

maximum permissible limits for equipment. .4 Perform insulation tests for installed wiring and equipment with appropriate

megohmmeter (megger). For tests where end use equipment cannot involving solid state circuitry use a megger rated at 500 Vdc, for all other tests on equipment, or conductors rated up to 300 Vac use a megger rated at 1000 Vdc, for all other conductors rated up to 1000 Vac use a megger rated at 2500 Vdc, for equipment rated for more than 750 Vac or conductors rated more than 1000 Vac contact Consultant.

.5 If resistance to ground is less than recommendations on any tested lighting or

power circuit, consider such circuit defective and replace it. .6 Megger supply circuit conductors for supply and branch circuit conductors for

emergency lighting, exit signs, and electric door controls.

GENERAL ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS Mary McCormick Recreation Centre 66 Sheridan Avenue, Toronto Section 16010 - Page 15 of 16 .7 Test performance of equipment for mechanical and electrical defects. Make

adjustments necessary for such equipment. When equipment has been placed in permanent operation give to operating personnel all necessary tuition and instructions for its operation and maintenance.

.8 Test conduits that are to be reused or installed and left empty for clear bore,

using a ball mandrel brushes and a snake. Use a lignum vitae ball of a diameter approximately 85% of the conduit internal diameter. Clear any conduit that rejects the ball mandrel in an approved manner, without damage, or replace.

.9 If encountered and changed in any way, verify installation of the fire detectors,

manual pull stations and audible alarms and furnish a report of the verification to the Consultant.

.10 Make such other tests as may be required by other Sections of this

Specification. .11 Furnish labour, materials, instruments and bear other costs in connection with all

tests, obtain required certificates of approval, acceptance, and compliance with regulations of agencies having jurisdiction and as specified. Work shall not be deemed complete and final certificate of acceptance will not be issued, until such certificates have been delivered to Consultant.

3.5 Delivery and Storage .1 Deliver, store and maintain packaged material and equipment with manufacturer’s

seals and labels intact. Immediately remove packaged materials with broken seals from site. Protect all materials and equipment from weather.

3.6 Disposal .1 Dispose of all removed electrical devices, fixtures, equipment, conduit, wire, etc.

where not directed to turn over to the Owner. .2 Where directed to turn materials and equipment over to the Owner, ensure that these

are not damaged during removal. .3 Keep work areas to be used by the building occupants open and clean on a daily

basis. Clean up all debris on completion. 3.7 Cleaning .1 Before starting and commissioning operations, installed new electrical enclosures,

equipment and control devices shall be vacuum-cleaned to remove dust, dirt, metal particles and other small debris.

.2 Ensure no foreign objects, tools, or materials are left inside cabinets, control panels,

enclosed switches and similar electrical enclosures before energizing equipment. .3 Clean and polish all systems ready for use, in particular lighting fixture reflectors,

lenses, lamps and surfaces.

GENERAL ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS Mary McCormick Recreation Centre 66 Sheridan Avenue, Toronto Section 16010 - Page 16 of 16 3.8 Asbestos .1 If asbestos is encountered immediately contact the Owner and Consultant. End of Section

GENERAL ELECTRICAL WORK Mary McCormick Recreation Centre 66 Sheridan Avenue, Toronto Section 16100 - Page 1 of 4

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 Scope .1 Conform to other Sections of this Specification and Drawings as applicable. .2 Conform to General Electrical Requirements, Section 16010 as applicable. 1.2 Standards .1 Refer to Ontario Electrical Safety Code, Appendix A, for a list of product standards. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 Materials and Equipment .1 Switchboards, Panelboards and Circuit Breakers .1 Switchboards, conforming to CSA C22.2 No. 244 refer to Drawings for details. .2 Circuit Breakers, moulded case type, conforming to CSA C22.2 No.5.1, bolt-

on, quick make, quick break, with arc quenching device, trip free handle, thermal overload protection combined with instantaneous magnetic trip, with interrupting and current rating as noted on Drawings. Minimum interrupting capacity shall be 10 kA or as indicated on drawings.

.3 Where 2 or 3 pole circuits are indicated on Drawings, circuit breakers shall

have a common trip; extension tie handles alone will not be accepted. .4 Panelboards as noted on drawings. .2 Motor Starters, Disconnect Switches and Fuses .1 Disconnect switches shall be fused or non-fused industrial heavy-duty type

switches, horsepower rated, conforming to CSA C22.2 No.4, with quick make, quick break contacts, ratings and fuses as indicated on Drawings.

.2 Fuses shall be Class J, non-time delay, unless otherwise specified, suitably

rated to protect circuits against overload and short circuit. .3 Where separately mounted, motor starters and disconnect switches shall be

complete with CSA Type 1 Enclosures for indoor mounting, or CSA Type 3 Enclosures for outdoor mounting or as indicated on Drawings.

.4 Motor starters to be sized as noted on the drawings. .3 Wires and Cables .1 Building wire: Size as per OESC, but not less than No. 12 AWG for power

circuits, No. 14 AWG for control circuits outside factory assembled control


panels, with T90 NYLON for interior wiring above grade, RW90 XLPE for exterior wiring above grade and RWU90 XLPE for wiring below grade.

.2 Size branch circuits and feeders for maximum 2% voltage drop from

panelboard to farthest outlet in circuit and large enough to be protected by fuse or circuit breaker of which they form a part, except as noted or scheduled on the Drawings.

.3 Feeders, circuit wiring and ancillary items shall be colour-coded for phase

identification. .4 Neutral Conductor: Full capacity, white covering and continuous throughout

system without fuses, circuit breakers or switches of any kind. .5 Connectors: Compression connectors for joining conductors to be properly

sized and insulated as required. Mechanical pressure connectors with slotted screws or for external drive wrenches to be CSA certified for CU-AL, unless otherwise specified. Split-bolt connectors are not acceptable.

.6 Emergency lighting on dc circuits to be wired as recommended by the

emergency lighting manufacturer. .7 For other wire and cable refer to Drawings and Section 16010. .4 Light Fixtures .1 Light fixtures including emergency light fixtures shall be as noted on Drawings

complete with lamps, LED’s, ballasts or drivers as required to operate. .2 Where light fixtures are recessed or flush mounted they shall be suitable for

such installation. Where they penetrate a moisture barrier, a boot approved for the use or other suitable means shall be employed to re-establish the moisture barrier around the fixture. A space recommended by the fixture manufacturer, but in no case less than 75 mm shall be maintained between recessed fixtures and insulation, except where the fixture has been specifically approved for direct contact with insulation. Where they penetrate a fire separation a box of suitable material or other approved means shall be employed around the fixture to maintain the fire separation rating. Such a box shall be sized in accordance with the fixture manufacturer’s requirements.

.5 Exit Signs, Emergency Light Batteries and Combination Exit Signs and Batteries

.1 Exit signs shall be as noted on the Drawings. If supplied with aperture for downward lighting, this aperture shall be opened. Arrow pointing as indicated on the Drawings.

.6 Wiring Devices .1 Wiring devices shall be new, as indicated on the Drawings and in these

specifications complete with new wall plates and installed as shown.


.2 Wall plates installed in finished areas shall match the colour of the portion of

the wiring device visible after installation. In service areas the wall plate shall be galvanized steel unless otherwise specified.

.3 Wiring devices outdoors if surface mounted shall be in weather-resistant boxes

with weather-resistant covers and if flush mounted shall have weather-resistant covers.

.7 Fire Alarm System .1 Refer to Drawings for fire alarm system additions .2 Equipment must be listed for use with and compatible with existing fire alarm

system. 2.2 Alternatives .1 Shop drawings must be supplied as indicated and for all alternatives. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 Installation .1 Location of Equipment .1 Switchboards, Panelboards, control panels, boxes, splitter troughs and cabinets

shall be surface mounted, locate where indicated on drawings. Refer to Section 16010 for mounting heights.

.2 Disconnect Switches, Panels, Panelboards and Motor Control Assemblies .1 Install at locations as indicated on Drawings. .2 Provide respective identification in accordance with the designations indicated

on Drawings. .3 Panelboard directories shall be neatly typed indicating the end use of all branch

and feed circuit breakers, or disconnects. .4 Where installation of any equipment requires the shutdown of existing powered

equipment or feeders; such shutdown shall be scheduled for a time suitable to the Owner. The Owner shall be notified again immediately before any such scheduled power shutdown.

.3 Light Fixtures. .1 Install at locations indicated on Drawings. .2 Emergency lights and rechargeable batteries with emergency lights shall be

ceiling or wall mounted as appropriate or indicated on the drawings. Mounting


height to be not less than 2.0 m or more than 4.2 m above the finished floor unless otherwise specified.

.4 Wiring .1 Armoured cable shall be TECK90 copper and installed only where permitted. .2 Conduit shall be concealed except in service rooms, closets or other areas

specifically permitted by the Owner. .3 Finished surface conduit or wireways shall be installed only where specifically

permitted. .5 Exit Signs, Emergency Lights, Batteries and Combination Exit Signs and Batteries .1 If a rechargeable battery is specified with a cord and attachment plug this shall

be connected to an outlet box with only one receptacle per charger, box to be located immediately beside an exit light fixture.

.2 Exit signs to be wall or ceiling mounted as shown in the drawings. Mounting

height to be not less than 2.2 m or more than 2.5 meters above finished floor unless otherwise specified.

.6 Fire Alarm System .1 Contractor shall protect any fire detectors/alarms during all phases of

construction to prevent false alarms due to dust, etc. When the Contractor is not on site the fire detectors/alarms shall be uncovered and fully functional. False alarms due to inadequate protection shall be the responsibility of the Contractor.

.2 Refer to Drawings. .3 Installation, testing and verification must be done in accordance with CAN/ULC

Standards S524, S536 and S537. .4 Changes to the existing fire alarm system must be done by a firm qualified to do

the work. If done by a firm other than that currently maintaining the existing fire alarm system, then the entire building fire alarm system must be re-verified with copies of the report supplied to the Owner and Consultant.

End of Section

CONDUITS, FASTENINGS & FITTINGS Mary McCormick Recreation Centre 66 Sheridan Avenue, Toronto Section 16111 - Page 1 of 3 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 Scope .1 Conform to other Sections of this Specification as applicable. .2 Conform to General Electrical Requirements, Section 16010 as applicable. 1.2 Drawings .1 Drawings do not indicate conduit runs. PART 2 - PRODUCT 2.1 Conduit .1 Acceptable Types .1 Electrical metallic tubing (EMT) with compression fittings, only where

permitted by the Ontario Electrical Safety Code, the Ontario Building Code, the drawings and these specifications.

.2 Rigid galvanized steel. .3 Rigid PVC conduit where permitted by the Ontario Electrical Safety

Code, the Ontario Building Code and these specifications. .2 Do not use smaller than 21 mm (3/4") trade size conduits and fittings. .3 All conduit shall be of a grade or type suitable for the application and as

specified. 2.2 Conduit Fastenings .1 Single hole galvanized or PVC coated steel clamps may be used to secure

conduit (2") 50 mm and smaller to walls and ceilings, two hole galvanized or PVC coated steel clamps must be used to secure conduit greater than (2") 50 mm. PVC fittings to be used with PVC conduit.

.2 Beam clamps to secure conduits to exposed steel work. Lead anchors or

expansion shields shall be used to attach clamps to masonry walls .3 Galvanized channel type supports for two or more conduits. .4 Six mm diameter threaded stainless steel or hot-dipped galvanized rods to

support suspended channels. .5 All clamps or support assemblies to be corrosion resistant.

CONDUITS, FASTENINGS & FITTINGS Mary McCormick Recreation Centre 66 Sheridan Avenue, Toronto Section 16111 - Page 2 of 3 2.3 Conduit Fittings .1 Fittings: manufactured for use with conduit specified. Coating: same as

conduit.

.2 Factory "ells" where 90 bends are required for (1") 25 mm and larger conduits.

.3 Watertight compression connectors, couplings and fittings may be used with

EMT installations. 2.4 Fish Cord .1 Fish cord shall be polypropylene. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 Installation .1 Run all conduit concealed in finished areas. .2 Run all exposed conduit tight to walls or ceilings, parallel to building lines. .3 Install conduits to conserve headroom in exposed locations and cause

minimum interference in spaces through which they pass. Avoid blocking access openings.

.4 A copper bonding wire shall be in all conduit and EMT runs. .5 Rigid galvanized steel-threaded conduit may be used except where other

types are specified. Conceal in interior areas. .6 Electrical metallic tubing (EMT) may used only in interior heated finished and

service areas except where other types are specifically specified, or where prohibited by the Ontario Electrical Safety Code or the Ontario Building Code. Conceal in all finished areas.

.7 Rigid PVC conduit may be used below grade, on building exteriors where

mechanically protected and where suitably encased in concrete. Use only factory made bends and offsets. Conduit rated FT4 and with a cross sectional area of 625 mm or less, nominal size 27 mm (1), may be used in wet areas or where subject to prolonged dampness.

.7 Seal all openings for conduit in walls, masonry or concrete and weatherstop

all conduit interiors where passing through exterior walls. Firestop where passing through fire separations.

.8 Bend metal conduit cold. Replace conduit if kinked or flattened more than

1/10th of its original diameter. .9 Mechanically bend steel conduit over 3/4" diameter.

CONDUITS, FASTENINGS & FITTINGS Mary McCormick Recreation Centre 66 Sheridan Avenue, Toronto Section 16111 - Page 3 of 3 .10 Use only concentric bends. Do not use angle fittings together with bends.

Bends improperly formed not accepted. Do not bend over sharp objects. .11 Properly ream conduit ends. Provide necessary fittings, couplings, locknuts

and bushings. .12 Field threads on rigid conduit must be of sufficient length to draw conduits up

tight. .13 Where conduits become blocked, remove and replace blocked section. Do

not use liquids to clean out conduits. .14 Conduits must be dry before installing wire. .15 Install fish cord in empty conduits. .16 Group surface mounted conduits wherever possible on suspended surface

channels. .17 Locate conduits behind infrared or gas fired heaters with 1.5 m clearance. .18 Run conduits in flanged portion of structural steel. .19 Do not pass conduits through structural members such as beams, joists and

columns except as indicated. .20 Do not locate conduits less than 75 mm from steam or hot water lines when

run in parallel, or less than 25 mm at crossovers. .21 Do not install horizontal runs in masonry walls. .22 Do not install conduits in terrazzo or concrete toppings. .23 Slope underground and long conduit runs to provide drainage. Do not drain

into boxes. .24 Conduit runs should terminate in closed boxes. Where this is not possible

ends shall be bushed to prevent injury to exiting conductors. Empty conduits shall be sealed to prevent entry of foreign material.

3.2 Existing Installation .1 Existing conduit, EMT, fittings and boxes may be reused if clean,

undamaged, free from corrosion, undisturbed, suitable for the application, and in full compliance with the current requirements of the OESC and these specifications.

End of Section

SPLITTERS, BOXES, CABINETS Mary McCormick Recreation Centre 66 Sheridan Avenue, Toronto Section 16131 - Page 1 of 3 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 Scope .1 Conform to other Sections of this Specification as applicable. .2 Conform to General Electrical Requirements, Section 16010 as applicable. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 Splitters .1 To be used only where indicated on Drawings. .2 Sheet metal enclosure with welded corners and formed hinged cover

suitable for locking in closed position, CSA Type 1 for dry, indoor locations. .3 Terminal sizes to match required size and number of incoming and outgoing

conductors as indicated. .4 At least three spare terminals on each set of lugs in splitters less than 400 A. 2.2 Junction and Pull Boxes .1 Galvanized welded steel, cast or other non-corroding construction with

gasketted screw-on flat covers for surface mounting. .2 Covers with 25 mm minimum extension all around, for flush-mounted pull

and junction boxes. .3 Junction boxes sized to accept more than two independent circuits will

contain suitable terminal strips to terminate conductors. Terminals shall be sized to match conductor size and amperage.

2.3 Cabinets .1 To be used only where indicated on Drawings or permitted by Owner and

Consultant .2 Type E: CSA type 1 for dry indoor locations of sheet steel galvanized or

factory painted, handle, lock and catch for surface mounting. For wet, damp or outdoor locations, CSA Type 3 sheet steel, gasketted hinged door and return flange overlapping sides, handle, lock and catch, for surface mounting.

.3 Type T: CSA type 1 for dry indoor locations of sheet steel galvanized or

factory painted, handle, lock and catch for surface mounting. For wet, damp or outdoor locations, CSA Type 3 sheet steel cabinet, with gasketted hinged

SPLITTERS, BOXES, CABINETS Mary McCormick Recreation Centre 66 Sheridan Avenue, Toronto Section 16131 - Page 2 of 3

door with latch and lock. Both types to be complete with 2 keys and a sheet steel backboard.

2.4 Grounding .1 All boxes to contain adequate provision for terminating grounding and

bonding conductors and to bond the box. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 General .1 Support boxes and cabinets independently of connecting conduits. Drywall,

wallboard, ceiling tile, decorative panelling and the like must not be relied upon for support. Where the building is required to be of non-combustible construction all box and cabinet supports shall also be non-combustible.

3.2 Splitter Installation .1 Splitter ratings and location only as specified on the drawings. .2 Install splitters and mount plumb, true and square to the building lines. .3 Extend splitters full length of equipment arrangement except where indicated

otherwise. 3.3 Junction, Pull Boxes and Cabinet Installation .1 Install pull boxes in inconspicuous but accessible locations such as

Mechanical, or Electrical rooms, or in hung ceiling space. .2 When installed in ceiling spaces, lockable access hatches must be provided

unless ceiling tile of the lay-in or snap-in type is used. .3 Mount cabinets only where indicated or permitted by Owner and Consultant,

with top not higher than 2 m above finished floor. .4 Install terminal blocks as required in Type T cabinets. .5 Install pull boxes so as not to exceed 30 m of conduit run between pull

boxes. .6 Grouped small junction boxes shall not be used in place of a single larger

junction box. .7 Where flush mounted, grout into masonry openings, and in all cases restore

finish to surrounding wall. 3.4 Terminal Boxes .1 Install control terminal boxes as indicated on the drawings or permitted by

Owner and Consultant.

SPLITTERS, BOXES, CABINETS Mary McCormick Recreation Centre 66 Sheridan Avenue, Toronto Section 16131 - Page 3 of 3 .2 Control terminals to be suitably sized for conductors being used. .3 Conductors under screw-type terminals to have ring or spade-type

compression terminations. .4 All control conductors to be numbered and Contractor to supply terminal

layout diagram. .5 Contractor to leave 20% of each size of terminal, but not less than one pair,

spare (empty). .6 Each spare control conductor to be labelled as such and terminated as

above at a separate terminal. .7 Terminal boxes to have hinged covers .8 Where terminal size and ratings are suitable control terminal boxes may be

used as junction boxes. 3.5 Identification .1 Provide equipment identification in accordance with Section 16010 -

Electrical - General Requirements. End of Section

OUTLET, & CONDUIT BOXES AND FITTINGS Mary McCormick Recreation Centre 66 Sheridan Avenue, Toronto Section 16132 - Page 1 of 3

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 Scope .1 Conform to other Sections of this Specification as applicable. .2 Conform to General Electrical Requirements, Section 16010 as applicable. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 Outlet and Conduit Boxes - General .1 Size boxes in accordance with the Ontario Electrical Safety Code. .2 (4") 102 mm square or larger outlet boxes as required for special devices. .3 Gang boxes where wiring devices are grouped. .4 Blank cover plates for boxes without wiring devices. .5 347 V outlet boxes for 347 V switching devices. .6 Combination boxes with barriers where outlets for more than one system are

grouped. 2.2 Sheet Steel Outlet Boxes

.1 Electro-galvanized steel single and multi gang flush device boxes for flush installation, minimum size (3" x 2" x 1-1/2") 76 x 50 x 38 mm or as indicated. (4") 102 mm square outlet boxes when more than one conduit enters one side with extension and plaster rings as required.

.2 Surface mounted utility boxes not to be used for finished interior work. .3 (4") 102 mm square or octagonal outlet boxes for lighting fixture outlets. .4 (4") 102 mm square outlet boxes with extension and plaster rings, where

required, for flush mounting devices in finished walls. 2.3 Masonry Boxes .1 If required, electro-galvanized steel masonry single and multi gang boxes for

devices flush mounted in exposed block walls. 2.4 Concrete Boxes .1 If required, electro-galvanized sheet steel concrete type boxes for flush

mount in concrete with matching extension and plaster rings as required.


2.5 Conduit Boxes .1 Cast FS or FD aluminium boxes with factory-threaded hubs, mounting feet

and gasketted covers for exterior surface wiring of switches, receptacle and devices, if required.

2.6 Non-Metallic Boxes .1 Moulded non-metallic boxes to be used only with non-metallic conduit and to

be of compatible material. .2 To be used outdoors only with suitable covers and gaskets, or in connection

with rigid PVC conduit, unless otherwise specified. 2.7 Fittings - General .1 Bushing and connectors with nylon insulated throats. .2 Knockout fillers to be used to prevent entry of debris. .3 Conduit outlet bodies for conduit up to (1- 1/4") 32 mm and pull boxes for

larger conduits. .4 Double locknuts and insulated bushings on sheet metal boxes. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 Installation .1 Support boxes independently of connecting conduits. Drywall, wallboard,

ceiling tile, decorative panelling and the like must not be relied upon for support. Where the building is required to be of non-combustible construction all box supports shall also be non-combustible.

.2 For flush installations mount outlets flush with finished wall using plaster

rings as necessary to permit wall finish to come within 6 mm of opening. .3 Provide correct size of openings in boxes for conduit, and armoured cable

connections. Reducing washers are not allowed. .4 Boxes to be flush mounted in finished areas, surface mounted in warehouse,

production and other unfinished areas, unless otherwise shown on drawings. .5 Boxes in warehouses, production areas and other areas exposed to

dampness, unheated or poorly heated shall be either non-metallic or conduit boxes with gasketted covers.

.6 Boxes containing end-of-line resistors shall have covers with a symbol or

label indicating the contents. .7 Box covers used for fire alarm wiring and components shall be red in colour.


.8 Boxes installed outside shall be weather-resistant, corrosion-resistant,

suitable for the purpose, with gasketted covers and mounted high enough to avoid contact with soil.

.9 Conduit fittings (condulets) not to be concealed. 3.2 Existing Installation .1 Existing device boxes may be reused if clean, undamaged, free from

corrosion, undisturbed and in full compliance with the requirements of the OESC and these specifications.

End of Section

PUBLIC ADDRESS SYSTEM Mary McCormick Recreation Centre 66 Sheridan Avenue, Toronto Section 16724 - Page 1 of 5

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section describes the new public address system that is required for the Mary McCormick Recreation Centre. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 16 - Electrical 1.2 REFERENCES .1 Codes and standards reference in this section refer to the latest edition thereof. .2 Industry Canada – Terminal Attachment Program .3 CS-03, Telecommunication Apparatus Compliance Specification, Issue 8. 1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION .1 Public address loud speaker system to incorporate:

.1 Voice paging

.2 Recorded music

.3 Broadcast programs

.4 Additional features as specified. .2 Operations

.1 Paging: .1 Voice paging from microphone overrides broadcast or recorded music

reproductions.

.2 Music: .1 Music from facility mediums, or external sources .2 Speaker selection made via toggle switch and relay assembly

.3 Systems in various configurations may be rack mounted or stand alone. 1.4 SUBMITTALS .1 Include, riser diagram, block diagram of complete public address system. .2 Public address system design criteria. 1.5. CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS .1 Provide operation and maintenance data for public address system for incorporation into manual

specified as part of closeout documents. .2 Include: .1 Operation instructions. .2 Description of system operation


.3 Description of each subsystem operation

.4 List specifying each piece of equipment in system or subsystem by its original manufacturer name and model number

.5 Part list specifying parts used in equipment by identification numbers that are standard to electronic industry.

1.6. TRAINING

.1 Arrange and pay for onsite lecture and demonstration by system manufacturer to train operating personnel in the use and maintenance of the system.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS

.1 To meet all CODE and ESA requirements.

.2 Materials to meet requirements of Division 16. 2.2 COMPONENTS

.1 Continuous duty cycle

.2 Modular system design

.3 Solid state, and suitable for rack mounting

.4 Maximum operating temperature: 65 degrees C.

.5 Finish: Standard

.6 Grounding conductor for system components. 2.3 EQUIPMENT RACK

.1 Rack, to accommodate system components, enclosed type, steel construction with internal mounting rails, wire and cable entrances with smooth edges protected by rubber edging, four adjustable rack levelling feet.

.2 Metal outlet raceway with colour coded outlets wired to 120V, 60Hz supply controlled by key type locking switch.

.3 Louvers and ventilation apertures in sides, top, back of rack for convection ventilation.

.4 Racks to contain but not necessarily limited to following components: .1 Monitor panel .2 AM/FM tuner .3 Reserved .4 Reserved .5 Relay assembly .6 Page/music selection panel .7 Timer: program time system with battery backup .8 Telephone paging interface equipment .9 Patch bay .10 Pre-amplifier mixer .11 Power amplifiers .12 Power supplies .13 Installation and service connection to various panels by plug-in type terminal

blocks with barriers and screw type terminals.


2.4. MONITOR PANEL .1 Monitor panel to contain VU meter, selector, 150mm monitor speaker and volume control

to provide audible and visual monitoring of sound programmes. .1 VU metre to have black scale for normal conditions, and red scale for overload

conditions. 2.5 MICROPHONE

.1 Microphone: close talking omni-directional, noise cancellation, dynamic type, complete with cradle, built-in preamplifier: .1 Frequency response: 100-6000 Hz. .2 Output level: approximately -55 dB. .3 Output impedance, balanced to ground, 150 ohms. .4 Housing, metal , desk mounting, finish standard. .5 Push-to-talk switch. .6 Magnetic dust shield.

2.6 PRE_AMPLIFIER MIXER

.1 Modular design. .2 Inputs:

.1 6-continuously variable microphone volume controls.

.2 1-continuously variable master gain control.

.3 1-base tone control with centre position flat and 10 dB boost to 10 dB cut either side.

.4 1-treble tone controls switch with centre position flat and 10 dB boost to 10 dB cut either side.

.3 Mixer also to operate on 12 to 24 V DC.

.4 Output volts: 1 V rms at less than 1% distortion.

.5 Frequency response: 30-20,000 Hz plus or minus 1 dB at full output. .6 Hum and noise level: -65 dB minimum at full output. 2.7 PATCH BAY

.1 Provide 2 jacks corresponding to input and output of every signal processing equipment that is installed in rack.

2.8 TELEPHONE PAGING EQUIPMENT WITH POWER SUPPLY UNITS

.1 Lets person select and page any area or all areas from their telephone. .1 Decodes typical dual tone multi-frequencies (DTMF) for selection of area or areas

for paging. .2 Has facility to provide background music to areas not being paged.

.3 Has facility to let emergency announcement override page in zones being paged and background music in zones not being paged.

.4 Automatically starts page when it detect typical telephone ring signal.

.5 Automatically ends page when it detects absence of voice signal for specific length of time.

.6 Compatible power supply unit.

.7 Certified by Industry Canada to CS-03 for direct connection to telephone network.


2.9 POWER BOOSER AMPLIFIER .1 Overload and output short circuit protection. 2.10 POWER SUPPLY .1 Power supply unit, well filtered, regulated, constant voltage under load. 2.11 RECORD CHANGER .1 CD Player as specified on the drawings. 2.12 RECORDER

.1 record and playback, rack mounted, monaural, continuous loop tape unit complete with microphone. VU metre and record control. .1 Used to broadcast pre-recorded announcements or music over public address

system. .2 Dolby C noise reduction circuitry. .3 When broadcasting messages cue tones used to indicate start and stop of each

message. At end of each message, playback unit switches automatically to fast forward mode until beginning of next message is detected.

.4 Recorder capable of being switched to fast-forward mode manually.

.5 Built-in erase feature. 2.13 AM/FM .1 Controls and indicators, on front panel:

.1 AM/FM tuning control. .2 Power on/off switch .3 Inter-channel hush in/out switch. .4 AM/FM selector switch .5 Peak metre .6 FM zero centre switch .7 Bass, treble, volume controls. .8 Tuning metre for AM/FM. .2 Receptacles on rear of panel: .1 Audio output jack. .2 AM/FM antenna connections. .3 FM channel. .1 Tuning range: 87 to 108.5 MHz .2 Hum and noise level 70 dB below 100% mod .3 Frequency response: 20 to 20,000 Hz plus or minus 0.5dB. .4 Antenna 300 ohmns balances or 72 ohms unbalanced, as required. .5 Mon sensitivity: 15 dB for 20 dB quieting, 17 dB for 50 dB s/n. .6 SCA adapter. .4 AM channel: .1 Tuning range: 330 to 1650 kHz.


.2 Hum and noise level: 56 dB below 100% mod. .3 Frequency response: -6 dB at 4.0 kHz. .4 Unable sensitivity: 500 microvolts per metre. .5 Distoration: less than 0.3% im at 100% mod.

2.14 ADDITIONAL FEATURES .1 Leased wire background music source. .2 Tone signal generator for time and alarm signals .3 Interface with telephone PBX or Centrex as indicated/required.

.4 Bridging control to provide facilities between local sound source and sound control rack. .1 Three pole, three position, non-shorting type switch with positions marked

‘1’, ‘off’, ‘2’ to allow programmes to originate, remain in or terminate. .2 Volume control to provide local volume regulations of programme received

from console. .3 Programme control relay.

.5 Notch filters for acoustic treatment. 2.15 ASSISTIVE LISTENING SYSTEM

.1 Transmitter with carrying case, battery charger, patch cable and personal receivers with rechargeable nickel cadmium batteries, number of receivers as indicated.

.2 Assistive listening transmitter to be rack mounted in PA system cabinet with antenna

protruding above cabinet. Fabricate mounting plate and hardware (black) as required to support transmitter.

PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION .1 Remove the existing Public Address System.

.2 Install equipment in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. Speakers to be provided in all hallways, public areas, fitness areas, pool, meeting rooms, changerooms and washrooms.

3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL .1 Perform tests in accordance with applicable standards. .2 Provide complete commissioning of the system.

End of Section

ONTARIO PROVINCIAL STANDARD SPECIFICATION

METRICOPSS 351

NOVEMBER 2005

CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION FOR CONCRETE SIDEWALK

TABLE OF CONTENTS 351.01 SCOPE 351.02 REFERENCES 351.03 DEFINITIONS 351.04 SUBMISSIONS AND DESIGN REQUIREMENTS - Not Used 351.05 MATERIALS 351.06 EQUIPMENT 351.07 CONSTRUCTION 351.08 QUALITY ASSURANCE - Not Used 351.09 MEASUREMENT FOR PAYMENT 351.10 BASIS OF PAYMENT APPENDICES 351-A Commentary 351.01 SCOPE This specification covers the requirements for the construction of concrete sidewalks. 351.01.01 Significance and Use of Appendices Appendices are not a mandatory part of the specification unless invoked by the Owner. Appendix 351-A is a commentary appendix to provide designers with information on the use of the specification in a Contract.

Page 1 Rev. Date: 11/2005 OPSS 351

351.02 REFERENCES This specification refers to the following standards, specifications, or publications: Ontario Provincial Standard Specifications, Construction OPSS 206 Grading OPSS 314 Untreated Granular, Subbase, Base, Surface, Shoulder and Stockpiling OPSS 408 Adjusting or Rebuilding Maintenance Holes, Catch Basins, Ditch Inlets, and Valve

Chambers OPSS 501 Compacting OPSS 904 Concrete Structures OPSS 919 Formwork and Falsework Ontario Provincial Standard Specifications, Material OPSS 1010 Aggregates - Base, Subbase, Select Subgrade, and Backfill Material OPSS 1212 Hot Poured Rubberized Asphalt Joint Sealing Compound OPSS 1308 Joint Filler in Concrete OPSS 1315 White Pigmented Curing Compounds for Concrete OPSS 1350 Concrete - Materials and Production ASTM International C 171-03 Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete 351.03 DEFINITIONS For the purpose of this specification, the following definition applies: Sidewalk Bay means the area between two transverse joints, regardless of the type of joint. 351.05 MATERIALS 351.05.01 Concrete Concrete shall be according to OPSS 1350 and the following: Class of Concrete Nominal 28-Day compressive strength of 30 MPa Coarse Aggregate 19 mm nominal maximum size Air Content 7.0% ± 1.5%, measured prior to placement Slump 70 ± 20 mm 351.05.02 Expansion Joint Material Expansion joint filler material shall be asphalt impregnated fibreboard having a minimum of 12 mm thickness and shall be according to OPSS 1308, Type A. Hot poured rubberized asphalt joint sealing compound shall be according to OPSS 1212.


351.05.03 Subgrade Moisture Vapour Barrier Subgrade moisture vapour barrier shall be according to ASTM C 171. 351.05.04 Granular Material used for sidewalk granular base shall be according to OPSS 1010. 351.05.05 Curing Compound Curing compound shall be according to OPSS 1315. 351.06 EQUIPMENT 351.06.01 Forms Forms shall be according to OPSS 919. 351.06.02 Slip Forming The equipment used for slip forming shall have automatic horizontal and vertical alignment controls to be used in conjunction with at least one stringline. 351.07 CONSTRUCTION 351.07.01 General The work required for concrete sidewalk shall include earthwork, granular base, compaction, preparation work, formwork, Utility adjustment and isolation, concrete placing and finishing, jointing, curing, and protection. Excavation and embankment construction shall be according to OPSS 206. 351.07.02 Grading Tolerances 351.07.02.01 Subgrade When the subgrade is prepared for: a) granular base, the finished subgrade surface shall be within a 15 mm deviation measured at any point

on a 3 m long straight edge. b) sidewalk, the finished subgrade surface shall be within a 12 mm deviation from the specified grade

and cross-section, with the surface being within a 10 mm deviation measured at any point on a 3 m long straight edge.

351.07.02.02 Granular Base Placement of granular base material shall be according to OPSS 314.


When a granular base is prepared for sidewalk, the finished granular surface shall be within a 12 mm deviation from the specified grade and cross-section, with the surface being within a 10 mm deviation measured at any point on a 3 m long straight edge. 351.07.03 Compaction Compaction shall be according to OPSS 501. 351.07.04 Preparation Work 351.07.04.01 General Before placing concrete on a) subgrade, the subgrade shall be wetted down, except where clays occur. b) granular base, the granular immediately ahead of the concrete placing operation shall be wetted

down thoroughly. The wetting down shall be carried out without leaving standing water. Alternatively, a subgrade moisture vapour barrier may be placed to completely cover the subgrade under the sidewalk. Adjacent strips shall be lapped 100 mm minimum and ends shall be lapped 300 mm minimum. 351.07.05 Form Setting Throughout their entire length, forms shall be set true to the lines, grades, and thickness specified in the Contract Documents and in direct contact with the subgrade or granular base. 351.07.06 Utility Adjustment Work done on adjustment of maintenance holes, valve chambers, and catch basins shall be according to OPSS 408. Utility appurtenances shall be adjusted flush with the surface of the new sidewalk. Appurtenances maintained by Utility companies other than the Owner shall be adjusted by the Utility company concerned under arrangement by the Contract Administrator. The Contractor shall excavate to the edge of the appurtenance and indicate the required grade of the new sidewalk. 351.07.07 Utility Isolation in Sidewalk The required Utility isolations shall be constructed in the concrete sidewalk to the details and at the locations specified in the Contract Documents. 351.07.08 Placing Concrete Concrete shall be placed, consolidated, and finished in a manner that ensures uniform consistency. Any excess concrete beyond the sidewalk edge shall be removed. Concrete shall be placed by a continuous pour method. Where concrete placing is interrupted for more than 45 minutes a 12 mm thick asphalt impregnated fibreboard joint filler shall be installed vertically across the sidewalk width before resuming concrete placing. Concrete shall not be placed against any material which is at a temperature above 35°C or against any material whose temperature is below 0°C.


351.07.09 Concrete Finishing Finishing of the concrete surface shall take place while the concrete is sufficiently plastic to achieve the desired grades, elevations, and texture. The surface of the sidewalk shall be uniform, dense, free from undulations and projections, struck off true to grade and cross-section, and finished with a float. Excessive fines and water shall not be drawn to the surface. Surface evaporation retardants shall not be used as an aid for finishing concrete. The application of water, cement, or combination of both to the concrete surface shall not be permitted as a finishing aid. Localized defects shall be repaired using concrete. The sidewalk shall be given a broomed texture after finishing with a float. The presence of footprints or other marks in the completed sidewalk shall require sawcutting, removal, and replacement of the complete sidewalk bay. 351.07.10 Joints 351.07.10.01 General Longitudinal and transverse joints shall be constructed of the type and at the locations specified in the Contract Documents. The concrete adjacent to all formwork and joints shall be finished with a tool that produces a 5 mm rounded edge and a smooth, horizontal surface with a maximum width of 50 mm. All tooling shall be uniform and straight and shall be depressed to a maximum of 1 mm below the adjacent surface. Any ridges along the tooled marks shall be removed. 351.07.10.02 Dummy Joints Dummy joints shall be hand formed using a 5 mm radius dummy joint tool. 351.07.10.03 Contraction Joints Contraction joints shall be placed at every third dummy joint and shall be sawcut or formed to a depth that is 0.25 of the sidewalk thickness. When the sidewalk width is 2.5 m or greater, a longitudinal contraction joint shall be sawn or formed at a maximum spacing interval of 1.5 m. 351.07.10.04 Expansion Joints Expansion joints shall be constructed to the full depth of the slab. Expansion joints shall be filled with expansion joint material and shall be clean and dry at the time of construction. Expansion joints shall be constructed where the sidewalk abuts a rigid object or changes direction.


351.07.11 Identification Stamp At the request of the Contract Administrator, the Contractor shall clearly and legibly mark with an approved stamp each end of the work, and at other places as directed. The stamp shall be centred on the sidewalk bay next to and parallel to a transverse joint. The stamp shall identify the Contractor's name and the year of construction. 351.07.12 Concrete Curing Concrete shall be cured using a membrane-curing compound applied according to OPSS 904. For the purpose of membrane-curing compound application, the application rate shall be 0.2 L/m2. 351.07.13 Cold Weather Concreting The placing and protection of concrete sidewalks in cold weather shall be according to OPSS 904. 351.07.14 Protection of Sidewalk Vehicular traffic shall be restricted from crossing the sidewalk after the concrete has been placed for a minimum period of three days or until the concrete has reached 75% of the specified 28-Day compressive strength. 351.07.15 Sidewalk Tolerances The surface of the concrete, after texturing, shall be within a 6 mm deviation measured at any point on a 3 m long straight edge. The minimum acceptable thickness of the sidewalk shall be the specified thickness minus 8 mm. If the thickness deficiency exceeds 8 mm, the sidewalk shall be removed and replaced. Core samples of the finished concrete may be taken to establish the actual thickness of the slab at locations determined by the Contract Administrator. Unacceptable areas of sidewalk identified by the Contract Administrator shall require the sawcutting, removal, and replacement of the complete sidewalk bay by the Contractor. 351.07.16 Field Sampling and Testing of Concrete Field sampling and testing of concrete shall be according to OPSS 904. 351.07.17 Management of Excess Material Management of excess material shall be as specified in the Contract Documents. 351.09 MEASUREMENT FOR PAYMENT 351.09.01 Actual Measurement 351.09.01.01 Concrete Sidewalk Concrete sidewalk will be measured in place by area in square metres.


351.09.02 Plan Quantity Measurement When measurement is by Plan Quantity, such measurement shall be based on the units shown in the clause under Actual Measurement. 351.10 BASIS OF PAYMENT 351.10.01 Concrete Sidewalk - Item Payment at the Contract price for the above tender item shall be full compensation for all labour, Equipment and Material to do the work. Repair or removal and replacement of an unacceptable sidewalk bay shall be completed at no extra cost to the Owner. 351.10.02 Excavation Excavation shall be paid under the tender items Earth Excavation Grading or Rock Excavation Grading as specified in OPSS 206. 351.10.03 Utility Adjustment Adjustment of Utility appurtenances shall be paid under the appropriate items according to OPSS 408. No payment shall be made for appurtenances adjusted by the Utility company.


Rev. Date: 11/2005 OPSS 351

Appendix 351-A, Commentary for OPSS 351, November 2005 Note: This appendix does not form part of the standard specification. It is intended to provide

information to the designer on the use of this specification in a contract. Designer Action/Considerations The designer should specify the following in the Contract Documents: - Line, grade, and thickness requirements of concrete sidewalk. (351.07.05 and 351.07.15) - Details and locations of required Utility isolations. (351.07.07) - Type and location requirements of longitudinal and transverse joints. (351.07.10.01) The designer should ensure that the Ontario Provincial Standards General Conditions of Contract and the 100 Series General Specifications are included in the Contract Documents. Related Ontario Provincial Standard Drawings OPSD 310.010 Concrete Sidewalk OPSD 310.020 Concrete Sidewalk Adjacent to Curb and Gutter OPSD 310.030 Concrete Sidewalk Ramps at Intersections OPSD 310.040 Utility Isolation in Concrete Sidewalks OPSD 310.050 Concrete Sidewalk Driveway Entrance Details OPSD 310.060 Concrete Pedestrian Crossover at Signalized Intersections

ONTARIO PROVINCIAL STANDARD SPECIFICATION

METRICOPSS 1010APRIL 2004

MATERIAL SPECIFICATION FOR AGGREGATES - BASE, SUBBASE,

SELECT SUBGRADE, AND BACKFILL MATERIAL

TABLE OF CONTENTS

1010.01 SCOPE 1010.02 REFERENCES 1010.03 DEFINITIONS 1010.04 SUBMISSION AND DESIGN REQUIREMENTS 1010.05 MATERIALS 1010.06 EQUIPMENT - Not Used 1010.07 PRODUCTION 1010.08 QUALITY ASSURANCE 1010.09 OWNER PURCHASE OF MATERIAL - Not Used APPENDICES 1010-A Commentary 1010-B Fine Aggregate Test Data Form 1010-C Coarse Aggregate Test Data Form 1010.01 SCOPE This specification covers the material requirements for aggregates for use in base, subbase, select subgrade, granular surface, shouldering, and backfill material. Procedures for QC and QA and referee testing protocols are incorporated. 1010.01.01 Significance and Use of Appendices Appendices are not a mandatory part of this specification unless invoked by the Owner. Appendix 1010-A is a commentary appendix to provide designers with information on the use of the specification in a Contract.


Appendix 1010-B is an additional information option that is invoked only when referenced in the Contract Documents by the Owner. This appendix contains a form for reporting fine aggregate test data, other than for LS-602 and LS-702. Appendix 1010-C is an additional information option that is invoked only when referenced in the Contract Documents by the Owner. This appendix contains a form for reporting coarse aggregate test data, other than for LS-602. 1010.02 REFERENCES This specification refers to the following standards, specifications, or publications: Ontario Provincial Standard Specification, Material OPSS 1001 Aggregates - General Ministry of Transportation, Ontario, Publications MTO Laboratory Testing Manual LS-602 Sieve Analysis of Aggregates LS-607 Percent Crushed Particles in Processed Coarse Aggregate LS-609 Petrographic Analysis of Coarse Aggregate LS-614 Freezing and Thawing of Coarse Aggregate LS-616 Petrographic Analysis of Fine Aggregate LS-617 Percent Particles with Two or More Crushed Faces and Uncrushed Particles in Processed

Coarse Aggregate LS-618 The Resistance of Coarse Aggregate to Degradation by Abrasion in the Micro-Deval

Apparatus LS-619 Resistance of Fine Aggregate to Degradation by Abrasion in the Micro-Deval Apparatus LS-621 Determination of Amount of Asphalt Coated Particles in Coarse Aggregate LS-624 The Use of Control Charts for Construction Aggregates LS-625 Sampling of Granular Materials LS-702 Determination of Particle Size Analysis of Soils LS-703/704 Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit and Plasticity Index of Soils LS-709 Determination of Permeability of Granular Soils 1010.03 DEFINITIONS For the purpose of this specification, the following definitions apply: Air-Cooled Blast-Furnace Slag means the material resulting from solidification of molten blast-furnace slag under atmospheric conditions. Subsequent cooling may be accelerated by application of water to the solidified surface. Bench means a ledge parallel to stratigraphic bedding that in quarries forms a single level of operation above which rock is excavated from a contiguous face. Business Day means any Day except Saturdays, Sundays, and statutory holidays. Control Chart means a graphical chart used to monitor the central tendency and variability of a material characteristic in order to control production. Ceramic means porcelain, china, and whiteware, e.g., sinks, toilets, and bidets made from clay and silica fired at a high temperature, excluding clay brick and tile, free of organic materials, metal, and plastic.


Deleterious Material means materials from the recycling stream other than glass, ceramic, reclaimed asphalt pavement, and reclaimed concrete materials that includes but is not limited to the following: wood, clay brick, clay tile, plastic, gypsum, gypsum plaster, and wallboard. Free of Clay means the amount of material with a particle diameter less than 2 µm shall not be greater than 1% of the total sample when tested according to LS-702. Glass means processed glass obtained from the recycling stream that is free of organic materials, metal, and plastic. Granular A means a set of requirements for dense graded aggregates intended for use as granular base within the pavement structure, granular shouldering, and backfill. Granular B means a set of requirements for well-graded aggregates intended for use as granular subbase within the pavement structure and granular backfill. Granular B may be either Type I or Type II. Granular M means a set of requirements for dense graded aggregates intended for use on unpaved road surfaces and for the maintenance of unpaved shoulders. Granular O means a set of requirements for open graded aggregates intended only for use as a free draining granular base within the pavement structure. Granular S means a set of requirements for dense graded aggregates intended only for use as surface dressing of low volume unpaved roads with an AADT less than 200. Nickel Slag means the non-metallic co-product resulting from the production of nickel. Physical Property means an inherent attribute or feature of an aggregate or soil material. Tests are carried out to determine a materials resistance to weathering or degradation or both. Pit-Run Material means material excavated directly from an existing bank in a pit and delivered to the job site without further processing, e.g., crushing, screening, washing, and classifying. Production Characteristic means an attribute or feature of an aggregate or soil material, including gradation, that is introduced into the material through the manufacturing process, e.g., crushing, screening, and, blending. Quality Assurance (QA) means a system or series of activities carried out by the Owner to ensure that materials received meet the specified requirements. Quality Control (QC) means a system or a series of activities performed by the Contractor to ensure that materials supplied meet the specified requirements. Random Numbers means numbers generated by chance and recorded in random number tables. Reclaimed Asphalt Pavement (RAP) means processed hot mix asphalt material that is recovered by partial or full depth removal. Reclaimed Concrete Material (RCM) means removed or processed old Portland cement concrete. Referee Testing means testing by an independent laboratory selected by the Contract Administrator and acceptable to the Contractor, the results of which are used for resolving differences between QC and QA testing. Select Subgrade Material (SSM) means a set of requirements for well-graded non-plastic aggregates used to replace poor subgrade materials and as swamp backfill.


Statistical Control means when all sources of assignable variation have been removed, that is when the variability of the process is confined to chance variation alone. Steel Slag means the non-metallic co-product resulting from the production of steel in a basic oxygen or electric arc furnace. 1010.04 SUBMISSION and DESIGN REQUIREMENTS 1010.04.01 Submission of Test Data The Contractor shall have test results available for the aggregates to be used in the work. At the request of the Contract Administrator, the Contractor shall make available or submit QC test results prior to the delivery of the material. Test results shall be submitted by either the stockpile/pit-run method or control chart method. All test data forms shall be legible. Test data for each aggregate product shall be managed independently. Where more than one source is used for supplying materials, test data from each source and product shall be managed independently. 1010.05 MATERIALS 1010.05.01 General The requirements of OPSS 1001 shall apply to this specification. Materials shall conform to this specification when tested according to the MTO Laboratory Testing Manual. All aggregate source materials shall be clean hard durable particles free of earth, humus, and clay, e.g., coatings, lumps, and fragments. Where reclaimed materials are permitted, they shall be homogeneously blended. Where RCM is permitted, RCM shall not contain loose reinforcing materials. Where air-cooled blast furnace slag, nickel slag, and RAP containing steel slag aggregates are used, site-specific notification shall be given by the Contractor to the Ontario Ministry of the Environment (MOE). Glass and ceramic material shall be processed to remove all deleterious organic materials. One hundred percent of the processed glass and ceramic material shall pass the 13.2 mm sieve. Steel slag shall not be used. 1010.05.02 Granular A, Granular M, and Granular S Granular A, Granular M, and Granular S may be produced by crushing one or more of the following: a) Quarried bedrock. b) Naturally formed deposits of sand, gravel, and cobbles. c) RAP up to 30% by mass. d) RCM. e) Air-cooled blast-furnace slag or nickel slag. f) Glass or ceramic materials up to 15% by mass combined. Granular A and Granular M may contain up to 100% RCM but shall not contain more than 30% by mass of asphalt coated particles and not more than a combined total of 15% by mass of glass and ceramic material. The combined amount of deleterious material shall not exceed a total of 1% by mass.


Granular A and Granular M containing RAP with steel slag aggregates shall be acceptable for unpaved gravel shoulders only. 1010.05.03 Granular B 1010.05.03.01 General Granular B may be either Type I or Type II as described below. 1010.05.03.02 Granular B Type I Granular B Type I may be produced from naturally formed deposits of sand, gravel, and cobbles or by crushing one or more of the following: a) Quarried bedrock. b) Air-cooled blast-furnace slag or nickel slag. c) RCM. d) RAP up to 30% by mass. e) Glass or ceramic materials up to 15% by mass combined. Granular B Type I may contain up to 100% RCM but shall not contain more than 30% by mass of asphalt coated particles. Granular B Type I may not contain more than a combined total of 15% by mass of glass and ceramic material. The combined amount of deleterious material shall not exceed 1% by mass. RAP containing steel slag aggregates shall not be allowed. 1010.05.03.03 Granular B Type Il Granular B Type II shall only be obtained from crushing quarried bedrock, air-cooled blast furnace slag, or nickel slag. Steel slag and reclaimed materials shall not be used in the production of Granular B Type II. 1010.05.03.04 Granular O Granular O shall only be produced by crushing quarried bedrock, or by crushing cobbles or boulders retained on the 50 mm sieve. 1010.05.03.05 Select Subgrade Material Select subgrade material shall only be non-plastic granular or sandy type soil produced from naturally formed deposits. 1010.07 Production 1010.07.01 Aggregate Processing, Handling, and Stockpiling Aggregates that have become mixed with foreign matter of any description, or aggregates that have become mixed with each other shall not be used and shall be removed from the stockpile immediately. When a change in the character of the materials occurs or when the performance of materials that meet the requirements of this specification is found to be unsatisfactory, the use of the materials shall be discontinued until the Contractor, with the approval of the Contract Administrator, proves the source to be satisfactory.


Once a stockpile has been produced, sampled, and tested for QC under the procedure for stockpile/pit-run method, no further materials shall be added to the stockpile. Stockpiles produced, sampled, and tested under the procedure for control chart method may continue to have materials added provided that sampling and testing show that materials in the stockpile conform to this specification and that the process remains in statistical control. 1010.07.02 Quality Control 1010.07.02.01 General The Contractor shall be responsible for all QC sampling and testing required to show conformance of the aggregates with this specification. Either the stockpile/pit-run method or control chart method shall be used. These records shall be made available to the Contract Administrator upon request. Where the stockpile/pit-run method has been selected, test data shall be obtained from samples taken from stockpiled or pit-run material to be used in the work. Where the control chart method has been selected, control charts shall be prepared in accordance with LS-624 or similar method. Each control chart shall contain information regarding control limits, specification limits, target values, testing frequencies, sampling locations, and time period over which the testing has taken place. Each control chart shall include individual test data of the most recent sample indicated on the chart. 1010.07.02.02 Laboratory Requirements The Contractor shall select all QC laboratories and shall be responsible for all costs associated with the testing for QC requirements. An acceptable laboratory conducting tests for physical properties shall be one that holds a current certificate from Canadian Council of Independent Laboratories (CCIL) as Type D for the applicable test methods and also participates in the Annual MTO Proficiency Sample Testing Program for the specific tests, except LS-616 and LS-709. An acceptable laboratory to conduct tests for gradation according to LS-602 and percent crushed particles according to LS-607 shall be one who holds a current certificate from CCIL as Type C. Testing shall be conducted by qualified laboratory staff that hold a valid aggregate testing certificate from CCIL. Equivalent alternate laboratory and technician certifications or laboratory proficiency testing programs may be used to demonstrate similar requirements provided they are acceptable to the Contract Administrator. 1010.07.03 Physical Properties 1010.07.03.01 Stockpile/Pit-Run Method Testing demonstrating conformance of the aggregates with Table 1 shall be completed for each quantity of material produced according to the following schedule: a) For the first 25,000 tonnes of aggregate produced. b) For the next 50,000 tonnes of aggregate produced. c) For each 100,000 tonnes of aggregate produced thereafter. Further testing is required whenever material is produced from a new source or a new bench in a quarry or whenever a significant change in aggregate production or material occurs that may affect the quality of material.


1010.07.03.02 Control Chart Method The Contractor shall use a Type 1 control chart as defined in LS-624 or similar method for each physical property requirement shown in Table 1. When the control chart has been established, the minimum frequency of sampling and further testing shall be as follows: a) Annually, i.e., obtained within the past 12 months, where the mean value of the physical property is less

than 75% of the limit given in Table 1 and the Type 1 control chart demonstrates the process to be in statistical control; or

b) Three times per year, spaced evenly throughout the aggregate production season, where the mean value

of the physical property is greater than 75% of the limit given in Table 1 or the Type 1 control chart demonstrates the process to be out of statistical control.

1010.07.04 Production Characteristics 1010.07.04.01 Stockpile/Pit-Run Method Testing demonstrating conformance of the aggregates with Table 2 shall be completed for each 1,000 tonnes of material produced. 1010.07.04.02 Control Chart Method A Type 1 or Type 2 control chart according to LS-624 or similar method for each applicable requirement shown in Table 2 may be used. Type 1 control charts shall cover production of at least 20,000 tonnes of material. Type 2 control charts shall cover production of at least 80,000 tonnes of material. New or revised control charts shall be required for each successive production and delivery quantity of material, as applicable. a) Where a Type 1 chart is used, the minimum number of test results shall be twenty (n=20). When this

control chart has been established, the frequency of sampling and further testing shall be as follows:

i. When the mean value (n=20) of the test results is within the limit and the process is shown to be in statistical control, the frequency of sampling and testing may be decreased to meet the quantities shown in Table 3; otherwise,

ii. The minimum frequency shall be every 1,000 tonnes of material produced. b) Where a Type 2 chart is used, the minimum number of subgroups shall be twenty (k=20). When this

control chart has been established, the frequency of sampling and further testing shall be as follows:

i. When the process is shown to be in statistical control, frequency of sampling and testing may be decreased to meet the quantities shown in Table 3; otherwise,

ii. The minimum frequency shall be every 1,000 tonnes of material produced. 1010.08 QUALITY ASSURANCE 1010.08.01 General The Contract Administrator shall be allowed access to all sampling locations and reserves the right to take a QA sample at any time with notice to the Contractor. The Contract Administrator may elect to carry out testing at the QA laboratory to ensure that materials used in the work conform to the requirements of this specification. Test data for each aggregate type shall be managed independently. Where more than one source is used for supplying materials, test data from each source, and product shall be managed independently.


1010.08.02 Sampling Sampling shall be according to LS-625 taken at a time and location determined by the Contract Administrator. Duplicate samples shall be obtained and sealed by the Contractor in the presence of the Contract Administrator. In the event that the Contractor is unavailable to take the sample, no further materials shall be placed in the work until the QA sample has been taken. Samples shall be of sufficient mass of the material to conduct the necessary gradation and physical property tests. Each QA sample shall meet the requirements of Table 4 and shall be clearly identified both inside and outside of the container. When materials contain blended or reclaimed aggregates or both, QA sampling shall be performed on the final blended product. 1010.08.03 QA Laboratory Requirements The Owner will designate the QA laboratories and will be responsible for all costs associated with QA testing. An acceptable laboratory conducting tests for physical properties shall be one that holds a current certificate from CCIL as Type D for the applicable test methods and also participates in the Annual MTO Proficiency Sample Testing Program for the specific tests, except for LS-616 and LS-709. An acceptable laboratory to conduct tests for gradation according to LS-602 and percent crushed particles according to LS-607 shall be one that holds a current certificate from CCIL as Type C. Testing shall be conducted by qualified laboratory staff that hold a valid aggregate testing certificate from CCIL. Equivalent alternate laboratory and technician certifications or laboratory proficiency testing programs may be used to demonstrate similar requirements provided they are acceptable to the Contract Administrator. 1010.08.04 Acceptance When QA testing has not been carried out, the material shall be deemed acceptable. Otherwise, QA test results or referee test results shall be used for acceptance purposes as indicated below. When QA test results show that the materials meet the applicable requirements of Table 1 and Table 2, the material will be accepted. When QA test results show that the material does not meet the applicable requirements of Table 1 and Table 2, the Contract Administrator shall notify the Contractor that materials represented by the test results shall not be accepted. This notification will take place in writing within 3 business days of receipt of the non-conforming data. At the discretion of the Contract Administrator, irrespective of non-compliance with the requirements of Table 1 and Table 2, aggregates may be accepted on the basis of satisfactory field performance. 1010.08.05 Referee Testing When QA test results do not meet the requirements of this specification, the Contractor has the option of invoking referee testing of the test result that fails to meet the requirements. The Contractor shall notify the Contract Administrator of the selected option within 2 business days following notification of unacceptable material.


The Contract Administrator shall select a referee laboratory acceptable to the Contractor within 3 business days following the Contractor's notification to invoke referee testing. Referee samples shall be delivered to the referee laboratory from the QA laboratory by the Contract Administrator. The sealed sample shall be opened in the presence of the Contractor and the Contract Administrator. If referee materials are not available, the Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining and submitting new samples to the referee laboratory from a location to be decided by the Contract Administrator. The Contract Administrator shall be present to witness the sampling. Referee testing shall be carried out in the presence of the Contract Administrator. Where applicable, the referee laboratory shall also test a control aggregate sample for each test method required. The Contractor may observe the testing at no cost to the Owner. Comments on the nonconformity of the test methods must be made and corrected at the time of testing. If the testing cannot be corrected or if agreement on the procedure cannot be reached, the testing shall be postponed until the procedure is corrected or agreement between the parties is reached. Referee test results shall be binding on both the Owner and the Contractor. When a referee test result shows that the aggregates do not meet the requirements of this specification, the material represented by the test result, including materials in existing stockpiles or in the work shall not be accepted. The Contractor shall remove the material from the work at no cost to the Owner. When a referee test result shows that the aggregates are in complete conformance with the requirements of this specification, the material represented by the sample shall be accepted. The Owner will be responsible for the cost of referee testing provided that the referee test results show that the aggregates meet the applicable specifications. Otherwise, the Contractor shall be responsible for the costs.


Table 1 Physical Property Requirements

Laboratory Test MTO Test

Number Granular

O Granular

A Granular

S Granular B Type I and

Type II

Granular M

Select Subgrade Material

Coarse Aggregate Petrographic Requirement

LS-609 (Note 2) (Note 1) (Note 2)

(Note 2) (Note 1) (Note 2)

(Note 1) (Note 2)

(Note 2)

Freeze-Thaw Loss, % maximum

LS-614 15 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A

Fine Aggregate Petrographic Requirement

LS-616 LS-709 (Note 3)

Micro-Deval Abrasion Coarse Aggregate loss, % maximum

LS-618 21 25 25 30 (Note 4)

25 30 (Note 4)

Micro-Deval Abrasion Fine Aggregate loss, % maximum

LS-619 25 30 30 35 30 N/A

Plasticity Index LS-704 0 0 0 0 0 0 Percent crushed, minimum

LS-607 100 50 50 N/A 50 N/A

2 or more crushed faces, % minimum

LS-617 85 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A

Asphalt Coated Particles, % maximum

LS-621 N/A 30 30 (Note 5) 30 N/A

Notes: 1. Granular A, B Type I, or M may contain up to 15% by mass of crushed glass and ceramic material combined. 2. Granular A, B Type I, M, and S shall not contain more than 1% by mass of deleterious material. Granular O,

Granular B Type II, and SSM shall not contain more than 0.1% by mass of wood. Petrographic classification of rock type need not be reported. This requirement is only to be reported when such material is present.

3. Test required for materials north of the French and Mattawa Rivers only. For materials with greater than 5.0%

passing the 75 µm sieve, the amount of mica passing the 150 µm sieve and retained on the 75 µm sieve, shall not exceed 10% of the material in that sieve fraction unless either testing according to LS-709 determines permeability values to be greater than 1.0 x 10-4 cm/s or field experience show satisfactory performance. Prior data demonstrating compliance with this requirement will be acceptable provided such testing has been done within the past five years and that field performance of these materials has been satisfactory.

4. The coarse aggregate Micro-Deval abrasion loss test requirements will be waived if the material has more than

80% passing the 4.75 mm sieve. 5. Granular B Type I may contain up to 30% asphalt coated particles. Granular B Type II shall not contain RAP or

asphalt coated products.


Table 2 Gradation Requirements - Percent Passing

Granular

B (Note 1)

MTO Test

Number Sieve

O

A

S

Type I (Note 2)

Type II

M

Select SubgradeMaterial

150 mm N/A N/A N/A 100 N/A N/A 100

106 mm N/A N/A N/A N/A 100 N/A N/A

37.5 mm 100 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A

26.5 mm 95-100 100 100 50-100 50-100 N/A 50-100

19.0 mm 80-95 85-100 (87-100*)

90-100 N/A N/A 100 N/A

13.2 mm 60-80 65-90 (75-95*)

75-100 N/A N/A 75-95 N/A

9.5 mm

50-70 50-73 (60-83*)

60-85 N/A N/A 55-80 N/A

4.75 mm 20-45 35-55 (40-60*)

40-60 20-100 20-55 35-55 20-100

1.18 mm 0-15 15-40 20-40 10-100 10-40 15-40 10-100

300 µm

N/A 5-22 11-25 2-65 5-22 5-22 5-95

150 µm N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A 2.0-65.0

LS-602

75 µm 0-5.0 2.0-8.0 (2.0-10.0**)

9.0-15.0 (9.0-17.0**)

0-8.0 (0-10.0**)

0-10.0 2.0-8.0 (2.0-10.0**)

0-25.0

Notes: 1. Where Granular B is used for granular backfill for pipe subdrains, 100% of the material shall pass the 37.5 mm

sieve. 2. Where RAP is included in Granular B Type I, 100% of the RAP shall pass the 75 mm sieve. Conditions in Note 1

supersede this requirement. * Where the aggregate is obtained from an air-cooled blast furnace slag source. ** Where the aggregate is obtained from a quarry or an air-cooled blast furnace slag or nickel slag source.


Table 3 Minimum Sampling and Testing Frequency for Control Chart Use

Material Frequency for

Type 1 Control Chart t

Frequency for Type 2 Control Chart

t Granular A, M, and S 2,500 5,000

Granular B and SSM 5,000 10,000

Granular O 2,000 4,000

Table 4 Sample Size

Material Minimum Mass of Individual Field Samples

kg Granular A, S, M, and O 25

Granular B and SSM 50

Granular B and SSM 100% passing 26.5 mm sieve 25

Note: Each sample container shall hold no more than 25 kg of material.


Appendix 1010-A, Commentary for OPSS 1010, April 2004 Note: This Appendix does not form part of the standard specification. It is intended to provide

information to the designer on the use of this specification in a Contract. Designer Action/Considerations The designer should determine if the forms in Appendices 1010-B and 1010-C are to be used for submission purposes. If so, they need to be invoked by reference in the Contract Documents. The use of steel slag aggregate is prohibited. The designer should be aware that air-cooled blast furnace slag, nickel slag, and RAP containing steel slag aggregates may require specific placement guidelines based on local municipal and MOE requirements. Prior to tendering, where Owner supplied or specified air-cooled blast furnace slag, nickel slag, or RAP containing steel slag aggregates are to be used, the designer should obtain site notification from MOE and ensure all environmental guidelines and requirements are met. RAP content is determined by LS-623, percent Asphalt Coated Particles. However, this test is limited to identifying RAP content in the coarse aggregate portion only. Where RAP in fine aggregate is a concern a Petrographic Examination of the material passing the 4.75 mm sieve is recommended. (1010.05.02) The Contract Documents should specify the QA testing to be performed in the Contract. If QA testing is not specified, the material will be deemed acceptable. The designer may specify a higher percent crushed requirement to improve performance in higher traffic areas. Related Ontario Provincial Standard Drawings None.


Appendix 1010-B, Additional Information for OPSS 1010, April 2004 Note: This appendix is not a mandatory part of the standard specification. However, it is written in

mandatory language to permit invoking it by reference in the Contract Documents.

OPSS 1010 - FINE AGGREGATE TEST DATA Granular A, B, M, O, S, and Select Subgrade Material (SSM)

Contract No:

Contractor: Contract Location:

Name of Testing Laboratory: Telephone No:

Fax No: Date Tested:

Material Type (check one)

Granular

[ ] A [ ] B Type I [ ] B Type II [ ] M [ ] O [ ] S [ ] SSM

Date Sampled (YY/MM/DD):

Sampled by (Print Name): Material Source:

Acceptance Requirements

Granular Test Results

Laboratory Test Number

A B Type I B Type II M O S SSM Reference

Material Sample

Petrographic Requirement, LS-616

For materials north of the French and Mattawa Rivers: maximum 10% mica (retained on the 75 µm sieve).

N/A

Micro-Deval Abrasion Loss, % maximum, LS-619

30 35 35 30 25 30 N/A

Plasticity Index, % maximum, LS-704

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 N/A

Issued by Testing Laboratory Representative:

PRINT NAME SIGNATURE DATE

Received By Contract Administrator Representative:



Rev. Date: 04/2004 OPSS 1010

Appendix 1010-C, Additional Information for OPSS 1010, April 2004 Note: This appendix is not a mandatory part of the standard specification. However, it is written in mandatory

language to permit invoking it by reference in the Contract Documents.

OPSS 1010 - COARSE AGGREGATE TEST DATA Granular A, B, M, O, S, and Select Subgrade Material (SSM)

Contract No:

Contractor: Contract Location:

Name of Testing Laboratory: Telephone No:

Fax No: Date Tested:

Material Type (check one)

Granular

[ ] A [ ] B Type I [ ] B Type II [ ] M [ ] O [ ] S [ ] SSM

Date Sampled (YY/MM/DD):

Sampled By (Print Name): Material Source:

Acceptance Requirements

Granular Test Results Laboratory

Test Number A B Type I B Type II M O S

SSM Reference Material Sample

Crushed Particles, % minimum, LS-607

50 N/A 100 50 100 50 N/A N/A

Petrographic Requirement, LS-609

(Note 1) N/A (Note 1) (Note 1) N/A (Note 1) N/A N/A

Freeze-Thaw Loss, % maximum, LS-614

N/A N/A N/A N/A 15 N/A N/A

2 Faces Crushed, % minimum, LS-617

N/A N/A N/A N/A 85 N/A N/A N/A

Micro-Deval Abrasion Loss, % maximum, LS-618

25 30 (Note 2)

30 25 21 25 30 (Note 2)

Asphalt Coated Particles, % maximum, LS-621

30 30 N/A 30 N/A 30 N/A N/A

Notes: 1. Maximum of 15% by mass of crushed glass or ceramic material or both, and maximum of 1% by mass of deleterious materials

(wood, clay brick, clay tile, gypsum, gypsum plaster, and wallboard). 2. The coarse aggregate Micro-Deval abrasion loss test requirement will be waived if the material has more than 80% passing the

4.75 mm sieve. Issued by Testing Laboratory Representative:


Received By Contract Administrator Representative:


CITY OF TORONTO STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS

SECTION 23 09 23 BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEM (BAS)

StandardBuildingAutomation System(BAS)Specification

September, 2018

This document is the standard Building Automation System (BAS) Specification for use in all new construction, retrofits and upgrades in City of Toronto facilities and shall not be amended in any way without written consent from the Environment and Energy Division.



1

PART 1 - GENERAL .............................................................. 2 1.0 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS .................................................. 2 2.0 WORK INCLUDED .......................................................... 2 3.0 WORK BY OTHERS ......................................................... 3 4.0 QUALITY ASSURANCE ...................................................... 3 5.0 ABBREVIATIONS AND SYMBOLS .............................................. 3 6.0 APPROVED CONTROL SYSTEMS .............................................. 4 7.0 SYSTEM DESIGN ........................................................... 5 8.0 BACnet ................................................................... 5 9.0 COMMUNICATION .......................................................... 6 10.0 ENVIRONMENT ............................................................ 6 11.0 REAL-TIME CLOCK ......................................................... 7 12.0 SERVICEABILITY ........................................................... 7 13.0 MEMORY ................................................................. 7 14.0 IMMUNITY TO POWER AND NOISE ............................................. 7 15.0 POWERFAIL RESTART ...................................................... 7 16.0 DYNAMIC DATA ACCESS .................................................... 8 17.0 INPUT AND OUTPUT INTERFACE .............................................. 8 18.0 POWER SUPPLIES AND LINE FILTERING ........................................ 8 19.0 AUXILIARY CONTROL DEVICES ............................................... 9 20.0 NETWORKS ............................................................ 12 21.0 SERVER FUNCTION ....................................................... 13 22.0 SCOPE OF WORK ....................................................... 14 23.0 PERMITS, FEES AND CODES ................................................ 14 24.0 COORDINATION .......................................................... 15 24.0 SUPERVISION OF PERSONNEL .............................................. 15 25.0 ELECTRICAL WORK AND SAFETY REQUIREMENTS ............................... 15 26.0 COMMUNICATION WIRING .................................................. 16 27.0 LOCKABLE PANELS ........................................................ 17 28.0 WARNING LABELS ........................................................ 17 29.0 IDENTIFICATION OF HARDWARE AND WIRING .................................. 17 30.0 PRELIMINARY DESIGN REVIEW .............................................. 18 31.0 DRAWING REQUIREMENTS ................................................. 18 32.0 START-UP AND CHECKOUT ................................................. 19 33.0 STANDARDS COMPLIANCE .................................................. 21 34.0 FINAL ACCEPTANCE ....................................................... 21 35.0 DOCUMENTATION ......................................................... 21 36.0 TRAINING ............................................................... 22 37.0 WARRANTY ............................................................ 23 38.0 MAINTENANCE/SERVICE ................................................... 24 PART 2 – OPERATOR WORKSTATION (OWS) AND SOFTWARE ........................... 25 1.0 GENERAL ............................................................... 25 2.0 WORKSTATION HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS ................................... 25 3.0 PRINTERS ............................................................... 26 4.0 UNINTERRUPTABLE POWER SUPPLIES ........................................ 26 5.0 PROGRAMMING SOFTWARE ............................................... 26



2

********************************************************************* This section includes the central building automation system components and network protocol specifications. It may be used as section 23 09 23 or 23 09 93 depending on specification format used.

In addition to this section it will be necessary to add project specific sections for control components and sequences of operation. The intent of this specification is to describe the minimum features required for a new installation. For renovation or refit type projects, it will be necessary to determine to what extent any existing system can be upgraded or modified within the parameters of the project budget to achieve the general intent of this specification and provide appropriate edits. *********************************************************************

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.0 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

1.1 Conform to all, “Mechanical General Provisions”.

1.2 The "provide" in this Division shall be interpreted as "supply and install".

1.3 All work shall conform to Canadian Metric Practice Guide CSA CAN3-2234.1.76

1.4 Provide all required adapters between metric and imperial components.

1.5 Metric descriptions in this Division are nominal equivalents of Imperial values.

1.6 All equipment and material to be new, CSA certified, manufactured to minimum standard quoted including additional specified requirements.

1.7 Where there is no alternative to supply equipment that is not CSA certified, submit such equipment to

Inspection Authorities for special inspection and obtain approval before delivery of equipment to site.

1.8 Use new products the manufacturer is currently manufacturing and selling for use in new installations. Do not use this installation as a product test site unless explicitly approved in writing by the owner. Spare parts shall be available for at least five years after completion of this contract.

1.9 Use material and equipment available from a regular production by manufacturer concerned.

2.0 WORK INCLUDED

********************************************************************* Add to this section any site specific qualifications that may apply to the specific project with respect to application of the specified requirements for the system. *********************************************************************

2.1 The City of Toronto has standardized Building Automation Systems utilizing native BACnet area, system and

application controllers. Extend the existing Framework as detailed herein.

2.2 The system shall support standard Web browser access via the City's Intranet/Internet. It shall support a minimum of 100 simultaneous users with the ability to access the graphical data and real time values simultaneously. (Refer to Section 7.16)

2.3 Provide an open protocol Building Automation System (BAS) incorporating Direct Digital Control (DDC),

equipment monitoring, and control consisting of: A PC based Operator Work Station (OWS) with colour graphic data displays; Microcomputer based Building Controllers (BCs) and Microcomputer based Advanced Application Controllers (AACs) and Application Specific Controllers (ASCs) interfacing directly with sensors,

3



actuators and environmental delivery systems (i.e., HVAC units, boilers, chillers, lighting systems, etc.); electric controls and mechanical devices for all items indicated on drawings described herein including dampers, valves, panels and compressed air plant.

2.4 City of Toronto has standardized the use of Direct Digital Controllers (DDC) and End Devices. No NEW

pneumatic control devices shall be connected or incorporated into the BAS network. It applies to new installations as well as retrofit applications.

2.5 Open Protocols by definition are to be BACnet (ASHRAE Standard 135 – Annex J) only.

2.6 Provide BAS controllers (BCs, AACs and ASCs) based on native BACnet (ASHRAE Standard 135 – Annex J)

protocols.

2.7 Provide submittals, data entry, electrical installation, programming, startup, test and validation acceptance documentation, and system warranty.

3.0 WORK BY OTHERS

3.1 Access doors and setting in place of valves, flow meters, water pressure and differential taps, flow switches, thermal wells, dampers, air flow stations, and current transformers shall be by others.


4.1 Codes and Approvals:

4.1.1 Work, materials, and equipment shall comply with the Ontario Building Code, Ontario Electrical Code, ANSI/ASHRAE 135-2004: Data Communication Protocol for Building Automation and Control Systems (BACnet) and Authorities having jurisdiction over this work. All devices shall be ULC, UL or FM listed and labeled for the specific use, application and environment to which they are applied.

4.1.2 The BAS shall comply with NFPA 90A Air Conditioning and 90B Warm Air Heating, Air

Conditioning.

4.1.3 All electronic equipment shall conform to the requirements of CSA for electromagnetic emissions standards and placed in approved locations such that it does not interfere with building equipment or computers.

4.2 Provide satisfactory operation without damage at 110% above and 85% below rated voltage and at 3 hertz

variation in line frequency. Provide static, transient, and short circuit protection on all inputs and outputs. Communication lines shall be protected against incorrect wiring, static transients and induced magnetic interference. Bus connected devices shall be AC coupled, or equivalent so that any single device failure will not disrupt or halt bus communication.

5.0 ABBREVIATIONS AND SYMBOLS

5.1 All letter symbols and engineering unit abbreviations utilized in information displays ANSI/ISA S5.5 and printouts shall conform to ANSI 710.19/IEEE 260-letter symbols for SI and certain other units of measurement.

5.2 Specification Nomenclature - Acronyms used in this specification are as follows:

AAC Advanced Application Controller ASC Application Specific Controller BAS Building Automation System BC Building Controller

4



BIBB BACnet Interoperability Building Blocks DDC Direct Digital Controls GUI Graphical User Interface HTTP Hyper Text Transfer Protocol LAN Local Area Network ODBC Open Database Connectivity protocol OOT Object Oriented Technology OPC Object linking and embedding for Process Control OWS Operator Workstation PDA Personnel Data Assistant device PICS Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement PWS Portable Workstation SNVTS Standard Network Variables Types SQL Standard Query Language TCP/IP Transmission Control Protocol / Internet Protocol TCU Terminal Control Unit WAN Wide Area Network WAP Wireless Application Protocol device WBI Web Browser Interface XML Extensible Markup Language XIF External Interface Files

6.0 APPROVED CONTROL SYSTEMS ********************************************************************* Applicable to new construction projects, new installations within existing buildings and major retrofit/overhaul of existing BAS systems. *********************************************************************

6.1 Any vendors that are authorized dealers or distributors of the following control systems are acceptable.

6.1.1 DELTA CONTROLS 6.1.2 RELIABLE CONTROLS 6.1.3 SCHNEIDER ELECTRIC (MNB SERIES) 6.1.4 DISTECH 6.1.5 FACILITY EXPLORER

6.2 BAS Systems Integration:

6.2.1 TRIDIUM NIAGARA FRAMEWORK OR

6.2.2 DELTA CONTROLS- ENTELIWEB (City of Toronto has already purchased EnteliWEB

Software Package) OR

6.2.3 Installer must be licensed TRIDIUM system integrator.

6.2.4 For TRIDIUM NIAGARA FRAMEWORK, Soft JACE is NOT accepted.

6.2.5 For ENTELIWEB applications, installer must be licensed and authorized vendor of DELTA Controls.

6.3 Licensing Requirements

6.3.1 Licenses shall be provided to and in the name of the City of Toronto 6.3.2 Licenses shall be perpetual, transferrable, assignable and royalty-free 6.3.3 Tridium licenses shall allow all Workbench/Supervisor brands complete system access and

functionality.

5



6.4 Installer and Manufacturer Qualifications

6.4.1 Installer shall have an established working relationship with Control System Manufacturer.

6.4.2 Installer shall have successfully completed Control System Manufacturer's control system training. Upon request, Installer shall present record of completed training including course outlines.

6.4.3 It is the intent of this specification to define an open protocol state-of-the-art distributed

computerized Building Management and Control System which is user friendly, has known reliability, is extremely responsive, and which is to be designed, installed, implemented, and supported by a local office of approved bidders.

6.4.4 BAS contractor shall provide three locations of successful installations of similar open protocol

computer based systems. Sites provided must consist of more than 150 hardware inputs/outputs. Project sites must be local to the location of this project.

7.0 SYSTEM DESIGN

********************************************************************* For retrofit projects where a gateway might be considered the most appropriate economic decision for interface to an existing automation system, remove article 7.2. *********************************************************************

7.1 The system shall consist of a network of Building Controllers (BC), Advanced Application Controllers (AAC), Application Specific Controllers (ASC), and Smart Actuators (SA). Every device in the system which executes control logic and directly controls HVAC equipment must conform to a standard BACnet Device profile as specified in ANSI/ASHRAE 135-2004, BACnet Annex L. Unless otherwise specified, hardwired actuators and sensors may be used in lieu of BACnet Smart Actuators and Smart Sensors.

7.2 Systems utilizing gateways will not be considered. A gateway device is considered to be a device where only

mapping of system points from one protocol to another occurs. A gateway device cannot perform higher-level energy management functions such as Outdoor Air Optimization, Electrical Demand Limiting and the like.

7.3 The Building Automation System software shall employ object-oriented technology (OOT) for representation

of all data and control devices within the system. The supplied system must incorporate the ability to access all data using standard Web browsers without requiring proprietary operator interface and configuration programs. An Open Database Connectivity (ODBC) or Structured Query Language (SQL) compliant server database is required for all system database parameter storage. This data shall reside on a BAS server for all database access. Systems requiring proprietary database and user interface programs shall not be acceptable.

7.4 A hierarchical topology is required to assure reasonable system response times and to manage the flow and

sharing of data without unduly burdening the customer’s internal Intranet network. Systems employing a flat single tiered architecture shall not be acceptable. Maximum acceptable response time from any alarm occurrence (at the point of origin) to the point of annunciation shall not exceed 5 seconds for network connected user interfaces. Maximum acceptable response time from any alarm occurrence (at the point of origin) to the point of annunciation shall not exceed 60 seconds for remote or dial-up connected user interfaces.

8.0 BACnet.

8.1 Building Controllers (BCs). Each BC shall conform to BACnet Building Controller (B-BC) device profile as specified in ANSI/ASHRAE 135-2004, BACnet Annex L and shall be listed as a certified B-BC in the BACnet Testing Laboratories (BTL) Product Listing.

8.2 Advanced Application Controllers (AACs). Each AAC shall conform to BACnet Advanced Application

Controller (B-AAC) device profile as specified in ANSI/ASHRAE 135-2004, BACnet Annex L and shall be listed as a certified B-AAC in the BACnet Testing Laboratories (BTL) Product Listing.

6



8.3 Application Specific Controllers (ASCs). Each ASC shall conform to BACnet Application Specific Controller (B- ASC) device profile as specified in ANSI/ASHRAE 135-2004, BACnet Annex L and shall be listed as a certified B-ASC in the BACnet Testing Laboratories (BTL) Product Listing.

8.4 Smart Actuators (SAs). Each SA shall conform to BACnet Smart Actuator (B-SA) device profile as specified in

ANSI/ASHRAE 135-2004, BACnet Annex L and shall be listed as a certified B-SA in the BACnet Testing Laboratories (BTL) Product Listing.

8.5 Smart Sensors (SSs). Each SS shall conform to BACnet Smart Sensor (B-SS) device profile as specified in

ANSI/ASHRAE 135-2004, BACnet Annex L and shall be listed as a certified B-SS in the BACnet Testing Laboratories (BTL) Product Listing.

8.6 BACnet Communication.

8.6.1 Each BC shall reside on or be connected to a BACnet network using ISO 8802-3 (Ethernet) Data Link/Physical layer protocol and BACnet/IP addressing.

8.6.2 BACnet routing shall be performed by BCs or other BACnet device routers as necessary to

connect BCs to networks of AACs and ASCs.

8.6.3 Each AAC shall reside on a BACnet network using ISO 8802-3 (Ethernet) Data Link/Physical layer protocol with BACnet/IP addressing, or it shall reside on a BACnet network using the MS/TP Data Link/Physical layer protocol.

8.6.4 Each ASC shall reside on a BACnet network using the MS/TP Data Link/Physical layer

protocol.

8.6.5 Each SA shall reside on a BACnet network using the MS/TP Data Link/Physical layer protocol.

8.6.6 Each SS shall reside on a BACnet network using ISO 8802-3 (Ethernet) Data Link/Physical layer protocol with BACnet/IP addressing, or it shall reside on a BACnet network using MS/TP Data Link/Physical layer protocol.

8.6.7 The maximum number of controllers on an MS/TP network/subnet shall be no more than 64 or the manufacturer recommended limit, whichever is less.

8.6.8 An approved addressing scheme must be obtained from the Environment and Energy Division and be included on project shop drawings (specifically the BAS network architecture diagrams) prior to installation. Buildings without approved schemes shall not exist on the City WAN.

8.6.9 BAS shall transfer data between controllers on a stand-alone BAS network. No more than one (1) data drop per building will be provided to establish connection to central server.

8.6.10 Non-City staff will not have access to the central server during construction. Database and graphics are merged with central server after project deficiency lists have been cleared (including graphics deficiencies). This merging must be coordinated with the application administrators (Environment and Energy Division).

9.0 COMMUNICATION

9.1 Service Port. Each controller shall provide a service communication port for connection to a Portable Operator's Terminal. Connection shall be extended to space temperature sensor ports where shown on drawings.

9.2 Signal Management. BC and ASC operating systems shall manage input and output communication

signals to allow distributed controllers to share real and virtual object information and to allow for central monitoring and alarms.

7



9.3 Data Sharing. Each BC and AAC shall share data as required with each networked BC and AAC.

9.4 Stand-Alone Operation. Each piece of equipment specified in the sequence of operation shall be

controlled by a single controller to provide stand-alone control in the event of communication failure. All I/O points specified for a piece of equipment shall be integral to its controller. Provide stable and reliable stand-alone control using default values or other method for values normally read over the network.

10.0 ENVIRONMENT

Controller hardware shall be suitable for anticipated ambient conditions.

10.1 Controllers used outdoors or in wet ambient conditions shall be mounted in waterproof enclosures and shall be rated for operation at -29°C to 60°C (-20°F to 140°F).

10.2 Controllers used in conditioned space shall be mounted in dust-protective enclosures and shall be rated for operation at 0°C to 50°C (32°F to 120°F).

11.0 REAL-TIME CLOCK

11.1 Controllers that perform scheduling shall have a real-time clock.

12.0 SERVICEABILITY

12.1 Controllers shall have diagnostic LEDs for power, communication, and processor.

12.2 Wires shall be connected to a field-removable modular terminal strip or to a termination card connected by a ribbon cable.

12.3 Each BC and AAC shall continually check its processor and memory circuit status and shall generate

an alarm on abnormal operation. System shall continuously check controller network and generate alarm for each controller that fails to respond.

13.0 MEMORY

13.1 Controller memory shall support operating system, database, and programming requirements.

13.2 Each BC and AAC shall retain BIOS and application programming for at least 72 hours in the event of power loss.

13.3 Each ASC and SA shall use nonvolatile memory and shall retain BIOS and application programming

in the event of power loss. System shall automatically download dynamic control parameters following power loss.

14.0 IMMUNITY TO POWER AND NOISE

14.1 Controllers shall be able to operate at 90% to 110% of nominal voltage rating and shall perform an orderly shutdown below 80% nominal voltage. Operation shall be protected against electrical noise of 5 to 120 Hz and from keyed radios up to 5 W at 1 m (3 ft).

8



15.0 POWERFAIL RESTART

15.1 In the event of the loss of normal power, there shall be an orderly shutdown of all controllers to prevent the loss of database or operating system software. Non-volatile memory shall be incorporated for all controller configuration data, and battery back-up shall be provided to support the real-time clock and all volatile memory for a minimum of 72 hours.

15.2 Upon restoration of normal power, the controller shall automatically resume full operation without manual intervention. The controllers shall incorporate random start sequences to ensure a power spike does not result.

15.3 Controller memory shall not be lost during a power failure.

15.4 The user shall have the capability of loading or re-loading all software via the OWS or the local terminal

port.

9



16.0 DYNAMIC DATA ACCESS

16.1 All operator devices, either network resident or connected via dial-up modems, shall have the ability to

access all point status and application report data, or execute control functions for any and all other devices via the local area network. Access to data shall be based upon logical identification of building equipment.

17.0 INPUT AND OUTPUT INTERFACE

17.1 General. Hard-wire input and output points to BCs, AACs, ASCs, or SAs.

17.2 Protection. Shorting an input or output point to itself, to another point, or to ground shall cause no

controller damage. Input or output point contact with up to 24 V for any duration shall cause no controller damage.

17.3 Binary Inputs. Binary inputs shall monitor the on and off signal from a remote device. Binary inputs

shall provide a wetting current of at least 12 mA and shall be protected against contact bounce and noise. Binary inputs shall sense dry contact closure without application of power external to the controller.

17.4 Pulse Accumulation Inputs. Pulse accumulation inputs shall conform to binary input requirements and

shall accumulate up to 10 pulses per second.

17.5 Analog Inputs. Analog inputs shall monitor low-voltage (0-10 Vdc), current (4-20 mA), or resistance (thermistor or RTD) signals. Analog inputs shall be compatible with and field configurable to commonly available sensing devices.

17.6 Binary Outputs. Binary outputs shall send an on-or-off signal for on and off control. Building Controller

binary outputs shall have three-position (on-off-auto) override switches and status lights. Outputs shall be selectable for normally open or normally closed operation.

17.7 Analog Outputs. Analog outputs shall send a modulating 0-10 Vdc or 4-20 mA signal as required to

properly control output devices. Each Building Controller analog output shall have a two-position (auto-manual) switch, a manually adjustable potentiometer, and status lights. Analog outputs shall not drift more than 0.4% of range annually.

17.8 Tri-State Outputs. Control three-point floating electronic actuators without feedback with tri-state

outputs (two coordinated binary outputs). Tri-State outputs may be used to provide analog output control in zone control and terminal unit control applications such as VAV terminal units, duct-mounted heating coils, and zone dampers.

17.9 Universal Inputs and Outputs. Inputs and outputs that can be designated as either binary or analog in

software shall conform to the provisions of this section that are appropriate for their designated use.

18.0 POWER SUPPLIES AND LINE FILTERING

18.1 Power Supplies: Control transformers shall be UL listed. Furnish Class 2 current-limiting type or

furnish over-current protection in primary and secondary circuits for Class 2 service in accordance with CEC requirements. Limit connected loads to 80% of rated capacity.

18.1.1 DC power supply output shall match output current and voltage requirements. Unit shall be

full-wave rectifier type with output ripple of 5.0 mV maximum peak-to-peak. Regulation shall be 1.0% line and load combined, with 100-microsecond response time for 50% load changes.

1



Unit shall have built-in over-voltage and over-current protection and shall be able to withstand 150% current overload for at least three seconds without trip-out or failure.

18.1.2 Unit shall operate between 0°C and 50°C (32°F and 120°F). EM/RF shall meet FCC Class B

and VDE 0871 for Class B and MILSTD 810C for shock and vibration.

18.1.3 Line voltage units shall be UL recognized and CSA listed.

18.2 Power Line Filtering.

18.2.1 Provide internal or external transient voltage and surge suppression for workstations and controllers. Surge protection shall have:

18.2.1.1Dielectric strength of 1000 V minimum

18.2.1.2Response time of 10 nanoseconds or less

18.2.1.3Transverse mode noise attenuation of 65 dB or greater

18.2.1.4Common mode noise attenuation of 150 dB or greater at 40-100 Hz

19.0 AUXILIARY CONTROL DEVICES

19.1 Electric Damper and Valve Actuators.

19.1.1 Stall Protection. Mechanical or electronic stall protection shall prevent actuator damage

throughout the actuator's rotation.

19.1.2 Spring-return Mechanism. Actuators used for power-failure and safety applications shall have an internal mechanical spring-return mechanism or an uninterruptible power supply (UPS).

19.1.3 Signal and Range. Proportional actuators shall accept a 0-10 Vdc or a 0-20 mA control signal

and shall have a 2-10 Vdc or 4-20 mA operating range. (Floating motor actuators may be substituted for proportional actuators in terminal unit applications as described in paragraph 16.8)

19.1.4 Wiring. 24 Vac and 24 Vdc actuators shall operate on Class 2 wiring.

19.1.5 Manual Positioning. Operators shall be able to manually position each actuator when the

actuator is not powered. Non-spring-return actuators shall have an external manual gear release. Spring-return actuators with more than 7 Nꞏm (60 in.-lb) torque capacity shall have a manual crank.

19.2 Binary Temperature Devices.

19.2.1 Low-Voltage Space Thermostats. Low-voltage space thermostats shall be 24 V, bimetal-

operated, mercury-switch type, with adjustable or fixed anticipation heater, concealed setpoint adjustment, 13°C-30°C (55°F-85°F) setpoint range, 1°C (2°F) maximum differential, and vented ABS plastic cover.

19.2.2 Line-Voltage Space Thermostats. Line-voltage space thermostats shall be bimetal-actuated,

open-contact type or bellows-actuated, enclosed, snap-switch type or equivalent solid-state type, with heat anticipator, UL listing for electrical rating, concealed setpoint adjustment, 13°C- 30°C (55°F-85°F) setpoint range, 1°C (2°F) maximum differential, and vented ABS plastic cover.



10

19.2.3 Low-Limit Thermostats. Low-limit airstream thermostats shall be UL listed, vapor pressure type. Element shall be at least 6 m (20 ft) long. Element shall sense temperature in each 30 cm (1 ft) section and shall respond to lowest sensed temperature. Low-limit thermostat shall be manual reset only.

19.3 Temperature Sensors

19.3.1 Type. Temperature sensors shall be Resistance Temperature Device (RTD) or thermistor

(10K).

19.3.2 Duct Sensors. Duct sensors shall be single point or averaging. Averaging sensors shall be a minimum of 1.5 m (5 ft) in length per 1 m 2(10 ft 2) of duct cross-section.

19.3.3 Immersion Sensors. Provide immersion sensors with a separable stainless steel well. Well pressure rating shall be consistent with system pressure it will be immersed in. Well shall withstand pipe design flow velocities.

19.3.4 Space Sensors. Space sensors shall have setpoint adjustment, override switch, display, and

communication port.

19.3.5 Differential Sensors. Provide matched sensors for differential temperature measurement.

19.4 Humidity Sensors.

19.4.1 Differential Sensors. Provide matched sensors for differential temperature measurement.

19.4.2 Duct and room sensors shall have a sensing range of 20%-80%.

19.4.3 Duct sensors shall have a sampling chamber.

19.4.4 Outdoor air humidity sensors shall have a sensing range of 20%-95% RH and shall be suitable for ambient conditions of 40°C-75°C (40°F-170°F).

19.4.5 Humidity sensors shall not drift more than 1% of full scale annually.

19.5 Flow Switches. Flow-proving switches shall be paddle (water service only) or differential pressure type

(air or water service). Switches shall be UL listed, SPDT snap-acting, and pilot duty rated (125 VA minimum).

19.5.1 Paddle switches shall have adjustable sensitivity and NEMA 1 enclosure unless otherwise

specified.

19.5.2 Differential pressure switches shall have scale range and differential suitable for intended application and NEMA 1 enclosure unless otherwise specified.

19.6 Relays.

19.6.1 Control Relays. Control relays shall be plug-in type, UL listed, and shall have dust cover and

LED "energized" indicator. Contact rating, configuration, and coil voltage shall be suitable for application.

19.6.2 Time Delay Relays. Time delay relays shall be solid-state plug-in type, UL listed, and shall

have adjustable time delay. Delay shall be adjustable ±100% from setpoint shown. Contact rating, configuration, and coil voltage shall be suitable for application. Provide NEMA 1 enclosure for relays not installed in local control panel.

19.7 Override Timers.

19.7.1 Unless implemented in control software, override timers shall be spring-wound line voltage,

UL Listed, with contact rating and configuration required by application. Provide 0-6 hour calibrated dial unless otherwise specified. Flush mount timer on local control panel face or where shown.



11

19.8 Current Transmitters.

19.8.1 AC current transmitters shall be self-powered, combination split-core current transformer type with built-in rectifier and high-gain servo amplifier with 4-20 mA two-wire output. Full-scale unit ranges shall be 10 A, 20 A, 50 A, 100 A, 150 A, and 200 A, with internal zero and span adjustment. Unit accuracy shall be ±1% full-scale at 500 ohm maximum burden.

19.8.2 Transmitter shall meet or exceed ANSI/ISA S50.1 requirements and shall be UL/CSA

recognized.

19.8.3 Unit shall be split-core type for clamp-on installation on existing wiring.

19.9 Current Transformers.

19.9.1 AC current transformers shall be UL/CSA recognized and shall be completely encased (except for terminals) in approved plastic material.

19.9.2 Transformers shall be available in various current ratios and shall be selected for ±1%

accuracy at 5 A full-scale output.

19.9.3 Use fixed-core transformers for new wiring installation and split-core transformers for existing wiring installation.

19.10 Voltage Transmitters.

19.10.1 AC voltage transmitters shall be self-powered single-loop (two-wire) type, 4-20 mA output with

zero and span adjustment.

19.10.2 Adjustable full-scale unit ranges shall be 100-130 Vac, 200-250 Vac, 250-330 Vac, and 400- 600 Vac. Unit accuracy shall be ±1% full-scale at 500 ohm maximum burden.

19.10.3 Transmitters shall meet or exceed ANSI/ISA S50.1 requirements and shall be UL/CSA

recognized at 600 Vac rating.

19.11 Voltage Transformers.

19.11.1 AC voltage transformers shall be UL/CSA recognized, 600 Vac rated, and shall have built-in fuse protection.

19.11.2 Transformers shall be suitable for ambient temperatures of 4°C-55°C (40°F-130°F) and shall

provide ±0.5% accuracy at 24 Vac and 5 VA load.

19.11.3 Windings (except for terminals) shall be completely enclosed with metal or plastic.

19.12 Power Monitors.

19.12.1 Power monitors shall be three-phase type and shall have three-phase disconnect and shorting switch assembly, UL listed voltage transformers, and UL listed split-core current transformers.

19.12.2 Power monitors shall provide selectable output: rate pulse for kWh reading or 4-20 mA for kW

reading. Power monitors shall operate with 5 A current inputs and maximum error of ±2% at 1.0 power factor or ±2.5% at 0.5 power factor.

19.13 Current Switches.

19.13.1 Current-operated switches shall be self-powered, solid-state with adjustable trip current.

Select switches to match application current and DDC system output requirements.

19.14 Pressure Transducers.



12

19.14.1 Transducers shall have linear output signal and field-adjustable zero and span.

19.14.2 Continuous operating conditions of positive or negative pressure 50% greater than calibrated span shall not damage transducer sensing elements.

19.14.3 Water pressure transducer diaphragm shall be stainless steel with minimum proof pressure of

1000 kPa (150 psi). Transducer shall have 4-20 mA output, suitable mounting provisions, and block and bleed valves.

19.14.4 Water differential pressure transducer diaphragm shall be stainless steel with minimum proof

pressure of 1000 kPa (150 psi). Over-range limit (differential pressure) and maximum static pressure shall be 2000 kPa (300 psi.) Transducer shall have 4-20 mA output, suitable mounting provisions, and 5-valve manifold.

19.15 Differential Pressure Switches. Differential pressure switches (air or water service) shall be UL listed,

SPDT snap-acting, pilot duty rated (125 VA minimum) and shall have scale range and differential suitable for intended application and NEMA 1 enclosure unless otherwise specified.

20.0 NETWORKS

20.1 BAS contractor to coordinate with the City's IT department for the connections to the City's Network.

20.2 Design for the Network LAN (BC LAN) shall include the following provisions:

20.2.1 Provide access to the BC LAN from a remote location, via the Intranet.

20.2.2 The network LAN shall utilize BACnet/IP (ASHRAE standard SPC-135A-2004 - Annex L) for

communication between BCs. Manufacturer specific proprietary protocols, gateways, or protocol converters are not acceptable for this project. The OWS shall communicate to the BCs utilizing standard Ethernet to IEEE 802.3 Standards.

20.2.3 High-speed data transfer rates for alarm reporting, quick report generation form multiple

controllers and upload/download efficiency between network devices.

20.2.4 Detection and accommodation of single or multiple failures of workstations, controller panels and the network media. The network shall include provisions for automatically reconfiguring itself to allow all operational equipment to perform their designated functions as effectively as possible in the event of single or multiple failures.

20.2.5 Message and alarm buffering to prevent information from being lost.

20.2.6 Error detection, correction, and retransmission to guarantee data integrity.

20.2.7 Default device definition to prevent loss of alarms or data, and ensure alarms are reported as

quickly as possible in the event an operator device does not respond.

20.2.8 Commonly available, multiple sourced, networking components shall be used to allow the system to coexist with other networking applications such as office automation. ETHERNET is the only acceptable technology.

20.2.9 Synchronization of the real-time clocks in all BC panels shall be provided.

20.2.10 The BC LAN shall be a 100 Megabits/sec Ethernet network supporting BACnet, Java, XML,

HTTP, and CORBA IIOP for maximum flexibility for integration of building data with enterprise information systems and providing support for multiple Building Controllers (BCs), user workstations and where specified, a local server. Local area network minimum physical and media access requirements: 20.2.10.1 Ethernet; IEEE standard 802.3



13

20.2.10.2 Cable; 100 Base-T, UTP-8 wire, category 5 20.2.10.3 Minimum throughput; 10 Mbps, with ability to increase to 100 Mbps

20.2.11 Provide access to the BC LAN via a Wireless Application Protocol (WAP) device as well. Through

this connection the BC LAN will provide authorized staff with the ability to monitor and control the BAS from any location within the City network through a web browser, cellular phone, pager, WebPads, or PDA. (Pocket Computer).

21.0 SERVER FUNCTION

21.1 Local connections shall be via an Ethernet LAN.

21.2 It shall be possible to provide access to all Building Control Units (BC) via a single connection to the server. In this configuration, each Building Control Unit (BC) can be accessed from an Operator Workstation (OWS) using a standard Web browser by connecting to the BAS LAN. The server shall provide the following functions, as a minimum:

21.2.1 Global Data Access: The server shall provide complete access to distributed data defined

anywhere in the system. 21.2.2 Distributed Control: The server shall provide the ability to execute global control strategies based

on control and data objects in any Building Control Unit (BC) in the network, local or remote. 21.2.3 The server shall include a master clock service for its subsystems and provide time

synchronization for all Building Control Units (BC). 21.2.4 The server shall accept time synchronization messages from trusted precision Atomic Clock

Internet sites and update its master clock based on this data. 21.2.5 The server shall provide scheduling for all Building Control Units and their underlying field control

devices. 21.2.6 The server shall provide demand limiting that operates across all Building Control Units. The

server must be capable of multiple demand programs for sites with multiple meters and or multiple sources of energy. Each demand program shall be capable of supporting separate demand shedding lists for effective demand control.

21.2.7 The server shall implement the BACnet Command Prioritization scheme (16 levels) for safe and effective contention resolution of all commands issued to Building Control Units. Systems not employing this prioritization shall not be accepted.

21.2.8 Each Building Control Unit supported by the server shall have the ability to archive its log data, alarm data and database to the server, automatically. Archiving options shall be user-defined including archive time and archive frequency.

21.2.9 The server shall provide central alarm management for all Building Control Units supported by the server. Alarm management shall include:

21.2.10 Routing of alarms to display, printer, email and pagers 21.2.11 View and acknowledge alarms 21.2.12 Query alarm logs based on user-defined parameters 21.2.13 The server shall provide central management of log data for all Network Control Units supported

by the server. Log data shall include process logs, runtime and event counter logs, audit logs and error logs. Log data management shall include:

21.2.14 Viewing and printing log data 21.2.15 Exporting log data to other software applications 21.2.16 Query log data based on user-defined parameters 21.2.17 Minimum BACnet features supported are

-Standard BACnet Objects (Analog In/Out/Value, BinaryInput/Output/Value, Multi-State -- Input/Output/Value, Schedule(export), Calendar(export), Trend(Export), Device ). -Segmented Capability (Segmented Request-Segmented Response). -Application Services (Read Property, Read Property Multiple, Write Property, Write Property Multiple, Confirmed Event, Notification, Acknowledge Alarm, Get Alarm Summary Who-has, I-have, Who-is, I-am, Subscribe COV, Confirmed COV notification, Unconfirmed COV notification).



14

-BACnet Broadcast Management

22.0 SCOPE OF WORK

22.1 The work covered by this specification and related sections consists of providing shop drawings, equipment, labour, materials, engineering, technical supervision, and transportation as required to furnish and install a fully operational BAS to monitor and control the facilities listed herein, and as required to provide the operation specified in strict accordance with these documents, and subject to the terms and conditions of the contract. The work in general consists of but is not limited to, the following:

22.1.1 The preparation of submittals and provision of all related services.

22.1.2 Operator workstations located as listed in the specifications (OWS will be provided by the

City's IT, SEE PART 2, SECTION 1.1.4).

22.1.3 Furnish and install all controllers to achieve system operation, any control devices, conduit and wiring, in the facility as required to provide the operation specified.

22.1.4 Furnish and load all software required to implement a complete and operational BAS.

22.1.5 Furnish complete operating and maintenance manuals and field training of operators,

programmers, and maintenance personnel.

22.1.6 Perform acceptance tests, commissioning or re-commissioning as indicated.

22.1.7 Provide full documentation for all application software and equipment.

22.1.8 Miscellaneous work as indicated in these specifications.

23.0 PERMITS, FEES AND CODES

23.1 Apply for, obtain and pay for all permits, licenses, inspections, examinations and fees required. Also submit, if required, information and other data that may be obtained from the Engineer. Should the authorities require the information on specific forms, fill in these forms by transcribing the information provided by the Engineer.

23.2 BAS contractor shall obtain and pay for the police clearance certificates if required for the project.

23.3 Arrange for inspection of all work by the authorities having jurisdiction over the Work. On completion of

the Work, present to the Engineer the final unconditional certificate of approval of the inspecting authorities.

23.4 Comply with the requirements of the latest edition of the applicable ULC or CSA standards, the

requirements of the Authorities, Federal, Provincial/Territorial and Municipal Codes, the applicable standards of ULC and all other authorities having jurisdiction. These Codes and Regulations constitute an integral part of these Specifications.

23.5 Where there is no alternative to supply equipment which is CSA certified, submit such equipment to the

local electrical authority for special inspection and obtain approval before delivery of equipment to site.

23.6 In case of conflict, applicable Codes take precedence over the Contract Documents. In no instance reduce the standard or Scope of Work or intent established by the Drawings and Specifications by applying any of the Codes referred to herein.

23.7 Before starting any work, submit the required number of copies of documentation to the authorities for

their approval and comments. Comply with any changes requested as part of the Contract, but notify the



15

Engineer immediately of such changes, for proper processing of these requirements. Prepare and furnish any additional drawings, details or information as may be required.

24.0 COORDINATION

24.1 All work shall be performed at times acceptable to the Engineer/Construction Manager. Provide work schedule at the start of the job for the approval of the Engineer/Construction Manager. Schedule shall show when all staff and sub-contractors shall be on-site.

24.2 Organize all sub-contractors and ensure that they maintain the schedule.

24.3 Full cooperation shall be shown with other sub-contractors to facilitate installations and to avoid delays in

carrying out the work.

24.4 Notify Engineer/Construction Manager of any changes to the schedule. Send any schedule changes and weekly progress reports via fax to Engineer/Construction Manager.

24.5 Where, in the judgment of the Engineer/Construction Manager, the work could disrupt the normal

operations in or around the building, contractor shall schedule work to eliminate or minimize interference, subject to owner’s approval.

24.6 When connecting to the existing systems, advise the Engineer/Construction Manager and obtain permission to so. Perform work at a time acceptable to the Engineer/Construction Manager and Owner.

24.0 SUPERVISION OF PERSONNEL

24.1 Maintain at this building qualified personnel and supporting staff with proven experience in erecting, supervising, testing, and adjusting projects of comparable nature and complexity.

24.2 Supervisory personnel and their qualifications are subject to the approval of the Owner.

24.3 All personnel working on-site shall sign in as required by the Owner and shall wear company identification.

24.4 When requested and for whatever reason, remove personnel and/or support staff from project. Take

immediate action. Contractors and subcontractors may require police clearance.

25.0 ELECTRICAL WORK AND SAFETY REQUIREMENTS

25.1 Control and interlock wiring and installation shall comply with national and local electrical codes, and manufacturer's recommendations.

25.2 CEC Class 1 (line voltage) wiring shall be UL listed in approved raceway as specified by CEC.

25.3 Low-voltage wiring shall meet CEC Class 2 requirements. Subfuse low-voltage power circuits as required to

meet Class 2 current limit.

25.4 CEC Class 2 (current-limited) wires not in raceway but in concealed and accessible locations such as return air plenums shall be UL listed for the intended application.

25.5 Install wiring in raceway where subject to mechanical damage and at levels below 3 m (10ft) in mechanical,

electrical, or service rooms.

25.6 Do not install Class 2 wiring in raceway containing Class 1 wiring. Boxes and panels containing high voltage wiring and equipment may not be used for low-voltage wiring except for the purpose of interfacing the two (e.g., relays and transformers).



16

25.7 Install Class 1 and Class 2 wiring in separate raceways. Boxes and panels containing high-voltage wiring and equipment shall not be used for low-voltage wiring except for the purpose of interfacing the two through relays and transformers.

25.8 Do not install wiring in raceway containing tubing.

25.9 Run exposed Class 2 wiring parallel to a surface or perpendicular to it and tie neatly at 3 m (10 ft) intervals.

25.10 Use structural members to support or anchor plenum cables without raceway. Do not use ductwork,

electrical raceways, piping, or ceiling suspension systems to support or anchor cables.

25.11 Secure raceways with raceway clamps fastened to structure and spaced according to code requirements. Raceways and pull boxes shall not be hung on or attached to ductwork, electrical raceways, piping, or ceiling suspension systems.

25.12 Size raceway and select wire size and type in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and CEC

requirements.

25.13 Include one pull string in each raceway 2.5 cm (1 in.) or larger.

25.14 Use color-coded conductors throughout.

25.15 Locate control and status relays in designated enclosures only. Do not install control and status relays in packaged equipment control panel enclosures containing Class 1 starters.

25.16 Conceal raceways except within mechanical, electrical, or service rooms. Maintain minimum clearance of

15 cm (6 in.) between raceway and high-temperature equipment such as steam pipes or flues.

25.17 Install insulated bushings on raceway ends and enclosure openings. Seal top ends of vertical raceways.

25.18 Terminate control and interlock wiring related to the work of this section. Maintain at the job site updated (as-built) wiring diagrams that identify terminations.

25.19 Flexible metal raceways and liquid-tight flexible metal raceways shall not exceed 1 m (3 ft) in length and

shall be supported at each end. Do not use flexible metal raceway less than ½ in. electrical trade size. Use liquid-tight flexible metal raceways in areas exposed to moisture including chiller and boiler rooms.

25.20 Install raceway rigidly, support adequately, ream at both ends, and leave clean and free of obstructions.

Join raceway sections with couplings and according to code. Make terminations in boxes with fittings. Make terminations not in boxes with bushings.

25.21 All equipment and systems installed under this Contract shall be grounded, isolated, or conditioned as

required to permit equipment to continue to function normally, without interruption, in the event of radio frequency interference (RFI), electromagnetic interference (EMI), power surges/dips or other electrical anomalies.

25.22 It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor or his Sub-contractor to ensure that any coring of holes

through the walls or floors will not penetrate existing conduits, cables or mechanical equipment in or under the floor slabs or walls. He shall be responsible to take any and all action as deemed necessary by the Project Manager to correct any such penetrations at his cost. No coring shall be undertaken unless the Project Manager gives permission. Scan walls and floors prior to core drilling to identify hidden piping. Ensure that water does not flow into equipment and below floors. Waterproof and fire stop all penetrations.

26.0 COMMUNICATION WIRING

26.1 Communication wiring shall be low-voltage Class 2 wiring and shall comply with Article 25 (Electrical Work).

26.2 Install communication wiring in separate raceways and enclosures from other Class 2 wiring.



17

26.3 During installation do not exceed maximum cable pulling, tension, or bend radius specified by the cable manufacturer.

26.4 Verify entire network's integrity following cable installation using appropriate tests for each cable.

26.5 Install lightning arrestor according to manufacturer's recommendations between cable and ground where a

cable enters or exits a building.

26.6 Each run of communication wiring shall be a continuous length without splices when that length is commercially available. Runs longer than commercially available lengths shall have as few splices as possible using commercially available lengths.

26.7 Label communication wiring to indicate origination and destination.

26.8 Ground coaxial cable according to OEC regulations article on "Communications Circuits, Cable, and Protector

Grounding."

27.0 LOCKABLE PANELS

27.1 Indoor control panels shall be fully enclosed NEMA 1 construction with hinged door key-lock latch and removable sub-panels. A common key shall open each control panel and sub-panel.

27.2 Prewire internal and face-mounted device connections with color-coded stranded conductors tie-wrapped or neatly installed in plastic troughs. Field connection terminals shall be UL listed for 600 V service, individually identified per control and interlock drawings, with adequate clearance for field wiring.

27.3 Each local panel shall have a control power source power switch (on-off) with overcurrent protection.

28.0 WARNING LABELS

28.1 All Controller panelsAffix permanent warning labels to equipment that can be automatically started by the

control system.

1. Labels shall use white lettering (12-point type or larger) on a red background.

2. Warning labels shall read as follows.

B. Affix permanent warning labels to motor starters and control panels that are connected to multiple power sources utilizing separate disconnects.

1. Labels shall use white lettering (12-point type or larger) on a red background.

2. Warning labels shall read as follows.

29.0 IDENTIFICATION OF HARDWARE AND WIRING

C A U T I O N This equipment is operating under automatic control and may start or stop

at any time without warning. Switch disconnect to "Off" position before servicing.

C A U T I O N This equipment is fed from more than one power source with separate

disconnects. Disconnect all power sources before servicing.



18

29.1 Label wiring and cabling, including that within factory-fabricated panels, with control system address or termination number at each end within 5 cm (2 in.) of termination.

29.2 Permanently label or code each point of field terminal strips to show instrument or item served.

29.3 Label control panels with minimum 1 cm (½ in.) letters on laminated plastic nameplates.

29.4 Label each control component with a permanent label. Label plug-in components such that label remains

stationary during component replacement (lamacoids).

29.5 Label room sensors related to terminal boxes or valves with nameplates (lamacoids).

29.6 Manufacturers' nameplates and UL or CSA labels shall be visible and legible after equipment is installed.

29.7 Label identifiers shall match record documents.

29.8 Insert laminated points list in the control panel

30.0 PRELIMINARY DESIGN REVIEW

30.1 The BAS contractor shall submit a preliminary design document for review. This document shall contain the following information:

30.1.1 Provide a description of the proposed system along with a system architecture diagram with the

intention of showing the contractors solution to meet this specification.

30.1.2 Provide product data sheets and a technical description of BC, AAC, ASC hardware required to meet specifications listed herein.

30.1.3 Provide product brochures and a technical description of the Server, Operator Workstation, and

Building Control Unit (BC) software required to meet this specification. Provide a description of software programs included.

30.1.4 Open Protocols - For all hardware Building Controllers, Advanced Application Controllers (AAC)

and Advanced Specific Controllers (ASC), provide BACnet Interoperability Building Blocks BIBBs certification. Provide complete description and documentation of any proprietary services and/or objects where used in the system.

30.1.5 Provide a description and samples of Operator Workstation graphics and reports.

30.1.6 Provide an overview of the BAS contractor’s local/branch organization, local staff, recent related

project experience with references, and local service capabilities.

30.1.7 Provide information on the BAS contractors project team including project organization, project manager, project engineer, programmers, project team resumes, and location of staff.

31.0 DRAWING REQUIREMENTS

31.1.1 Within 45 days of award of contract and before start of construction, submit 3 hard copies and 1 soft copy of manufacturers information and shop drawings. Soft copy to be in AutoCAD or VISIO and WordPerfect or Word formats (latest versions) structured using menu format for easy loading and retrieval on the OWS.

31.1.2 Manufacturer's Data: Provide in completely coordinated and indexed package to assure full

compliance with the contract requirements. Piecemeal submittal of data is not acceptable and such submittals will be returned without review. Information shall be submitted for all material and equipment the contractor proposes to furnish under terms of this contract work. Arrange the



19

submittals in the same sequence as these specifications and reference at the upper right-hand corner the particular specification provision for which each submittal is intended. Submittals for each manufactured item shall be manufacturer's descriptive literature (equipment specification), equipment drawings, diagrams, performance and characteristic curves, and catalog cuts, and shall include the manufacturer's name, trade name, catalog model or number, nameplate data, size layout dimension, capacity, specification reference, applicable specification references, and all other information necessary to establish contract compliance.

31.1.3 Shop drawings: Provide in completely coordinated and indexed package:

31.1.3.1Wiring and piping diagrams.

31.1.3.2 Control schematics with narrative description and control descriptive logic fully showing and describing operation and/or manual procedures available to operating personnel to achieve proper operation of the building, including under complete failure of the BAS.

31.1.3.3 Shop drawings for each input/output point showing all information associated with each

particular point including sensing element type and location; details of associated field wiring schematics and schedules; point address; software and programming details (CDL's) associated with each point; and manufacturer's recommended installation instructions and procedures for each type of sensor and/or transmitter.

31.1.3.4 Detailed system architecture showing all points associated with each controller, controller

locations, and describing the spare points capacity at each controller and BAS LAN.

31.1.3.5 Each BC shall contain a minimum of 20% spare resource capacity. The BC shall provide a throughput capable of transmitting all BAS LAN data connected to it within 10 seconds.

31.1.3.6 Each AAC and ASC shall have a minimum of 10% spare capacity for each point type for

future point connection. Provide all processors, power supplies and communication controllers complete so that the implementation of a point only requires the addition of the appropriate point input/output termination module and wiring. As a minimum, provide one of each type of point available on the controller.

31.1.3.7 Specification sheets for each item including manufacturers descriptive literature, drawings, diagrams, performance and characteristic curves, manufacturer and model number, size, layout, dimensions, capacity, etc

31.1.3.8 Colour graphic displays detailing hierarchical structure of facility, including floor plans,

with multi-level penetration to equipment level.

32.0 START-UP AND CHECKOUT ******************************************************************************************************************

City's BAS Project Manager shall be present during the Start-Up and Checkout- FOR FACILITIES MANAGEMENT PROJECTS ONLY, FOR OTHER DIVISIONS THIS IS OPTIONAL

****************************************************************************************************************** 32.1 This work shall include field testing and adjustment of the complete BAS, and on-site final operational

acceptance test of the complete operational BAS. The Engineer shall be advised at least 14 days in advance of the dates of all tests and may attend at his discretion. If the Engineer witnesses the test, such tests shall be subject to his approval prior to the release of equipment. If the Engineer elects not to witness the tests, the contractor shall provide performance certification. Acceptance of tests by the Engineer and Project Manager shall not relieve the contractor of responsibility for the complete system meeting the requirements of these specifications after installation.

32.2 Static testing:



20

32.2.1 Static testing shall include point-by-point testing of the entire system and completion of Component Test Sheets. The contractor shall forward proposed Test Sheets at the shop drawing review stage. These Component Test Sheets shall be completed during the contractor’s own testing and verification procedure that is done prior to the request for a final inspection. The completed Component Test Sheets shall then be returned to the Engineer for review and approval. The Engineer may repeat a random sampling of at least 50% of the tests during the Engineers commissioning procedure to corroborate their accuracy. The Contractor shall be on site with test equipment during this verification process. The test procedures shall include the following.

32.2.1.1 Digital input component test sheet:

32.2.1.1.1 DI status shall be verified at the POT and OWS for ON and OFF status.

32.2.1.1.2 All digital alarm inputs shall be proven using actual field conditions where

possible or be jumpered at the field device for testing with the approval of the Engineer.

32.2.1.2 Digital output component test sheet:

32.2.1.2.1 Status to be verified at the equipment location. Verification at the OWS

shall be completed for ON and OFF status, software DISABLE indicator and OVERRIDEN indicator

32.2.1.3 Analog input component test sheet:

32.2.1.3.1 All temperature sensors shall be calibrated using a hand held meter with

equal or better accuracy.

32.2.1.3.2 Selected temperature sensors chosen by the Engineer shall be verified by spraying with a cold spray or other means to ensure response and to test the low temperature alarm condition.

32.2.1.3.3 All pressure sensing devices and analog output feedback shall be verified

using a device with equal or better accuracy to ensure correct calibration.

32.2.1.3.4 All humidity sensing devices must be verified using a recently calibrated device with equal or better accuracy

32.2.1.3.5 All CTs shall be set to accurately reflect motor status, including removing

belts on belt driven equipment

32.2.1.3.6 All other devices shall be verified using appropriate devices of equal or better accuracy

32.2.1.3.7 Adjust span on feedback devices so that input matches the end device

32.2.2 Analog output component test sheet:

32.2.2.1 AI points shall be tested by sending a command from the PWS or OWS to incrementally

stroke the field device from full CLOSED to full OPEN and measuring the signal at the field device. The increments of the test shall be no larger than 10% of the output span.

32.2.2.2 The AO feedback requirement shall also be tested by failing the field device and

verifying that the alarm registers

32.2.2.3 Each output shall be exercised over the full output capability of the panel



21

32.2.2.4 Field device hysteresis shall be measured at a minimum of three output levels for each direction of travel. Output increments shall not exceed 2% of span for this test

33.0 STANDARDS COMPLIANCE

33.1 Where materials or equipment are specified to conform to requirements of the standards of organizations, such as the Canadian Standards Association (CSA) that use a label or listing as method of indicating compliance, proof of such conformance shall be submitted and approved, indexed and cross-referenced with the specification. The label or listing of the specified organization will be acceptable evidence. In lieu of the label or listing, the contractor shall submit a certificate from a testing organization adequately equipped and competent to perform such services, and approved by the Engineer, stating that the item has been tested in accordance with the specified organization's test methods and that the item conforms to the specified organization's standard or code. For materials whose compliance with organizational standards or specifications is not regulated by an organization using its own listing or label as proof of compliance, a certificate from the manufacturer shall be furnished to the Engineer stating that the material complies with the applicable referenced standard or specification.

34.0 FINAL ACCEPTANCE

34.1 Final acceptance shall commence only after satisfactory completion of start-up, verification of performance and the 30-day test period described earlier. When the Contractor has satisfied himself as to proper system operation he shall advise the BAS Commissioning Engineer/Consultant to establish a date for Final Acceptance. This will involve a point-by-point check of all hardware and software items including graphics and displayed data, as well as performing tasks as directed.

34.2 Supply 2-way radios and all test equipment as previously specified. Have on-site technical personnel capable

of re-calibrating all field hardware and modifying software.

34.3 Test each system independently and then in unison with other related systems. Test weather sensitive systems twice- once near winter design conditions and again near summer design conditions.

34.4 Optimize operation and performance of each system. Test full-scale emergency operation and integrity of

smoke management and other life safety systems.

34.5 Demonstrate to the Engineer the operation of each system including sequence of operations in regular and emergency modes, under all normal and emergency conditions, start-up, shut-down, interlocks, and lock- outs.

34.6 Upon completion of the testing submit a report to the Engineer to summarize all testing.

35.0 DOCUMENTATION

35.1 Documentation shall consist of 4 hard copies and one soft copy for all information described below

35.2 The final documentation package shall include:

35.2.1 Hard and soft copies of all control drawings (As-Builts).

35.2.2 Manufacturer’s technical data sheets for all hardware and software

35.2.3 Factory operating and maintenance manuals with any customization required

35.2.4 Soft copies of programming and front-end software and each controller’s database. Hard copy output of programming is not necessary



22

35.2.5 Provide clear, concise, typewritten and soft copy descriptions of all control sequences in the working language.

35.2.6 Soft copy text files shall be in MS-Word.

35.3 Each instruction and reference manual shall be bound in hardback, 3 ring, binders or an approved equivalent

shall be provided to the Engineer. Binders to be no more than 2/3 full. Each binder to contain index to full volume. One complete set of manuals shall be furnished prior to the time that the system or equipment tests are performed, and the remaining manuals shall be furnished at acceptance. The identification of each manual's contents shall be inscribed on the cover and spine. The manuals shall include the names, addresses and telephone numbers of each subcontractor installing equipment systems and of the local representatives for each item of equipment and each system. The manuals shall have a table of contents and be assembled to conform to the table of contents with the tab sheets placed before instructions covering the subject. Additionally, each manual shall contain a comprehensive index of all manuals submitted in accordance with this paragraph. Manuals and specifications shall be furnished which provide full and complete coverage of the following subjects:

35.4 Operational Requirements: This document shall describe in concise terms, all the functional and operational

requirements for the system and its functions that have been implemented. It shall be written using common terminology for building operation staff and shall not presume knowledge of digital computers, electronics or in-depth control theory.

35.5 System Operation: Complete step by step procedures for operation of the system, including required actions

at each operator station; operation of computer peripherals; input and output formats; and emergency, alarm and failure recovery. Step-by-step instructions for system startup, back-up equipment operation, and execution of all system functions and operating modes shall be provided.

35.6 Maintenance: Documentation of all maintenance procedures for all system components including inspection,

periodic preventive maintenance, fault diagnosis, and repair or replacement of defective module. This shall include calibration, maintenance, and repair or replacement of all system hardware.

35.7 Test Procedures and Reports: The test implementation shall be recorded with a description of the test

exercise script of events and documented as test procedures. A provision for the measurement or observation of results, based on the previously published test specification, forms the test reports. The procedures record and the results of these exercises shall be conveniently bound and documented together.

35.8 Configuration Control: Documentation of the basic system design and configuration with provisions and

procedures for planning, implementing, and recording any hardware or software modifications required during the installation, test, and operating lifetime of the system. This shall include all information required to ensure necessary coordination of hardware and software changes, data link or message format/content changes, and sensor or control changes in the event system modification are required, and to fully document such new system configurations.

36.0 TRAINING

36.1 The Contractor shall provide the services of competent instructors who will provide instruction to designated personnel in the adjustment, operation and maintenance, including pertinent safety requirements, of the equipment and system specified. The training shall be oriented towards the system installed rather than being a general "canned" training course. Instructors shall be thoroughly familiar with all aspects of the subject matter they are to teach. The number of person-days (eight hours) of instruction furnished shall be as specified below as a minimum. A training manual shall be provided for each trainee that describes in detail the data included in each training program.

36.2 All equipment and material required for classroom training shall be provided by the contractor. A person- week shall be considered as 37.5 hours, 8:00 am to 12:00 noon, and 12:30 pm to 4:30 pm Monday through Friday. Provide 5 days of training as specified herein.



23

36.3 Training shall enable operators to accomplish the following objectives:

36.3.1 Proficiently operate system

36.3.2 Understand control system design and configuration

36.3.3 Create and change system graphics

36.3.4 Create, delete, and modify alarms, including configuring alarm reactions

36.3.5 Configure and run reports

36.3.6 Add, remove, and modify system's physical points

36.3.7 Create, modify, and delete application programming

36.3.8 Add a new controller to system

36.3.9 Download firmware and advanced applications programming to a controller

36.3.10 Configure and calibrate I/O points

36.3.11 Maintain software and prepare backups

36.3.12 Understand DDC system components

36.3.13 Understand system operation, including DDC system control and optimizing routines (algorithms)

36.3.14 Operate workstation and peripherals

36.3.15 Log on and off system

36.3.16 Access graphics, point reports, and logs

36.3.17 Adjust and change system setpoints, time schedules, and holiday schedules

36.3.18 Recognize common HVAC system malfunctions by observing system graphics, trend graphs, and other system tools

36.3.19 Access data from DDC controllers

36.3.20 Add new users and understand password security procedures

37.0 WARRANTY

37.1 Provide warranty certificates showing the name of the firm giving the warranty, dated from the issuance of the Certificate of Substantial Performance and acknowledged on specific equipment and systems.

37.2 Include these certificates with the Operation and Maintenance Manual in the appropriate sections.

37.3 Contractor shall give a minimum two-year warranty for parts and labor on all equipment and materials

installed and shall select materials and equipment where the Manufacturer gives the same warranty arrangements. Warranty shall commence on the date of the Engineers issuance of the Certificate of Substantial Completion.

37.4 Provide a warranty as indicated in 38.0 - Maintenance/Service.



24

37.5 The Contractor shall agree to make good at his own expense any equipment that fails to operate due to poor workmanship, manufacturing defect or improper installation. Any repairs shall be made at the convenience of the Engineer during normal working hours, unless deemed an emergency.

37.6 Provide upgrades to all software or all panel firmware issued during the warranty period at no charge to

Owner.

38.0 MAINTENANCE/SERVICE

********************************************************************* BAS contractor to show the price of service contract as separate line item. Applicable to New System Installations OR Major overhaul of existing BAS system/s *********************************************************************

38.1 Provide warranty in accordance with the warranty section of this specification. In addition provide scheduled

maintenance and service during the warranty period on all control system apparatus including but not limited to valves, dampers, linkages, control panels, interfaces, direct digital control systems, OWS, Server, BC, AAC, ASC, Software and application programs.

38.2 Scheduled preventive maintenance inspections will provide those services required to maintain the system at

maximum performance and reliability levels and may include the following:

38.3 Analyze, adjust, calibrate the applicable temperature sensors, humidity sensors, diagnostic LEDs, printers, power supplies, work stations, controllers, modems, input/output points, communication cabling, transmitters, transducers, UPS for the BAS system.

38.4 Conduct inspections and thorough preventive maintenance routine on each piece of covered equipment. In

addition, make tests and adjustments to ensure efficient and reliable operation of other major components.

38.5 Examine, clean and calibrate as required sensors, thermostats, humidity controls, temperature controls, pressure controls, relays, damper actuators, instrumentation and accessories directly pertaining to the Building Automation System.

38.6 Check and confirm control system sequence of operation to insure optimum system efficiency and economy.

38.7 A log of each loop tested and each control sequence verified shall be reviewed with the owner.

38.8 All components of the Pneumatics Control System will be serviced according to manufacturer’s

recommendations during each year of the contract. This will include (but not be limited to) all lubricant changes, filter changes, adjustments, calibrations and cleaning.

38.9 The system includes, but is not limited to, the air compressor, air receiver, pressure reducing valves, air

dryers and all sensors, controllers, transducers, damper and valve operators, thermostats, pilot positioners, electro-pneumatic switches, linkages and any other pneumatic and electronic devices used to maintain the environmental comfort in the building.

38.10 The Contractor will provide preventative maintenance and diagnostic inspections to all electronic system

components on a frequency established by manufacturer’s recommendations, component age and condition and discussion with the Supervisor of Operations responsible for the site.

38.11 Provide a fully trained BAS service technician and a Pneumatic fitter (Required for Pneumatic/DDC

system) a minimum of one day per month (8 hours for DDC technician and 8 hours for pneumatic fitter) during the warranty period to provide the preventive maintenance and service described above. Provide



25

written reports to the owner outlining the work performed. Allow for 12 annual visits of one day each (24 days total for 2 years) during the warranty period to provide required service. (This may change in accordance with the size of the project).

38.12 Provide emergency service for parts and labor on an as needed basis. Response to an emergency call

shall be 2 hours maximum on Mon.-Fri. including on holidays and weekends.

38.13 Provide remote service diagnostic monitoring from the local office. At the request of the owner, a service diagnostic call will be made to troubleshoot and resolve (if possible) any reported system complaints.

38.14 Provide a price for a three-year service agreement based on the above requirements to come in to effect

upon the completion of the warranty period. Show this price as OPTION: Service Agreement.

PART 2 – OPERATOR WORKSTATION (OWS) AND SOFTWARE

1.0 GENERAL

1.1 General Requirements: Section 23 09 23 BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEM (BAS)

1.2 Performance requirements of the Operator WorkStation (OWS) and the Graphical Users Interface are specified in this section.

1.3 Environmental Conditions: The OWS and its immediate associated devices shall be able to operate

properly under environmental conditions of 10 deg.C to 32 deg.C and a relative humidity of 20 to 90% non-condensing.

1.4 OWS shall be provided by the City's IT department. BAS contractor shall NOT include the cost of the

computer for the pricing of the project. The OWS shall be provided for centralized system control, information management, alarm management and data base management functions. All real time control functions shall be resident in the standalone Building Control Unit (BC) and local controllers (AACs and ASCs).

1.5 Provide two copies of all Programming Software; one each for OWS and a laptop; if requirement of a

laptop is deemed necessary otherwise provide only one copy. Requirement of a laptop is site specific and shall be provided by the City's IT department. City's project manager shall consult with the district operation manager/supervisor to determine if a laptop is required for the project.

1.6 Any computer on the BAS LAN shall be capable of displaying the systems in a graphical and dynamic format utilizing a standard web browser. Screen refresh shall be automatic. Manual refresh is not acceptable.

2.0 WORKSTATION HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS

2.1 Reference 1.1.5

2.2 BAS contractor shall coordinate with the City's IT department through the project manager to discuss minimum requirement of the workstation's (computer) hardware, software (operating system) to ensure BAS system will meet or exceed the performance requirement of this specifications.

2.3 Connection to the BAS LAN network shall be via an Ethernet network interface card, 100 Mbps.

2.4 Provide Workstations. The Workstation(s) will be located as directed by the engineer.

2.5 This Item is for guidance only. Hardware Base. Industry-standard hardware shall meet or exceed

DDC system manufacturer's recommended specifications. Hard disk shall have sufficient memory to store system software, one year of data for trended points specified by the conusltant's sequence of operation and the points list. Workstations shall be with a minimum of:



26

2.5.1 Intel Pentium 2.66 GHz processor (Pentium IV- Duo Core)

2.5.2 8 GB RAM

2.5.3 100 GB hard disk providing data at 100 MB/sec

2.5.4 48x CD-ROM drive

2.5.5 Keyboard

2.5.6 Mouse

2.5.7 24-inch 24-bit color monitor with at least 1024 x 768 resolution

2.5.8 Serial, parallel, and network communication ports and cables as required for proper system operation

2.5.9 Two (2) USB 2.0 or 3.0 ports

3.0 PRINTERS

3.1 BAS contractor to coordinate with the City's IT department through the project manager to ensure a network printer is connected to the Operator Workstation that is provided by the City's IT department.

3.2 If the site doesn’t have a printer available then City's IT department shall provide a desktop printer.

3.3 Printer Specifications- For Guidance only: The printer shall be a bubble jet or inkjet printer, 1440

x1440 dpi resolution, internal 1MB buffer memory, minimum 8 ppm in black. No colour printer is required.

4.0 UNINTERRUPTABLE POWER SUPPLIES

4.1 Provide the OWS, Server (if applicable), and each BC with individual UPS to provide clean, reliable, noise- filtered power at all times and to protect and maintain systems operation throughout short term power interruptions of at least 15 minutes duration. (site specific)

5.0 PROGRAMMING SOFTWARE

5.1 Custom Application Programming. Operator shall be able to create, edit, debug, and download

custom programs. System shall be fully operable while custom programs are edited, compiled, and downloaded. Programming language shall have the following features:

5.1.1 Language. Language shall be graphically based or English language oriented. If graphically

based, language shall use function blocks arranged in a logic diagram that clearly shows control logic flow. Function blocks shall directly provide functions listed below, and operators shall be able to create custom or compound function blocks. If English language oriented, language shall be based on the syntax of BASIC, FORTRAN, C, or PASCAL, and shall allow for free-form programming that is not column-oriented or "fill-in-the-blanks."

5.1.2 Programming Environment. Tool shall provide a full-screen, cursor-and-mouse-driven

programming environment that incorporates word processing features such as cut and paste. Operators shall be able to insert, add, modify, and delete custom programming code, and to copy blocks of code to a file library for reuse in other control programs.

5.1.3 Independent Program Modules. Operator shall be able to develop independently executing

program modules that can disable, enable and exchange data with other program modules.

5.1.4 Debugging and Simulation. Operator shall be able to step through the program observing intermediate values and results. Operator shall be able to adjust input variables to simulate



27

actual operating conditions. Operator shall be able to adjust each step's time increment to

observe operation of delays, integrators, and other time-sensitive control logic. Debugger shall provide error messages for syntax and for execution errors.

5.1.5 Conditional Statements. Operator shall be able to program conditional logic using compound

Boolean (AND, OR, and NOT) and relational (EQUAL, LESS THAN, GREATER THAN, NOT EQUAL) comparisons.

5.1.6 Mathematical Functions. Language shall support floating-point addition, subtraction,

multiplication, division, and square root operations, as well as absolute value calculation and programmatic selection of minimum and maximum values from a list of values.

5.1.7 Variables: Operator shall be able to use variable values in program conditional statements

and mathematical functions.

5.1.7.1 Time Variables. Operator shall be able to use predefined variables to represent time of day, day of the week, month of the year, and date. Other predefined variables or simple control logic shall provide elapsed time in seconds, minutes, hours, and days. Operator shall be able to start, stop, and reset elapsed time variables using the program language.

5.1.7.2 System Variables. Operator shall be able to use predefined variables to represent

status and results of Controller Software and shall be able to enable, disable, and change setpoints of Controller Software as described in Controller Software section.

5.2 The software shall provide the ability to perform system programming and graphic display engineering as part of a complete software package. Access to the programming functions and features of the software shall be through password access as assigned by the system administrator.

5.3 Demand Limiting Object. Provide a comprehensive demand-limiting object that is capable of controlling

demand for any selected energy utility (electric, oil, and gas). The object shall provide the capability of monitoring a demand value and predicting (by use of a sliding window prediction algorithm) the demand at the end of the user defined interval period (1-60 minutes). This object shall also accommodate a utility meter time sync pulse for fixed interval demand control. Upon a prediction that will exceed the user defined demand limit (supply a minimum of 6 per day), the demand limiting object shall issue shed commands to either turn off user specified loads or modify equipment set points to effect the desired energy reduction. If the list of equipment is not enough to reduce the demand to below the set point, a message shall be displayed on the users screen (as an alarm) instructing the user to take manual actions to maintain the desired demand. The shed lists are specified by the user and shall be selectable to be shed in either a fixed or rotating order to control which equipment is shed the most often. Upon suitable reductions in demand, the demand-limiting object shall restore the equipment that was shed in the reverse order in which it was shed. Each sheddable object shall have a minimum and maximum shed time property to effect both equipment protection and occupant comfort.

5.4 Start-Stop Time Optimization Object. Provide a start-stop time optimization object to provide the

capability of starting equipment just early enough to bring space conditions to desired conditions by the scheduled occupancy time. Also, allow equipment to be stopped before the scheduled un-occupancy time just far enough ahead to take advantage of the building’s flywheel effect for energy savings. Provide automatic tuning of all start / stop time object properties based on the previous day’s performance.

FOR TRIDIUM INTEGRATION (IF APPLICABLE) BAS CONTRACTOR SHALL CONFORM TO ITEMS 5.1, 5.2, 5.3, 5.4 PLUS ITEM 5.5

5.5 A library of control, application, and graphic objects shall be provided to enable the creation of all

applications and user interface screens. Applications are to be created by selecting the desired control objects from the library, dragging or pasting them on the screen, and linking them together using a built in graphical connection tool. Completed applications may be stored in the library for future use. Graphical User Interface screens shall be created in the same fashion. Data for the user displays is obtained by graphically linking the user display objects to the application objects to provide real-time data updates. Any real-time data value or object property may be connected to display its current value on a user display.



28

Systems requiring separate software tools or processes to create applications and user interface displays shall not be acceptable.

5.5.1 Programming Methods

5.5.1.1 Provide the capability to copy objects from the supplied libraries, or from a user-defined library to the user’s application. Objects shall be linked by a graphical linking scheme by dragging a link from one object to another. Object links will support one-to-one, many-to- one, or one-to-many relationships. Linked objects shall maintain their connections to other objects regardless of where they are positioned on the page and shall show link identification for links to objects on other pages for easy identification. Links will vary in colour depending on the type of link; i.e., internal, external, hardware, etc.

5.5.1.2 Configuration of each object will be done through the object’s property sheet using fill-in

the blank fields, list boxes, and selection buttons. Use of custom programming, scripting language, or a manufacturer-specific procedural language for configuration will not be accepted.

5.5.1.3 The software shall provide the ability to view the logic in a monitor mode. When on-line,

the monitor mode shall provide the ability to view the logic in real time for easy diagnosis of the logic execution. When off-line (debug), the monitor mode shall allow the user to set values to inputs and monitor the logic for diagnosing execution before it is applied to the system.

5.5.1.4 All programming shall be done in real-time. Systems requiring the uploading, editing, and

downloading of database objects shall not be allowed.

5.5.1.5 The system shall support object duplication within a customer’s database. An application, once configured, can be copied and pasted for easy re-use and duplication. All links, other than to the hardware, shall be maintained during duplication.

5.5.1.6 The user shall be able to pick a graphical function block from the menu and place on the

screen. Programming tools shall place lines connecting appropriate function blocks together automatically. Provide zoom in and zoom out capabilities. Function blocks shall be downloaded to controller without any reentry of data.

5.5.1.7 The programming tools shall include a test mode. Test mode shall show user real-time

data on top of graphical display of selected function blocks. Data shall be updated real- time with no interaction by the user. Function blocks shall be animated to show status of data inputs and outputs. Animation shall show change of status on logic devices and countdown of timer devices in graphical format.

5.5.1.8 Composite Object - Provide a container object that allows a collection of objects

representing an application to be encapsulated to protect the application from tampering, or to more easily represent large applications. This object must have the ability to allow the user to select the appropriate parameters of the contained application that are represented on the graphical shell of this container.

5.6 OPERATOR WORKSTATION SOFTWARE

5.6.1 Operating System: City's IT department will provide OWS including operating system.

5.6.2 The BAS software shall employ browser-like functionality for ease of navigation. It shall include a tree view (similar to Windows Explorer) for quick viewing of, and access to, the hierarchical structure of the database. In addition, menu-pull downs, and toolbars shall employ buttons, commands and navigation to permit the operator to perform tasks with a minimum knowledge of the HVAC Control System and basic computing skills. These shall include, but are not limited to,



29

forward/backward buttons, home button, and a context sensitive locator line (similar to a URL line), that displays the location and the selected object identification.

5.6.3 Real-Time Displays. The OWS, shall at a minimum, support the following graphical features and

functions:

5.6.3.1 Graphic screens shall be developed using any drawing package capable of generating a GIF, BMP, or JPG file format. Use of proprietary graphic file formats shall not be acceptable. In addition to, or in lieu of a graphic background, the GUI shall support the use of scanned pictures.

5.6.3.2 Graphic screens shall have the capability to contain objects for text, real-time values,

animation, colour spectrum objects, logs, graphs, HTML or XML document links, schedule objects, hyperlinks to other URLs, and links to other graphic screens.

5.6.3.3 Graphics shall support layering and each graphic object shall be configurable for

assignment to one a layer. A minimum of six layers shall be supported.

5.6.4 Modifying common application objects, such as schedules, calendars, and set points shall be accomplished in a graphical manner. Schedule times will be adjusted using a graphical slider, without requiring any keyboard entry from the operator. Holidays shall be set by using a graphical calendar, without requiring any keyboard entry from the operator.

5.6.5 Commands to start and stop binary objects shall be done by right-clicking the selected object and

selecting the appropriate command from the pop-up menu. No entry of text shall be required.

5.6.6 Right-clicking the selected object and using a graphical slider to adjust the value shall make adjustments to analog objects, such as set points. No entry of text shall be required.

5.6.7 System Configuration. At a minimum, the OWS shall permit the operator to perform the following

tasks, with proper password access:

5.6.7.1 Create, delete or modify control strategies.

5.6.7.2 Add/delete objects to the system.

5.6.7.3 Tune control loops through the adjustment of control loop parameters.

5.6.7.4 Enable or disable control strategies.

5.6.7.5 Generate hard copy records or control strategies on a printer.

5.6.7.6 Select points to be alarm-able and define the alarm state.

5.6.7.7 Select points to be trended over a period of time and initiate the recording of values automatically.

5.6.8 On-Line Help. Provide a context sensitive, on-line help system to assist the operator in operation

and editing of the system. On-line help shall be available for all applications and shall provide the relevant data for that particular screen. Additional help information shall be available through the use of hypertext. All system documentation and help files shall be in HTML format.

5.6.9 Security. Each operator shall be required to log on to that system with a user name and

password in order to view, edit add, or delete data. System security shall be selectable for each operator. The system administrator shall have the ability to set passwords and security levels for all other operators. Each operator password shall be able to restrict the operators’ access for viewing and/or changing each system application, full screen editor, and object. Each operator shall automatically be logged off of the system if no keyboard or mouse activity is detected. This



30

auto log-off time shall be set per operator password. All system security data shall be stored in an encrypted format.

5.6.10 System Diagnostics. The system shall automatically monitor the operation of all workstations,

printers, modems, network connections, building management panels, and controllers. The failure of any device shall be annunciated to the operator.

5.6.11 Alarm Console. The system shall be provided with a dedicated alarm window or console. This

window will notify the operator of an alarm condition, and allow the operator to view details of the alarm and acknowledge the alarm. The use of the Alarm Console can be enabled or disabled by the system administrator. When the Alarm Console is enabled, a separate alarm notification window will supersede all other windows on the desktop and shall not be capable of being minimized or closed by the operator. This window will notify the operator of new alarms and un- acknowledged alarms. Alarm notification windows or banners that can be minimized or closed by the operator shall not be acceptable.

5.6.12 Operator’s workstation software shall contain an easy-to-operate system; allowing configuration

of system-wide controllers, including management and display of the controller programming. This system shall provide the capability to configure controller binary and analog inputs/outputs.

5.6.13 The system shall be capable of utilizing third-party Windows-based programs for such things as

spreadsheet analysis, graphing, charting, custom report generation, and graphics design packages. Graphics generation shall be done using standard Windows packages. No proprietary graphics generation software shall be needed.

5.6.14 Provide software, which enables the non-programmer operator to easily perform, tasks which are

likely to be part of his daily routine.

5.6.15 The operator's console shall provide facilities for manual entries and visual displays enabling an operator to enter information into the system and obtain displays and logs of system information. All requests for status, analog, graphic displays, logs, and control shall be selected from the operator's console. The operator interface shall minimize the use of typewriter style keyboard by implementing a mouse or similar pointing device and "point and click" approach to command selection. The facility shall be provided to permit the operator to perform the following tasks: 5.6.15.1 Automatic logging of digital alarms and change of status message.

5.6.15.2 Automatic logging of all analog alarms.

5.6.15.3 System changes (alarm limits, set-points, alarm lock-outs, etc.).

5.6.15.4 Display specific points as requested by the operator.

5.6.15.5 Provide reports as requested by the operator and on Scheduled basis where so

required.

5.6.15.6 Display graphics as requested by the operator.

5.6.15.7 Display help information.

5.6.15.8 Provide trend logs as required by the operator.

5.6.15.9 Provide manual control of digital and analog outputs as required by the operator.

5.6.15.10 Direct the hard copy output of information to the device selected by the operator.

5.6.15.11 Data displayed on monitor to cyclic update as appropriate.

5.6.16 Online changes: 5.6.16.1 Alarm limits

31



5.6.16.2 Setpoints

5.6.16.3 Deadbands

5.6.16.4 Changes/deletions/additions of points.

5.6.16.5 Control and change of state changes.

5.6.16.6 Time of day, day, month, year.

5.6.16.7 Control loop control description changes for NCU based CDM's.

5.6.16.8 Control loop tuning changes

5.6.16.9 Schedule changes

5.6.16.10 Changes/additions/deletions to system graphics

5.6.16.11 Changes/additions/deletions to total systems

5.6.17 It shall be possible for the OWS operator to initiate analog and digital output commands. Where the BAS software normally originates these outputs, the provision shall exist for the operator to terminate automatic BAS control of any particular output and to originate a manual analog or digital output command. The provision shall exist for the operator to return analog or digital output command functions to automatic BAS software control.

5.6.18 It shall be possible for the OWS operator to place any computed system setpoint to a computed

basis or manual value as and when required.

5.6.19 All above functions shall operate under the password protection system.

5.6.20 A vocabulary of at least 25 different descriptions using at least six alphanumeric characters to identify engineering units for analog input and output points. Typical description is as follows: %, Deg.C, KPA, KW, KWH, L/S, CFM, Deg.F, PSI. The descriptions shall be alterable from the OWS console with the system on-line.

5.6.21 Upon operator's request, the system shall present the condition of any single point, any system,

and area or the whole system on printer or CRT. The output device shall be by operator's choice. Analog values and status displayed on the CRT shall be updated whenever new values are received. Points in alarm shall be flagged by blinking, inverse video different colour, bracketed, or by some other means to differentiate them from points not in alarm. Overridden (not in auto) points/values shall similarly be identified.

5.7 REPORTING ACCURACY

5.7.1 System shall report values with minimum end-to-end accuracy listed in Table 1.

5.8 CONTROL STABILITY AND ACCURACY

5.8.1 Control loops shall maintain measured variable at setpoint within tolerances listed in Table 2. Table 1 Reporting Accuracy

Measured Variable Reported Accuracy

Space Temperature ±0.5ºC (±1ºF)

Ducted Air ±0.5ºC (±1ºF)

Outside Air ±1.0ºC (±2ºF)

Dew Point ±1.5ºC (±3ºF)

32



Water Temperature ±0.5ºC (±1ºF)

Delta-T ±0.15ºC (±0.25ºF)

Relative Humidity ±5% RH for monitor only, ±3% RH for control

Water Flow ±2% of full scale

Airflow (terminal) ±10% of full scale (see Note 1)

Airflow (measuring stations) ±5% of full scale

Airflow (pressurized spaces) ±3% of full scale

Air Pressure (ducts) ±25 Pa (±0.1 in. w.g.)

Air Pressure (space) ±3 Pa (±0.01 in. w.g.)

Water Pressure ±2% of full scale (see Note 2)

Electrical (A, V, W, Power Factor) ±1% of reading (see Note 3)

Carbon Monoxide (CO) ±5% of reading

Carbon Dioxide (CO 2) ±50 ppm

Note 1: 10% - 100% of scale

Note 2: For both absolute and differential pressure

Note 3: Not including utility-supplied meters

Table 2 Control Stability and Accuracy

Controlled Variable Control Accuracy Range of Medium

Air Pressure ±50 Pa (±0.2 in. w.g.) ±3 Pa (±0.01 in. w.g.)

0-1.5 kPa (0-6 in. w.g.) -25 to 25 Pa (-0.1 to 0.1 in. w.g.)

Airflow ±10% of full scale Space Temperature ±1.0ºC (±2.0ºF)

Duct Temperature ±1.5ºC (±3ºF)

Humidity ±5% RH

Fluid Pressure ±10 kPa (±1.5 psi) ±250 Pa (±1.0 in. w.g.)

MPa (1-150 psi) 0-12.5 kPa (0-50 in. w.g.) differential

5.9 ERROR MESSAGES

5.9.1 Inform operator of all errors in data, errors in entry instructions, failure of equipment to respond to

requests or commands, or failure of communications between components of EMCS.

5.9.2 Error messages to be comprehensive and communicate clearly to operator precise nature of problem.

5.10 PASSWORD PROTECTION

5.10.1 Provide security system that prevents unauthorized use unless operator is logged on. Access

shall be limited to operator’s terminal functions unless user is logged on. This includes displays as outlined above.

5.10.2 Each user shall have an individual User ID, User Name and Password. Entries are alphanumeric

characters only and are case sensitive (except for User ID). User ID shall be 8 characters, User Name shall be 29 characters, and Password shall be 8 characters long. Each system user shall be allowed individual assignment of only those control functions and menu items to which that user requires access. All passwords, user names, and access assignments shall be adjustable online at the operator’s terminal. Each user shall also have a set security level, which defines access to displays and individual objects the user may control. System shall include 10 separate and distinct security levels for assignment to users.

33



5.11 AUDIT LOGS

5.11.1 Provide and maintain an Audit Log that tracks all activities performed on the NCU. Provide the ability to specify a buffer size for the log and the ability to archive log based on time or when the log has reached it=s user-defined buffer size. Provide the ability to archive the log locally (to the NCU), to another NCU on the network, or to a server. For each log entry, provide the following data:

5.11.2 Time and date

5.11.3 User ID

5.11.4 Change or activity: i.e., Change setpoint, add or delete objects, commands, etc.

5.12 TREND DATA

5.12.1 System shall periodically gather historically recorded selected samples of object data stored in

the field equipment (global controllers, field controllers) and archive the information on the operator’s workstation (server) hard disk. Archived files shall be appended with new sample data, allowing samples to be accumulated over several years. Systems that write over archived data shall not be allowed, unless limited file size is specified. Samples may be viewed at the operator’s terminal in a trendlog. Logged data shall be stored in spreadsheet format. Operator shall be able to scroll through all trendlog data. System shall automatically open archive files as needed to display archived data when operator scrolls through the data vertically. All trendlog information shall be displayed in standard engineering units.

5.12.2 Software shall be included that is capable of graphing the trend logged object data. Software

shall be capable of creating two-axis (x,y) graphs that display up to six object types at the same time in different colours. Graphs shall show object type value relative to time.

5.12.3 Operator shall be able to change trend log setup information. This includes the information to be

logged as well as the interval at which it is to be logged. All input, output, and value object types in the system may be logged. All operations shall be password protected. Setup and viewing may be accessed directly from any and all graphics on which object is displayed.

5.12.4 System shall be capable of periodically gathering energy log data stored in the field equipment

and archive the information on the operator workstation's hard disk. Log data shall include both instantaneous and accumulated values. Archive files shall be appended with the new data, allowing data to be accumulated over several years. Systems that write over archived data shall not be allowed unless limited file size is specified. System shall automatically open archive files as needed to display archived data when operator scrolls through the data. Display all energy log information in standard engineering units.

5.12.5 System software shall be provided that is capable of graphing the energy log data. Software shall

be capable of creating two-axis (x,y) graph that show recorded data, relative to time. All data shall be stored in comma-delimited file format for direct use by third-party spreadsheet or other database programs. Operation of system shall not be affected by this operation. In other words, it shall stay completely online.

5.12.6 Operator shall be able to change the energy log setup information as well. This includes the

meters to be logged, meter pulse value, and the type of energy units to be logged. All meters monitored by the system may be logged. All operations shall be password protected.

5.13 GRAPHICS

5.13.1 The operator’s workstation shall display all data associated with the project. The operator’s terminal software shall accept Windows BITMAP (*.bmp) format graphic files for display purposes. Graphic files shall be created using scanned, full colour photographs of system

34



installation, AutoCAD drawing files of field installation drawings and wiring diagrams from as-built drawings. Operator’s terminal shall display all data using 3-D graphic representations of all mechanical equipment.

5.13.2 Graphic Display. A graphic with 20 dynamic points shall display with current data within 10

seconds.

5.13.3 Graphic Refresh. A graphic with 20 dynamic points shall update with current data within 8 seconds and shall automatically refresh every 15 seconds

5.13.4 Colour graphic displays detailing hierarchical structure of facility, including floor plans, with multi-

level penetration to equipment level.

5.13.5 System shall be capable of displaying graphic file, text, and dynamic object data together on each display. Information shall be labelled with descriptors and shall be shown with the appropriate engineering units. All information on any display shall be dynamically updated without any action by the user. Terminal shall allow user to change all field-resident BAS functions associated with the project, such as setpoints, weekly schedules, exception schedules, etc. from any screen no matter if that screen shows all text or a complete graphic display. This shall be done without any reference to object addresses or other numeric/mnemonic indications.

5.13.6 All displays shall be generated and customized in such a manner that they fit the project as

specified. Canned displays shall not be acceptable. Displays shall use standard English for labelling and readout. Systems requiring factory programming for graphics or DDC logic are specifically prohibited. The installing contractor without factory dependency or assistance shall support all graphics and DDC programming locally.

5.13.7 Binary objects shall be displayed as ON/OFF/NULL or with customized text. Text shall be justified

left, right or centre as selected by the user. Also, allow binary objects to be displayed as individual change-of-state bitmap objects on the display screen such that they overlay the system graphic. Each binary object displayed in this manner shall be assigned up to three bitmap files for display when the point is ON, OFF or in alarm. For binary outputs, toggle the objects commanded status when the bitmap is selected with the system digitizer (mouse). Similarly, allow the terminal operator to toggle the object’s status by selecting (with the mouse) a picture of a switch or light, for example, which then displays a different picture (such as an ON switch or lighted lamp). Additionally, allow binary objects to be displayed as an animated graphic.

5.13.8 Animated graphic objects shall be displayed as a sequence of multiple bitmaps to simulate

motion. For example: when a pump is in the OFF condition, display a stationary picture of the pump. When the operator selects the pump picture with the mouse, the represented objects status is toggled and the picture of the pumps impeller rotates in a time-based animation. The operator shall be able to click on an animated graphical object or switch it from the OFF position to ON, or ON to OFF. Allow operator to change bitmap file assignment and also create new and original bitmaps online. System shall be supplied with a library of standard bitmaps, which may be used unaltered or modified by the operator. Systems that do not allow customisation or creation of new bitmap objects by the operator (or with third-party software) shall not be allowed.

5.13.9 Analog objects shall be displayed with operator modifiable units. Analog input objects may also

be displayed as individual bitmap items on the display screen as an overlay to the system graphic. Each analog input object may be assigned to a minimum of five bitmap files, each with high/low limits for automatic selection and display of the bitmaps. As an example, a graphic representation of a thermometer would rise and fall in response to either the room temperature or its deviation from the controlling setpoint. Analog output objects, when selected with the mouse, shall be displayed as a prompted dialog (text only) box. Selection for display type shall be individual for each object. Analog object values may be changed by selecting either the increase or decrease arrow in the analog object spinner box without using the keypad. Pressing the button on the right side of the analog object spinner box allows direct entry of an analog value and accesses various menus where the analog value may be used, such as trendlogs.

35



5.13.10 Analog objects may also be assigned to an area of a system graphic, where the colour of the defined area would change based on the analog objects value. For example, an area of a floor- plan graphic served by a single control zone would change colour with respect to the temperature of the zone or its deviation from setpoint. All editing and area assignment shall be created or modified online using simple icon tools.

5.13.11 A customized menu label (push-button) shall be used for display selection. Menu items on a

display shall allow penetration to lower level displays or additional menus. Dynamic point information and menu label push buttons may be mixed on the same display to allow sub-displays to exist for each item. Each display may be protected from viewing unless operator has appropriate security level. A separate security level may be assigned to each display and system object.

5.13.12 A mouse, or other form of digitizer, shall be used to move the pointer arrow to the desired item for

selection of new display or to allow the operator to make changes to object data.

5.13.13 Displays may be modified on site or via remote communications.

5.13.14 Entire system shall operate without dependency on the operator's terminal. Provide graphic generation software at each workstation.

5.14 ALARMS

5.14.1 Operator’s terminal shall provide audible, visual, and printed means of alarm indication. The alarm dialog box shall always become the top dialog box regardless of the application(s), currently running (such as a word processor). Printout of alarms shall be sent to the assigned terminal and port.

5.14.2 System shall provide log of alarm messages. Alarm log shall be archived to the hard disk of the

system operator’s terminal. Each entry shall include a description of the event-initiating object generating the alarm, time and date of alarm occurrence, time and date of object state return to normal, and time and date of alarm acknowledgement.

5.14.3 Alarm messages shall be in user-definable text English (or other specified language) and shall be

entered either at the operator’s terminal or via remote communication.

5.15 SCHEDULING

5.15.1 Operator’s terminal display of weekly schedules shall show all information in easy-to-read 7-day (weekly) format for each schedule. This includes all ON/OFF times (to the minute) for each days events.

5.15.2 Exception schedules (non-normal schedules, such as holidays or special events) shall display all

dates that are an exception to the weekly schedules. These speciality schedules shall be displayed at the operator’s terminal in a format similar to the weekly schedules, again allowing easy data entry. Exception schedule data is entered by the following methods: date entries (one day entries), date-to-date (a range or span of days), and by weekday (for example, a given day of a given week each month). User shall be able to scroll easily through the months for each year as a minimum.

5.15.3 At the operator’s terminal, the system user shall be able to change all information for a given

weekly or exception schedule if logged on with the appropriate security access.

5.16 ARCHIVING

36



5.16.1 Store back-up copies of all controllers databases in at least one OWS and/or the server(if applicable).

5.16.2 Provide continuous supervision of integrity of all controller databases. If controller loses database,

system to automatically download new copy of database to restore proper operation.

5.16.3 Data base back up and downloading to occur over LAN without operator intervention. Operator to be able to manually download entire controller database or parts thereof.

5.17 REPORTS

5.17.1 Provide a report facility to generate and format for display, printing, or permanent storage, as selected by the operator, the reports as specified in this section. If display output (CRT) is requested, it shall be scrollable; scroll bars will be used to allow easy and flexible movement within the report. Output to be sorted by area, system, point.

5.17.2 Periodic/Automatic Report: Provide the software to automatically generate any report specified,

the user will be able to specify the type of report, start time and date, interval between reports (hourly, daily, weekly, monthly) and output device. The software will allow the operator to modify the periodic/automatic reporting profile at any time.

5.17.3 As a minimum, the following reports shall be configured on the system:

5.17.3.1 Dynamic Reports: To allow operator to request a display of the dynamic value for the

user specified points which shall indicate the status at the time the request was entered and updated at an operator modifiable scan frequency. It shall be possible to select points on the following basis: 5.17.3.1.1 All points in all areas 5.17.3.1.2 Area (all points in area) 5.17.3.1.3 Area system (all points in system) 5.17.3.1.4 Area system point (individual point) 5.17.3.1.5 System (all points by system and point type) 5.17.3.1.6 System point (all points by system and point type) 5.17.3.1.7 Area point (all points by area and point type).

5.17.3.2 Summary Report: To permit the display or printing the dynamic value for the user

specified points which shall indicate the status at the time the CLM was entered. Reports to be available on same basis as dynamic reports. Output will be to the user selected output device.

5.17.3.3 Trend Reports: To permit the trending of points selected by the operator, including as a

minimum digital input and output, analog input and output, set points, and calculated values.

5.17.3.4 Historical Data Collection: Provision shall be made to ensure historical data is not lost.

The ability to off-load historical data to removable media, and to later load data previously backed-up, will be provided. Historical data values, for an operator specified time range and for operator specified points, may be output the same as for trend data.

5.17.3.5 Critical Alarm Summary: Provide a summary of those points in the critical alarm state

and include as a minimum; point acronym, point description, alarm type, limit exceed, current value, alarm type, time and date of occurrence.

5.17.3.6 Maintenance Alarm Summary: Provide a summary of those points in maintenance alarm

and include as a minimum; point acronym, point description, current value, alarm type, limit exceed, time and date of occurrence.

37



5.17.3.7 Alarm Summary: Provide a summary of all points in alarm and include as a minimum; point acronym, point description, current value, alarm type, limit exceeded, and time and date of occurrence.

5.17.3.8 Disable Point Summary: Provide a summary of all points in the disabled state and

include as a minimum point acronym and point description.

5.17.3.9 Run Time Summary: Provide a summary of the accumulated running time of selected pieces of equipment with point acronym and description, run time to date, alarm limit setting. The run time shall continue to accumulate until reset individually by means of suitable operator selection.

5.17.3.10 Schedule Summary: Provide a summary of all schedules and indicate as a minimum,

which days are holidays and, for each section, the day of the week, the schedule times and associated values; for digital schedules value will be on or off; for analog schedules value will be an analog value.

5.17.3.11 User Record Summary: Provide a summary of all user records to include as a

minimum; user name, password, initials, command access level and point groups assigned.

5.18 UTILITY SOFTWARE

5.18.1 Supply and install software products to allow the owner to access and manipulate the control schematic diagrams, and to access product data sheets in an electronic format.

5.18.2 Enter all soft copy submissions; including "Record" drawings as specified herein [Shop Drawings,

Product Data, etc.] in OWS.

5.19 WEB BROWSER CLIENTS

5.19.1 The system shall be capable of supporting at least 100 simultaneous users using a standard Web browser such as Internet Explorer. Systems requiring additional software to be resident on the client machine to enable a standard Web browser, or manufacturer-specific browsers shall not be acceptable.

5.19.2 The Web browser software shall run on any operating system and system configuration that is

supported by the Web browser. Systems that require specific machine requirements in terms of processor speed, memory, etc., in order to allow the Web browser to function with the BAS, shall not be acceptable.

5.19.3 The Web browser shall provide the same view of the system, in terms of graphics, schedules,

calendars, logs, etc., and provide the same interface methodology as is provided by the Graphical User Interface. Systems that require different views or that require different means of interacting with objects such as schedules, or logs, shall not be permitted.

5.19.4 The Web browser client shall support as a minimum, the following functions:

5.19.4.1 User log-on identification and password shall be required. If an unauthorized user

attempts access, a blank web page shall be displayed. Security using Java authentication and encryption techniques to prevent unauthorized access shall be implemented.

5.19.4.2 Graphical screens developed for the GUI shall be the same screens used for the Web

browser client. Any animated graphical objects supported by the Software shall be supported by the Web browser interface.

38



5.19.4.3 HTML programming shall not be required to display system graphics or data on a Web page. HTML editing of the Web page shall be allowed if the user desires a specific look or format.

5.19.4.4 Storage of the graphical screens shall be in the Network Control Unit (NCU), without

requiring any graphics to be stored on the client machine. Systems that require graphics storage on each client are not acceptable.

5.19.4.5 Real-time values displayed on a Web page shall update automatically without requiring a

manual refresh of the Web page.

5.19.5 User’s shall have administrator-defined access privileges. Depending on the access privileges assigned, the user shall be able to perform the following:

5.19.5.1 Modify common application objects, such as schedules, calendars, and set points in a

graphical manner. Schedule times will be adjusted using a graphical slider, without requiring any keyboard entry from the operator. Holidays shall be set by using a graphical calendar, without requiring any keyboard entry from the operator.

5.19.5.1.1 Commands to start and stop binary objects shall be done by right-

clicking the selected object and selecting the appropriate command from the pop-up menu. No entry of text shall be required.

5.19.5.1.2 View logs and charts

5.19.5.1.3 View and acknowledge alarms

5.19.5.1.4 Setup and execute SQL queries on log and archive information

5.19.6 The system shall provide the capability to specify a user’s home page (as determined by the log-

on user identification). Provide the ability to limit a specific user to just their defined home page. From the home page, links to other views, or pages in the system shall be possible, if allowed by the system administrator.

5.19.7 Graphic screens on the Web Browser client shall support hypertext links to other locations on the

Internet or on Intranet sites, by specifying the Uniform Resource Locator (URL) for the desired link.

CITY OF TORONTO PARKS, FORESTRY AND RECREATION … · .3 Submittal Schedule for Shop Drawings and...

Documents

Transcript of CITY OF TORONTO PARKS, FORESTRY AND RECREATION … · .3 Submittal Schedule for Shop Drawings and...